Home

User Bulletin. - AVEVA Product Support

1. Operation For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Utilities batch Job Batch Update Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 386 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 9 Customization API for Diagrams 12 1 SP3 A new Public Customization API has been added for the AVEVA Diagrams application This adds to the already great customization capabilities and will allow administrators and super users to make even more advanced customization through the new NET API For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Appendices Diagrams API Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 387 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 10 Explorer Enhancements 12 1 SP3 Explorer functionality has been extended to make the presentation of elements configurable by the user Now it is possible to decide if type should be shown before the element name in the node text and also to select the nodes members that should be sorted by name This can be set for each explorer separately Fitter Electrical E Schematic WORL 2 5 2 Project Templates 8 4 2 Project_Stencils 4 Piping Diagrams amp 4 4 HVAC Diagrams 5 4 Diagrams sas B 4 Equipments GF SCENGINE 1 GF SCPUMP 1 GF ATU_9001 GF SC_FWwD9001 F SC_FwD9002 F SC_FWD9003 GF SC_FwD9004 F SC_FWD9005 GF SC_FWD9006 ag SC_FWD9007 agp SC_wws001 agp SC_wws003 GF SC FO9001 F SC FO9002 F SC FO
2. HJ Doing it this way means that no deletion and recreation or copy is required for the DB and therefore neither is re adding to the MDB structures required Using RECONFIG SESSIONS in the FROM phase of the reconfigure operation will preserve both the sessions and references Summary Locally Encoded Legacy Databases e canbe opened for read access in both Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 and earlier versions e canbe opened for write access in both Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 and non Unicode versions but the range of characters which may be used is restricted to the set defined by the project settings e require that the project settings are correct so that characters can be interpreted correctly e canbe reconfigured toa Unicode encoded database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 10 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Unicode Encoded Databases e cannot be opened for read or write access in versions of Hull amp Outfitting prior to 12 1 e can store the full range of Unicode characters available in Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 2 12 Units of Measure 2 12 1 Units in Outfitting Distance and bore units are handled in much the same way as before and should need no conversion Other attributes will now be converted to and stored in appropriate units Where a database has stored all quantities of a dimension in the appropriate unit the new functions can be used without upgrade A
3. C Directional component V Classify as Instrument GTYPE INST Shape name GTYP_INST When this option is checked in the master item all SCVALV s that will be created from this master will have GTYPE set to INST Changing existing items 1 Changes on opened diagram It is possible to change existing SCVALV gtyp from VALV VTWA or VFWA to INST using the shape context menu option Replace Symbol Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 410 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 32314 1313 A150 GA 59 50 Refresh ve Show Text Linebreaks Set Release Status lf your current item has a GTYP different to INST and you replace this shape with a master that have the Classify as Instrument option checked then after shape replace the system will change GTYP from the existing one to INST and give a warning message in the System Message Log Of course this can work the opposite way around The system is able to change INST GTYP to VALV VTWA or VFWA 2 Batch changes In case you have many diagrams and you want to update all items on all drawings you can use the Set Instrument Loop Reference Replace symbol from Catalogue User Bulletin Update symbols according to master shapes option from the Batch Job update Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 411 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Batch Job Database tree Search Selection ga De WORL
4. Click Merge Holes the software creates a merged hole containing the selected penetrations 26 5 4 Modify and Delete Holes Created holes can be modified managed or deleted To modify a created hole click Modify CE The Hole Modification window is displayed modify the created hole as required the Free Hole Boundary Editor can also be started from this window To manage created holes from the Hole Association Manager window select Managed Selected Holes the Hole Management Definition window is displayed Use this window to add single or merged hole penetrations define the hole type penetrating clearance hole shape parameters positioning and an option for the hole to revert to the catalogues specifications To delete a created hole the user is prompted to pick a hole If the hole has no status it is deleted if the hole is Requested the user will be prompted to confirm the deletion If the hole is Approved deletion is not permitted 26 5 5 Utilities All panels within the volume of the selected pipe or HVAC can be added to the 3D view To do this from the Utilities part of the Managed Hole Utility window click Add Structure To view all pipe or HVAC elements within the volume of the selected structural panels from the Utilities part of the Managed Hole Utility window click Add Pipe HVAC To generate and define a report on selected holes click Hole Report The report can then be printed or exported to Excel
5. A Choose statement oje File View Modify Create Scheme Cutout and Clip Panel Cutoutin plate Cutoutin stifener Intercrossing panel Automatic fn 8 Define cutout in plate Cutout Data Clip Weld Cip Data Cip Hole GeneralStrings Point Cp 1 A amp Gave Designation 030 X 7 ie U Coord 100 aa Num V Coord 200 fe Plane Angle m amp Plate 7 Clip 2 4 Seam Designation HO500 400 v U Coord 250 X Stfiener VCoord 300 X p f Flange Angle X Q Bracket Clip 3 Hole Designation bd A Notch U Coord hd V Coord J Cutout Angle Doubling D Piar Comment bd a Excess Ceartab Gear Create nae d Go Ged Go Directly 2 Finish Benefits The model is now more complete Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design Planar Modelling Design Language of Hull Modelling Cutout Statement Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 164 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 8 Hull Marks User Interaction and Functionality 12 1 SP4 Description User interaction of the hull mark projection function has been totally revised Useful functionality has been added as well The dialog for creation of hull marks has been remade from scratch The improvements include the following e All fields have been assigned shortcut keys e Most dialog input
6. This means that it is possible for the user to create Diameter Radius dimensionings also in outfitting models if the above conditions are fulfilled i e e the primitive involves a cylindrical surface and is drawn in an orthogonal view e The view type is not true wireline or modelled wireline Benefits Possible to measure radius diameter in outfitting model items More accurate viewing of cylindrical surfaces in outfitting models Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 287 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 26 Remove Obsolete SDB Files 12 1 SP3 Description The Admin functionality to merge changes from several database sessions now takes external references to SDB files into consideration when sessions of PADD databases are merged All SDB files that become obsolete as of a session merge operation will be deleted as part of the operation Benefits The size of a SDB file can be rather big and a drawing can refer several versions of SDB files each per Save Drawing operation Through this new mechanism it is now possible to keep the file system clean from obsolete SDB files Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Admin Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions
7. Lock to plane Fit to plane The group of points that should be sorted in ascending descending order is selected by picking a first point and then use the SHIFT key to extend the selection The sorting popup menu is made visible by a mouse right click A manual sort option is also available similar to that one in Lines This works by selecting the first point and then using the CTRL key to extend the selection Right click and select Sort in selection order The selected points are sorted in the order they were selected Benefits The points of a curve can easily be sorted in the graphical window Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines PACE Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 67 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 4 Oil outflow 12 1 SP3 Description Calculations for cargo oil outflow according to MARPOL Regulation 23 Accidental oil flow performance have been added to the existing Oil Outflow module of AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics The module already included calculations of fuel oil tank outflow according to MARPOL Regulation 12A Oil fuel tank protection Benefits Ensures compliance with statutory regulations Compatibility constraints None For more information See User Guide nitial Design Hydrostatics Major Tasks Regulations Oil Fuel Outflow Affected programs AVEVA Ma
8. Pipe Branch Components Non standard Branch Connection This brings up a form enabling the user to create the connection and then either connect an existing branch or create a new one Main Branch Reselect 50 B 9 B1 Bore 50mm Connect Existing Branch V Create New Branch Create New Branch Branch Name 50 B 9 B6 Pick connection Point Adjust position Connection Details Branch Type Insert Connection Connected End Head Tapping Type None Note Bore Size v Insert Depth Default 0 00mm Apply For details please see the Pipework Design User Guide 26 3 2 New Pipe Fabrication Capabilities 12 1 SP4 New design tools comprise modelling extensions as well as checking and optimisation tools It is then possible to produce both fabrication amp installation drawings In addition there are configurable output tools for bending welding amp extrusion machines The new tools may be accessed from the main menu Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 459 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Pipe Fabrication Schematic 3D Integrator Window Help by Modelling Assign Bending Machine Spooling amp Checks gt Fabricated Pipe Ends Drawings r Modelling Consistency Check Export Fabrication Data gt Configuration Extensive configuration capabilities enable the system to ensure that the machines selected are capable of fabricating the pipes Consi
9. 15392 9280 TUBIBOX CLASH 15392 5666 tube 15392 9312 TUBVBOX 14 HH CLASH 15392 5666 tube 15392 9257 TUBIBOX 15 HS CLASH 15392 5666 Qube 15392 9270 TUBIBOX TE ad APANDA ade oS A POONA I Total tems 22 The whole grid can be printed or saved to file by the RH popup menu options Print Preview Save to Excel Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 476 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 It is necessary to scroll the grid to the right to see all the information about the clash such as Position Clashes 22 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report User Bulletin Drag a column header here to group by that column Clashed a x Y a z Clash A A gt A w 5303 00 J 100 B 2 B1 100 B 2 B1 100 B 2 B1 80 B 7 B1 50 B 9 B1 50 B 9 B1 50 B 9 B3 80 4 11 B1 80 4 11 B1 BOX 80 4 11 B1 Total tems 22 A Obstruction a Ay 15392 9265 OASE There are also columns for the primary element that clashes or obstructs any column can be dragged in the grid to group rows for example Clashes 22 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Navigate Clash ttem v cesar ash item a Obstructer a Clashed x 100 C 12 B2 1 item 100 C 13 B1 2 items 50 B 9 B1 2 items 50 B 9 B3 1 item 80 4 11 B1 4 items 80 B 14 B1 1 item 80 B 7 B1 1 item HH HH amp amp amp Re Tot
10. e List Drawings e Auto scale of drawing e Create Symbolic View e Recreate Symbolic View e Input Model e Schema run e Automatic Creation of Planar Parts PPanparts e Automatic Creation of Curved Parts CPanparts e Open Nest e Part Menu e Selected forms have changed behaviour to remember more information for example e Planar Hull Statement Wizard e Boundary to remember last used point mode e Stiffener to remember type connection and endcut codes e Flange to remember type connection and endcut codes e The reading of large objects from the database over a high latency network has been improved Work in this important area is on going See for example improvements for 12 1 SP3 in chapters 19 9 List Drawings and 19 11 Draw Outfitting Models in this bulletin Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 54 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 5 SetStart Method of NameSeq Object Description The NameSeq object that can be used to make user defined name sequences working with data in an NSEQ database has been extended with new methods Earlier the SetStart method made a name sequence to start over from a specified value Now it is possible to store a specific start value for a sequence by the SetStart method which no longer restarts a sequence By a new ReStart method a name sequence can be restarted from the stored initial value Name sequences with wraparound will automatically restart by the initial
11. Description It is possible to drag and drop model items onto the 2D Canvas The result of a successful drag drop operation matches that of an Insert Model using the Insert Model dialog It is possible to drag items to create new views insert into a specific view or insert into all vews The new functionality includes standard left mouse button drag drop right mouse button drag drop and other sources suchas dragging items from other gadgets than the explorer e g the Search Result and My Data Benefits Easy ways to insert Model to the 2D canvas Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Model Viewing and General Drafting Common Functions and Routines Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 342 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 74 Marine NET API hull views Description All hull symbolic views can now be created and modified from the user interface of Marine Drafting 12 1 The corresponding Marine NET APIs have therefore been implemented into the AVEVA Marine Drafting namespace as well The following Marine NET APIs have been implemented in the AVEVA Marine Drafting namespace Please note that some APIs have been renamed to reflect changes in menus The changes are marked with bold Please also note that MarDrafting Recreate is used to rec
12. In earlier versions after parts splitting the names of curved plate parts belonging to a CL panel have ended in SP even for PS SB specific or symmetric plates It is now possible to control the plate part names in such cases optionally having the names reflecting the actual plate symmetries The old naming for a panel BLOCK1 2SP with one CL plate and one symmetrical plate both PS and SB was e BLOCK1 2SP 1SP e BLOCK1 2SP 3SP e BLOCK1 2SP 4SP The new naming will be e BLOCK1 2SP 1SP e BLOCK1 2SP 3P e BLOCK1 2SP 4S To use the new naming rules for plates belonging to a CL panel set the environment variable SBH_CPAN_RENAME_PARTS to CL Benefits Project administration becomes easier due to increased consistency in naming of shell plates and shell stiffeners as well as production parts The plates and stiffeners will keep the names as given by the user even after they have been added to a curved panel The naming of curved plate parts after parts splitting will reflect the individual storing Compatibility Constraints The new naming should not be mixed with the old one in an on going project For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept About Naming Specific Name Rules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 229 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions
13. Note It is not possible to delete a surface which have objects associated with it e g the surface have been used when creating curved hull objects Register Surfaces Registered Name Suffix Type Source Design TTPHULLC Main Hull Lines ttpe Shell Hu Project Shell Hu Project Deck Hu Project Shell Hu Project Shell Hu Project Shell Hu Project Shell Hu Project 9 CYL8 Shell Hu a ect 0 BLO Shell Surface 50_090513 11 CLN Shell urface test CINA Shell Surface th Ionian au JF Z ALS IMO oO s y gt 7 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 8 M O F FA E Benefits Improved administration of surfaces Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Project Menu Surfaces Affected Programs Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 150 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 19 Block Recreate All Description A new function Recreate All has been added to right click menu in the Block Edit dialogue When activated all blocks are recreated using the definition data stored with the blocks Benefits Enables all blocks to be recreated in one operation Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Project Menu Block and AVEVA Space Management
14. Panel Curve RSO By Coordinates Origin Uaxis Vaxis X Y LPO Z By Name Name _RSO_STAGD 9 Panel Bracket Stiffener Fange Component no 1 Along RSO Only Curent Pa Looking For Att PS SB Top Bot Pick Replace existing view ja Po ioe Create View Plane Limits Select Outfit Misc Name Sean Scale 1 50 Ec Plane j x Y zZ 3points Panel Curve RSO E By Coordinates rag Origin Uais Vads Es x E Y LPO E Z By Name Name _RSO_STAGD Bracket ange Component no 1 Z Along RSO d Looking For At PS SB Top Bot Pick Replace existing view fee E o Benefits Staggered symbolic views can be made Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 256 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design Planar Modelling User Guide Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions Model Generation and View Functions View Create Affected Programs All Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 257 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 2 Folders in HCMWLD 12 1 SP4 Description Folders have been added below the surfaces in the node HCMWLD of the database browser The folders contain all plates profiles seams and curves that are associated with the surface The folder names are shown in the picture below a HCMWLD HCMW
15. AVEVA Surface Manager Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 129 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 13 2 Space Definition Data and Re Create of Space Arrangements 12 1 SP3 Description The definition data used when creating space arrangements is stored in two ways as an XML file in the project already available and as definition data in the database together with the space arrangement new in this release The new storing of definition data can be used to recreate an arrangement when any of the involved surfaces or RSOs has been changed This is done by using the function Space Management gt Select and Create by giving the name of the arrangement that needs to be recreated The function will get all relevant data and the arrangement can be recreated The new functionality is activated only if the optional database upgrade is done See separate release note with title Optional Upgrade Benefits Enables the recreation of space arrangements Compatibility Constraints The XML format has been changed to better fit with the new possibilities The consequence of this is that old XML input files can not be used anymore For More Information See User Guide Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Space Management Menu Select and Create Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 130 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 13 3 S
16. Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Diagrams Working with Diagrams P amp ID Grid Definition P amp ID Grid Definition File Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 383 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 6 Diagrams Rules Configurable Consistency Check 12 1 SP3 A new capability has been introduced in AVEVA Diagrams allowing the Consistency Check Rules to be configured according to customer requirements and project standards This development has been combined with the existing Auto Formatting Rules to form anew common function that is called Diagrams Rules Using the new function the Consistency Check Rules that were built in to previous releases are now available in an open format This allows customers to modify or remove the in built rules and also to add their own checking rules as required It is now also possible to set up the rules to be executed automatically for example on connection of shapes or if so preferred they can be still be executed manually as before for example to allow temporary inconsistencies Automatic Refresh With previous releases a Refresh command had to be executed to refresh the currently open drawing with any updates that had been done directly to the database For example if the Command Line or Attributes form was used to update the database the Refresh command had to be execut
17. Data Management View Admin a 930 Process Lis RR ede X Cut F i New Als fe Select All IK Clear Filters E arie Ba Copy Claim BOG vertical View F Reset Cell Feedback Lines GH Open Edit Datasheet S Reports gt Next E Paste X Delete A f Auto Size Columns a Quick Report lt Lists and Schedules Clipboard Records Datasheets Grid Actions Reporting System 250 B 5 A3B 75 rocess System Stabilizer Bottoms 01 A Process System A AST Light Hydrocarbon 01 A Process System A 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 1 Light Hydrocarbon 01 Bsysorp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 10 Product 01 B sysgrp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 14 Fuel Gas 01 B sysorp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B2 Stabilizer Bottoms 01 B sysgrp Process System B 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 4 Reboiler Feed 01 B sysgrp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 5 Reboiler Return 01 B sysgrp Process System B 250 B 5 A3B 75 BS Column Overhead 01 B sysorp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B7 Condenser Outlet 01 B sysgrp Process System B 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 8 Reflux Pump Suction 0 B sysgrp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 B 9 Reflux 01 B sysgrp Process SystemB 250 B 5 A3B 75 c 12 100 00 C 12 LIMBOSPEC Fuel Oil ot c Process System C 250 B 5 A3B 75 C 13 100 00 C 13 FAc Reboiler Fuel Oil 01 c Process System C 250 B 5 A3B 75 W 13 200 00 W 13 AIA Reflux Cooling Feed 01 cw Chilled Water System 250 B 5 A3B 75 W 14 200 00 W 14 AIA R
18. None For More Information User Guide Assembly Planning Graphical User Interface Context Sensitive Menu Functions Affected Programs Hull Design Outfitting Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 248 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 7 Curved Hull Panel as Base Panel for Assembly Orientation Description Through the assembly properties dialog when the predefined orientation is set to Specific Panel it is now possible to select curved panel from the enumeration list of hull panels The orientation of the selected curved hull panel is calculated and assigned as the orientation of the assembly The method to calculate the orientation of a curved hull panel utilizes a plane derived from the corner points provided by the seam limits the same method as used by the Jigs calculations Benefits Can use curved hull panels as base panel for assembly orientation Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Assembly Planning Graphical User Interface Context Sensitive Menu Functions Properties Affected Programs Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 249 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 8 Clean Up Assembly References Description Any type of element deleted is captured for an assembly specific evaluation to see if the element is referenced from any assembly node and if sothen the referen
19. SSisisisisiSiS lt lt lt lt lt SJs lt lt SiS Project Defaults Dictionaries p Name Sample Schematic Design RuleSet E Spec Queries Source DB Type O Configurations Target DB Type DE SSCS lt Compare Colours H Categories B Rule Sets Sample Schematic Design RuleSet E Sample Engineering Design Ruleset Integrator can still work with older configuration files but some tools are provided to assist upgrade You can import user defined Comparison Categories into the Configuration Explorer because these are user specific you will only get those that you yourself have previously defined for this project Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 365 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin You can import Rule Sets from old configuration files thus allowing you to combine the contents of multiple files into one new file and removing the need to rename configuration files Rename Insert For more information refer to section 6 of the Integrator User Guide Changes to PML Methods New PML methods are provided to select a particular configuration file to get the list of Configurations defined in the current file and to select a Configuration Ot
20. Select an object in the explorer and right click to see the context menu If there are linked or matched objects available they will appear under Navigate To Design General Application AVEVA PDMS Project Basic 3D View 1 fA Design Display Edit View Selection Query Settings Utilities Create Modify Delete Schematic 3D Integ Auto ll Solid i CE ELECEQUIP_111 x LocalSettings Zna ADE biS z z ii Design Explorer 7 X Schematic Explorer a x Fiter Equipment x Fiter Electrical K S SITE ELECTRICAL_MODEL ZONE SWITCHGEAR F EQUI ELECEQUIP_101 EQUI ELECEQUIP_102 EQUI ELECEQUIP_103 EQUI ELECEQUIP_104 EQUI ELECEQUIP_107 EQUI ELECEQUIP_108 EQUI ELECEQUIP_109 EQUI ELECEQUIP_110 4 SCGROU CTBHTEST INTSCHE Diagrams SCGROU CTBHTEST INTSCHE Pipelines E F SCGROU CTBHTEST INTSCHE Equipment Equipments Hof SCEQUI J9005B GF SCEQUI J90054 HEF SCEQUI F9002 HEF SCEQUI C9005C D HGF SCEQUI C9005A B SCGROU CTBHTEST INTSCHEM Instruments TAA SP EQUI ELECEQUIP_111 ROU ELECTRICAL_SCHEMA EQUI ELECEQUIP_112 3D View CGROU SWITCHGEAR_SCHEMA EQUI ELECEQUIP_ 113 Attributes T Equipments ae EQUI ELECEQUIP_114 F SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_101 EQUIELECEQUIP_115 Rename GP SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_102 EQUI ELECEQUIP_116 Delete GP SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_103 EQUI ELECEQUIP_11 GF SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_104 EQUI ELECEQUIP_118 Add To My Data F SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_1
21. gt lt value gt lt var gt Please note that the new drawing types will only be set when you run the ADP applications in Marine Drafting they will not be set in Outfitting Draft Below is a summary of the new types Name of Drawing Type as Marptype Environment variables Displayed in the Open Drawing Dialogue HVAC sketch SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB_PADD lsometric ADP drawing SB_ISOADP_PDB SB_ISOADP_PDB_PADD Area Based ADP drawing SB_ABAADP_PDB SB_ABAADP_PDB_PADD Multi Discipline Support ADP drawing SB_MDSADP_PDB SB_MDSADP_PDB_PADD Steelwork Detailing ADP drawing SB_STEELWORK_DETAIL_PDB SB_STEELWORK_DETAIL_PDB_PAD D The drawing type is not yet active in Marine Drafting since you cannot run these ADP tools in Marine Drafting yet but they are reserved for future use Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 280 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Benefits It is now easier to organize your ADP drawings and to list open them in the Open Drawing dialog Compatibility Constraints In order to see the new drawing types you must upgrade your PADD database s with the optional upgrade 12010301 For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 281 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 20 Draw Pipe Spools 12 1 SP3 Description It is possible to draw pipe spools in mari
22. 377 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 12 Example Macro Some users may prefer to use a macro to run the comparison The example macro below compares all schematic equipment and pipelines that appear on a particular diagram File compare macro for user guide pmlimac Initialise Integrator integratorInit Collect schematic equipment and pipelines that appear on this drawing scgroup Piping Diagrams sctypes SCEQUI SCPLIN diagExp name of diaref eq A1 51 2003 sccoll object COLLECTION sccoll scope scgroup dbref sccoll types sctypes split sccoll filter object expression diagExp Integrator compare method needs array of strings comlist ARRAY do element values sccoll results comlist append element ref string enddo Set report direct to file and do compare l integrator setreportvisible false integrator setreportpath c mac compareReport xml if comlist size gt 0 then integrator compare comlist handle any write error text elsehandle none Write out the compare summary lintegratorSupportHandler printSummary View the report unless running in non graphics mode if not istty then file object FILE c mac compareReport xml if file exists then l
23. E OWNER 100 B 1 3 items 100 B 1 B1 BRAN 100 B 1 B2 BRAN False unset E OWNER 100 B 2 2 items 100 B 2 B1 BRAN False unset unset OWNER 400 6 OWNER 100 C 12 3 items OWNER 100 C 13 1 item E OWNER 100 C 15 3 items E OWNER 100 C 16 3 items Use of Summary in Calculated Fields Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 498 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Where a summary field is used in a report the results of this summary cannot be used in a calculated field This has been identified as a future enhancement A workaround is available Use of the Results of one Calculated Field in Another Calculated Field It is not possible to use one calculated field in another calculated field This has been identified as a future enhancement A workaround is available Not Possible to Hide Group Header Only In the report designer hiding a group header via the Group and Sort window also hides the group footer However hiding the group footer still leaves the group header visible Workaround To hide only the group header assign the height as 0 to group header PageRange Property Ignored when the ExportMode Property is set to SingleFile DevExpress recommends that the ExportMode should be set to any other value to resolve this issue AVEVA Net Gateway Unicode Characters The field list explorer will not display Unicode characters unless the respectiv
24. Functions Overview Functions in the Project Menu Block Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 151 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 20 Right Click Menu on Blocks Description A right click menu showing the block edit function has been added when right clicking block geometry in a drawing The following menu is displayed and the block edit or the recreate function can be selected to operate on the indicated block Block Edit Block Recreate Benefits Enables block modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 152 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 21 Jumbo Panels Removed Description The functions handling jumbo panels have been either removed or modified to handle any kind of planar panel The functionality of the removed functions is covered by more recent concepts like modelling panels on RSOs and the use of Design Panels The term jumbo panel is removed from dialogs and messages and the data type object code 1 interval previously associated with them 800 899 is reserved for future use Benefits Obsolete functions removed from the system Compatibility Constraints None For More
25. Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Check for Clashes within set Limits only From 1000 50 3851 50 A l E East w 19000 00 North 17260 50 up 24375 40 al Volume Current Element v Clear v Display s33w24d Parallel Model Rotate To set limits the Position can be directly input or set using the options e Current Element e Picked Elements e Defined by 2 Picks e Current Selection e Current List The 3D view has all the expected functionality of a standard 3D view and can be Printed and Saved to file by setting focus to the view and selecting from the View gt Print Graphics and Copy Image options 26 8 1 Reports If a text report of the clashes is required this can be done by ticking the Export report to file toggle on the Report panel The report will be written to file each time a Check is performed Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 480 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Clashes 22 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Export report to file Options Position Listing o List O world O Site off nee Type Check Duplicate BRAN EQUI First Second Both FRMW HANG PIPE Levels RTRA REST Clashes Clearances Touches SBFR SITE STRU SUBE SUBS ZONE Report format Header Main Body C Nu
26. Outfitting has always provided conversions for distance and pipe bore measurements to cater for the use of both Metric and Imperial English units This has allowed users to work with feet and inch input amp output but with database storage always in millimetres Area and volume units have been derived from the length units Other physical quantities have been handled as purely numeric and have had no conversions applied to them Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 extends these facilities to a much wider range of measures and includes built in definitions and conversion factors for a wide variety of units of measure with standardised storage and efficient conversion These extensions are needed to provide for the much wider range of data now being handled particularly for plant engineering and schematic data These data now include Distance Bore Area Volume Angle Weight Temperature Density Pressure Force Voltage Current Impedance and many others Please note that this does mean that the behaviour of some real attributes is different users PML applications that check or manipulate these values will need to be reviewed Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 62 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 13 Extract Claims in Hull Applications Description Hull object locking claiming and releasing in extracts has been improved When working in extracts itis no longer a requirement to make explicit extract clai
27. SBH_QUALITY_LIST to the catalogue in the Property World The quality elements can be defined in Paragon using the PML script HullCreateQualityList Input to the script is the file defined by the environment variable SBH QUALITY_LIST Benefits This change is beneficial for projects using Global Compatibility Constraints The qualities must be defined on cata For More Information Further details are given in the 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 109 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 17 Shellx with Plate Scantlings Position Numbers and Material Quality Description Med Modelling AVEVA Marine Project MIP SAES Rain viewport imei ne Miil zw Y xo m BHAQHh8RS apg O O ByeRmMo The shell expansion view is now created with plate thickness plate quality and plate position number annotated on each plate Furthermore each plate is drawn with a hatch pattern chosen to display the plate thickness that is used The user can control the visibility of this information in two ways By using the function Symbolic View gt Curved Hull View gt Properties and picking a shell expansion view The user will get the possibility to display or hide the plate information Furthermore if plate hatching is chosen to be shown an accompanying legend can also be created that shows each used hatch pattern an
28. Schematic Model Manager Diagrams and TAGS Running existing reports should be simple For detailed instructions on designing new reports please see the new Report Designer User Guide A chapter in that guide gives some further information about running reports from the Search results grid and from Run Report Standard Reporting gt Run Report Designer Export r Publish To AVEVA Net Configuration Reference Data A new PML Reporting API is documented in the Software Customisation Reference Manual 4 6 2 Classic Reporting The PML based reporting tool now known as Standard Reporting is still available as before Reporting gt memeta e Reports Export gt Quick Reports Reference Data The reporting functions are largely unchanged however there are some changes due to the implementation of more units handling The effect is that e The units output for quantities other than distance will be the appropriate current working unit distances will be given in mm unless inch is specified e When Units Conversion is set to Off quantities will have their units appended In this case distances will be in mm with mm appended for example a one inch distance will be shown as 25 4mm When Units Conversion is set to Any mm or Inch the units are not appended but are show as 25 4 or 1 Details are available as before in the Reporting Reference Manu
29. Secondary shapes will be a group that cannot be edited except changing the layout Consistency Check will identify the need to refresh when the original has been changed AVEVA Diagrams E File Edit View Insert Format Tools PAIO Object Oste Shape Window Help Tere hE COL IVI DS Mi wina HE SD ABB o hahh A gt 1058 Ps Ps t Nse TRS see oo o a R A ore M a nT ee a ere eS scrim a a lt n ay ee Primary Shapes Arrangement Secondary Shapes Arrangement Benefits Allows for more flexibility in the diagrams An entire pipeline or parts of a pipeline can be represented on a different diagram Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Diagrams Working with Diagrams Primary Secondary Shapes Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 382 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 5 Customisable Drawing Grid in Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Description Definable grid configuration by an XML file griddef xml Grid position available as a pseudo attributes GRIDXPOS amp GRIDYPOS Shape Data Incoming OPC x Name SCOPCI1 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH A150 02 Text OPCREF GRIDXPOS OPCREF GRIDYPOS ActType SCOPCI 38 Arrive 2 e gt Benefits Can be used for shape annotation of for example Off page connectors
30. Select De Select All De Select Current Hide Remove from 3D view Zoom To Walk To Cancel Primitives owned by the following additional element types are affected STRU SUBS VOLM SVOLM PTRA AREADE Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 442 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 2 Move Drag Move and Plane Move Commands The Piping Equipment HVAC and old cable tray application now have new positioning menus Structural move commands are unchanged The new forms provide a WRT gadget to allow direction to be specified in terms of a local co ordinate system In addition UNDO has been implemented for all move operations i e when the Apply button is clicked All picks are now EDG picks replacing the old ID style picking This allows most of the pick functions to be replaced by a single EDG pick i e screen P point graphics and element picks can all be done using standard EDG position picks Note that many of the functions provided by these menu commands can also be achieved by using the Model Editor and Pipe Route Editor 25 2 1 Summary of Move Drag Move and Plane Move options The Move commands enable the user to move the Current Element CE in a given direction CE can be moved by a given distance in that direction or it can be moved to a position relative to another element or relative to a plane through a given position For piping and equipment the Drag command moves a piping item toget
31. Text Value Functionality has been improved Here the user can toggle between updating on component level whole dimensioning and part level individual texts in it To toggle just press the Option button when the system asks the user to indicate the dimensioning text to modify Modifications both on component and part level will be persisted Move Dimension Text Functionality has been improved and renamed from Transform Text Here the user can move individual texts within an arbitrary linear dimensioning The changed position of the measure text will be persisted Flip arrow No change of functionality Modification is not persisted as before In case the Drafting default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERSISTED_GEOM is set to Yes the same part level functionality that is offered within the Modify Dimension function can be also be invoked by clicking the right mouse button RMB on a text in a linear dimensioning and selecting one of the submenus RMB Edit or Edit Text same functionality as Modify Dimension Text Value RMB Move or Modify Move Text Same functionality as Modify Dimension Move Dimension Text Note the whole dimension line will not be moved as in 12 0 but only the indicated text within the dimensioning RMB Properties Same functionality as Modify Dimension Text Properties Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 350 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Benefits Improved productivity in dimension
32. e POSE Easting coordinate only e g E12250 W9675 POSN POSU POSX POSY POSZ are also provided Note that the codeword POSE can have two meanings depending on the context for SCTNs it means the POSE attribute Section End Position in other cases it means the Easting of the POS attribute For other position attributes single coordinates can be obtained by using a single index qualifier For example e GCOFG 2 would give the Northing Y coordinate of the Gross Centre of Gravity Positions can be output in format by appending to the codeword For example e POS would give 12250 7890 3120 for the example above For full details please refer to Chapter 14 of the DRAFT User Guide 20 13 Export to CAD Formats Significant improvements have been made to the export of DXF DWG and DGN format files from Draft using the configurable drivers Draft_XXX_Ll Recommended AutoCAD versions are 2007 2010 as shown in section 2 9 1 The DXF version used is now AutoCAD 2006 so it cannot be supported in earlier releases Recommended MicroStation format is now v8 Additional limitations may apply for earlier releases For full details of configuration please refer to the Draft User Manual 20 14 Support for Unicode Text Drawing export to recent releases of AutoCAD and MicroStation should now cope with all supported languages for which the computer is set up Full support is not possible for AutoCAD releases be
33. e Label e Note e Position Number e Hatching e Markup e Cloud When entering the Edit Delete lt system component gt function press ALL and then OPTIONS to delete all system components within a specified subpicture Now You can indicate the subpicture from which to delete all system components Delete Specific E ee Benefits Improved productivity in the delete function Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Edit Delete Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 300 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 37 Multi line Dimension Texts 12 1 SP2 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP2 itis possible for the user to create multi line text in the following kind of dimensionings e Linear 2D and 3D e Radius e Diameter e Angle 2D and 3D e Curved e Axis Parallel e Distance To Plane Leader Box The marker for new line separator is hash slash Example for Linear dimensioning Dimensioning Linear 2D Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 301 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Benefits Improved productivity in dimensioning functions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Se User Guide Marine Drafting Operator s Instructions Dimension Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 19
34. if is H i Mh iH ah Ws te Mi My M K aR OY hy Oe i 4 Mi N DGA O NA i fy is Properties Unit system Colour V Same as border Layer 0 ox concei coy Benefits Possibility to use the Outfitting Draft defined Fill Styles in Marine Drafting including association Compatibility Constraints The new attributes added to HPATTErns see Outfitting Draft might not be handled in Marine Drafting Note that the old Hatch Pattern concept will be deprecated in a future release Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 314 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Modify Fill Style Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 315 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 49 Symbol Files Description The files holding the different symbol fonts have been changed from binary to ASCII format and renamed from d012syxxx sbd to d012syxxx port The reason for this is that these files now will be easier to maintain and also somewhat more readable for the human eye even though updating such a file still should be done with specific Drafting functionality Benefits It will be easier for both provider and customer to maintain the new format Compatibility Constraints The system defined symbol font files will be
35. one of the longitudinals and a cutout for the same longitudinal The figure below shows two other longitudinals where the value Yes has been given in the Automatic Bevel box stiffener attaching longitudinal Here the automatic bevel defined in the Shell Stiffener is considered This means that the intersection point of the mould plane of the Shell Stiffener and the hull curve in the panel plane will be modified to Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 206 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin accept tight connection at the trace of the Shell Stiffener When modelling plane panels components e g stiffeners cutouts referring such a Shell Stiffener will be adjusted to meet this modification When creating profile parts of these Shell Stiffeners there are no problems with the profile size When creating plate parts of the Shell Stiffeners via a control file defined by the logical name SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB there are no problems with the profile size of the web plate when the inclination angle seen from the mould edge of the Shell Stiffener is positive i e for the lower profile in the figure above However if the connection angle when seen from the mould edge of the Shell Stiffener is negative the current solution in the system will result in a too big profile part The first step when creating the plate part of the web of the profile is to build up the geometry in the profile plane The upper part of the w
36. or hierarchy of elements to a previous state gt REVert ELEment l l HIERarchy lt selele gt AT z l l BEFore lt comparison gt gt where the lt comparison gt syntax is similar to that following the SINCE keyword in the DIFFERENCE and OUTPUT CHANGES commands gt lt date time gt LATEST t EXTRACT extno extname s STAMP lt name gt 4 t gt If the BEFORE option is used the elements will be reverted to the state they had before the specified session Examples REVERT HIER EQUIP AT LATEST reverts the element hierarchy rooted at EQUIP to the latest saved session REVERT HIER EQUIP BEFORE LATEST reverts the hierarchy rooted at EQUIP to the state it had before the latest saved session REVERT ELE E1301 AT 20 16 26 3 2010 reverts the single element E 1301 to the state it had on the given time and date REVERT HIER PIPES AT STAMP StampMilestone7 reverts the hierarchy rooted at PIPES to the state it had at the named stamp REVERT HIER CE AT EXTRACT reverts the hierarchy rooted at the current element to its state in the parent extract The Revert command ensures that every element creation
37. respectively But certain selections could not be made e g a selection of both stiffeners and flanges was not possible because making a filter accepting stiffeners will exclude flanges and vice versa Likewise selecting only the blocks AB123 and AB124 but not the other blocks with names starting with AB12 was not possible This can now be done using the vertical bar character as the OR operator The two alternative patterns must be surrounded by parentheses having the OR operator between them E g in the example above with the two blocks the expression AB123 AB124 will only accept panels belonging to these two blocks Note that no blanks are added around operator and parenthesis AB1 FR AB2 FR will accept panels with a name containing the letters FR and starting in AB1 or AB2 To select stiffeners and flanges with a material grade equal to A23 the expression can be STI FLA QUA A23 The parenthesis are necessary to define the two alternate patterns separating the OR clause from the common part of the filter If the parentheses are left out they are added at the beginning and the end of the filter which may give unexpected results E g if the parentheses where left out in the example above only the flanges would match as the stiffener pattern will only be the three characters STI which doesn t match any statement Benefits By using the OR operator in defining the filters a greater variety of panels and groups can be co
38. 11 18 11 19 New Representation of Shell Plates 12 1 SP4 Folders in the HCMWLD 12 1 SP4 Save Workin Inithull 12 1 SP4 Ship Coordinate References to RSOs 12 1 SP3 Ppoints for HPREND and CPREND Elements 12 1 SP3 Ppoints for HPLATE Elements 12 1 SP3 Statement Wizard Enhancements 12 1 SP2 Attribute MODREF 12 1 SP2 Reuse of Seam and Profile Numbers Multiple Negatives when Designing User Defined End Cut Split of Hull Notes and Posno Enhanced Selection Filtering Blocks and Panels from Tree View Set up of a Project to Use Free Naming Hole Annotation Enhancement Hull Qualities in CATA Shellx with Plate Scantlings Position Numbers and Material Quality New Dialog when Setting Functional Descriptions Increased Number of Surfaces 12 AVEVA Surface Manager 12 1 Surface Analysis 12 1 SP3 12 1 1 Surface analysis 12 1 2 Tank Capacities 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 Hydrostatics Data Calculated for Surface 12 1 SP3 Difference Between two Surfaces 12 1 SP2 Surface Manager Replacing Surface Server Surface Manager Compare Surfaces 13 AVEVA Space Management 13 1 Surface Analysis 12 1 SP3 13 1 1 Surface analysis 13 1 2 Tank Capacities 13 2 13 3 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 112 114 115 116 116 117 120 121 123 124 125 126 126 127 Space Definition Data and Re Create of Space Arrangements 12 1 SP3 130 Space Interrogation API 12 1 SP3 14
39. 11 40 40 Additionally when Upgrade Drawing is called manually from the Tools menu a status window appears after the operation is completed Upgrade Drawing Upgrade document D_RO2C09 completed 426 shape s processed 201 updated 0 failed To store changes please save the drawing or was stopped by the user Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 415 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Upgrade Drawing Upgrade document D_RO2C09 stopped 225 shapes processed 85 updated 0 failed To store changes please save the drawing In case the user opens a drawing that is not updated to the current product version and the Upgrade drawing on Open option is set to false the following warning appears in the message log Message A Document D_RO2C09 needs upgrading to current version Please call Tools gt Upgrade gt Upgrade drawing to make sure all functionality is available If the Upgrade drawing on Open is set to true but for some reason the drawing cannot be opened automatically an appropriate error message is added to the message log Message Unable to upgrade read only document D_RO2CO9 Benefits The Upgrade Drawing functionality works better and does not cause any errors Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 416 AVEVA M
40. 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin SufaceDensity PsQD__ mm 2 SSS SSS Temperature TEMP degCelsius degh K degRankine TemperatureGradient TPOI deem O oS ThermalConductivity TOON W m k_ SSCS thermaiResistance TRS WW id S EES second min hr daymonthweekyear m a D ey Pe eal numerical real attribute Name of Dimension HashCode Database other specific units Word units oge prora Nm S nmass omas km OSS Viscosiyoymamie vise s J SS m Volume CUDI 3 litre ImpGallon USGallon bbl Mbb I MMbbl Volumetictlow vwo ms CCSCSCSC S moe __ numericalreal attribute usedto assign parameter dimensions etc attributes 4 3 2 Other UNITS Commands Three additional forms of the UNITS command for the Fundamental dimensions i e those settable are supported UNITS DEFAULT UNITS NUMERIC UNITS MKS and UNITS FPS and UNITS CGS DEFAULT Units The default unit of a physical dimension is the database storage unit which is listed in the table above The command UNITS DEFAULT formerly set the DISTANCE default units to mm it now sets the units of all the dimensioned attributes to their database storage units Individual dimensions can be set to their default selectively using the command UNITS DEFAULT dimension DERIVED Units The command UNITS DERIVED dimension is valid for compound dimensions such as volume density and pressure It sets the
41. 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 4Ship Coordinate References to RSOs 12 1 SP3 Description The ship coordinate system functionality has been enhanced to be able to get alternative dimensions when using pseudo attributes SHIPX SHIPY and SHIPZ The new alternative expression of coordinates are e X coordinates expressed as distance to a certain transversal bulkhead e Y coordinates expressed as distance to a certain longitudinal bulkhead or as distance from the centreline e Z coordinates expressed as distance to a certain deck To get this information RSOs must exist for the bulkheads or decks and to use those RSOs for dimensioning in the according direction the RSO attribute RSDIM has to be set to one of the values DIMX DIMY or DIMZ The reference is built up according to the rule lt RSO_name gt lt X Y Z_position_of_RSO gt lt distance_from_RSO gt The ship coordinate option can be enabled in the target application by the command SHIPCO ON default OFF Benefits This functionality can replace customer in house tools that were needed to get the requested information in e g isometric drawings Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Customisation Customising Presentation of Ship Coordinates Affected Programs Isodraft AVEVA Marine only AVEVA Marine modules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 97 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 5 Ppoints f
42. 1639215 TUBUS TUBIF Mig gt N Total tems 22 Parallel Model Rotate When the form is first shown the current element is selected in the Check field Users can change this as they wish by typing any Design name or syntax such as ZONE The element to be checked is always named in this text box The options available are e Check Check the named element for Clashes e Check CE Show the name of the current element and check it for Clashes The Clashes are displayed in a grid with the usual facilities for filtering grouping etc Clashes 2 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Drag a column header here to group by that column No 3 Clash Type A Clash item a Obstructer a Clashed A JA A A A gt CLASH 15392 5442 tube 15392 6762 TUBIBOX CLASH 15392 5444 15392 6762 ELBO BOX CLASH 15392 5444 tube 15392 6762 TUBIBOX 4 HS CLASH 15392 5445 16392 8762 ELBO BOX 5 HS CLASH 15392 5445 Qube 15392 6762 TUBIBOX je HH CLASH 15392 5506 tube 15392 6519 TUBVPANE CLASH 15392 5612 16392 5513 FLAN FTUB 8 HH CLASH 15392 5519 15392 5563 tube TEE TUBI s h CLASH 15392 5556 15392 5557 FLANIFTUB 10 HH CLASH 15392 5666 tube 15392 9266 TUBI BOX 1 HH CLASH 15392 5666 ube 15392 9267 TUBI BOX CLASH 15392 5666 Qube
43. 2010 08 41 36 bill housley 02 03 2010 08 41 36 bill housley 02 03 2010 08 41 36 bill housley 02 03 2010 08 41 36 bill housley Model Timeline Stamps Element History Key Cah Model Timeline pane rece a DB Name CTBATEST DESI CTBCOPY ASLTMPL CTBCOPY ASLTMPL CTBCOPY EQUITMPL CTBCOPY EQUITMPL CTBCOPY TEMPLATE CTBCOPY TEMPLATE CTBATEST DES CTBCOPY EQUITMPL CTBCOPY TEMPLATE CTBCOPY ASLTMPL CTBATEST DES CTBCOPY TEMPLATE CTBCOPY ASLTMPL CTBCOPY EQUITMPL Create Initial elements Create Initial elements Create Initial elements Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Default session comment Design WORL E B GPWL GroupWorld 2 SITE ATEST ZONEZONEEQUIP_FROM_C H Q ZONEZONEEQUIP_TO_C H A ZONE ZONEPIPE C Element History for ATEST Time User 01 03 2010 13 44 47 bill housley 01 04 2010 16 14 49 gordon smith pending current Model Timeline Stamps Element History Key Coolio Element History pane Fiter i savework 394 savework 396 Initial Comment Default session comment pending Current unsaved session DEEE v B Design WORL GPWL GroupWorld Model Timeline Stamps Element History Key es Cait b Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Sol
44. 203 204 205 206 208 209 210 211 212 214 215 216 217 218 219 223 224 225 227 228 229 vii AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 63 15 64 15 65 15 66 15 67 Function to Find and Remove Dangling MANU Parts Enhancement in Dialogue for Automatic Position Number Definition Reflection in Hull Element Names and Hurefl Attribute FRP Additions Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input Data 16 AVEVA Hull Weld Planning 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 Improved Edit Welds Function 12 1 SP4 User Defined Rules for Weld Suspension 12 1 SP3 Weld Calculation Curved Panels Weld Calculation Shell Profiles 17 AVEVA Design Reuse 17 1 PML Triggers 12 1 SP4 18 AVEVA Assembly Planning 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 18 11 18 12 Assembly Drawings amp Parts List 12 1 SP4 Material side 12 1 SP3 Assembly Drawing amp Parts List 12 1 SP2 Assembly Reports 12 1 SP2 Assembly Selection 12 1 SP2 Assembly Planning Context Menu 12 1 SP2 Curved Hull Panel as Base Panel for Assembly Orientation Clean Up Assembly References New Drawing Type for Assembly ADP Drawings Multiple Select Change Projection of an Assembly ADP Drawing View POS attribute available for ASMBLY Elements 19 AVEVA Marine Drafting 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 19 8 19 9 19 10 19 11 19 12 19 13 19 14 Staggered Views 12 1 SP4 Folders in HCMWLD 12 1 SP4 Colour Coding of Curved Plates 12 1 SP4 Pre
45. 25mm Medium 0 35mm Thick 0 70mm See also 5 14 Extract Control Include Flush Capability Enhancements have been made to Extract Control in the Design Engineer modules Design Diagrams and Schematic Model Manager When working in an extract database issuing flushing or dropping an element that has a referencing Integrator link will automatically include the link object The new reference array attribute INCFLU include flush returns any Integrator or Status link elements that reference the current element Flushing issuing or dropping an element with referencing link objects will act on those link objects even if the element itself is not claimed or modified The Extract Control form will display an R label on such elements Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 34 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Extract Data Control DER Get All Changes From parent extract only O From all extract ancestors Update CE Extract Claimlists User Claimlists Elements a H SITE ELECTRICAL_MODEL HM ZONE SWITCHGEAR EQUI ELECEQUIP_101 EQUI ELECEQUIP_102 EQUI ELECEQUIP_103 EQUI ELECEQUIP_104 R EQUI ELECEQUIP_107 R EQUI ELECEQUIP_108 EM EQUI ELECEQUIP_1084 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 35 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 6 User Interface 6 1 Entry to System Entry to the system has been changed to allow direct entry to any module without the need to go via Monitor The
46. 57 Plane Reference Text in Distance To Plane Dimensioning Description In the Distance To Plane dimensioning when principal plane is Centre Line Base Line or Aft Perpendicular modifications of the Plane Reference Text will be remembered and saved in the Drafting default system For this purpose three new default keywords have been introduced from BL DIM_DTP_AFTPERPENDICULAR_REF_TEXT from AP Benefits This will improve productivity The system remembers user modifications of Plane Reference Text Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Dimensioning Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 324 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 58 Delete Last Entity Description The Edit Delete Last Entity functionality has been re introduced Benefits Make it possible to undo last created entity without having to exit current function and explicitly delete the entity Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Edit Delete Last entity Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 325 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 59 Persisting Contours to PADD Description In 12 1 release of Marine Drafting persiste
47. 6 North Arrow Text The text shown with the North arrow may be changed by means of the Alternative Text ATEXT 202 The default is N If the User changes ATEXT 202 to LP the symbol will appear as 15 x m Select Atext Drawing Area X 26 11 7 Pipe Penetration Seal Symbol This new user definable symbol SKEY CPCF represents a Penetrating watertight piece modelled using a COUP element see section 26 6 This is in addition to the similar user definable SKEY CPWP used for a Penetrating piece For details please see the SODRAFT Reference Manual section 3 27 Symbol Key Reference Index 26 11 8 Setting Units in Options files Isodraft loads the current units setting when the user enters the module but has its own units for defining bore and distance on Isometrics these are built into the individual lsodraft options files There is no change are to the way that bore and distance units are output but changes have been made to define the units required for some additional items Previous versions of lsodraft output units for Weight Pressure and Temperature these will be interpreted in current units and converted to the correct output value For example Pressure is stored in Pascals but the user may require the equivalent in bar on the iso To ensure this the options file needs to contain the required output settings This is done by adding a block of code for setting units at the end of
48. 6 Minimum Line Width The MINLW parameter is configurable by the user in the DRAFT UI and via the DRAFT PLOT command it was used to change the value of both THIN and the minimum user defined line style width It applied only to the hardcopy exports PDF EMF etc and did not affect DXF or AVEVA PLOT files It is no longer required as the line styles are now precisely defined It has been withdrawn from the Ul and the PDMSU lI dflts plotter_user_defaults file where its default value was defined Its use with the PLOT command is deprecated its value is ignored and a warning given if it is used Note that this means that the user no longer has a way to artificially thicken thin lines on a drawing during export This was introduced at 12 0 and was a side effect of allowing the user to determine the value of THIN line styles 20 7 Plotting User Interface 20 7 1 DRAFT Plotting Options Form The plot utility form accessed from Utilities gt Plot CE gt Plotters no longer has the Minimum Line width fields at top left Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 353 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Plotting Options Colour correction mode Standard Colour Pius Select one of the available options to print the PDMS plot file System command string User Bulletin O Greyscale O Black amp White 20 7 2 DXF General Options The Polyline width factor and Character encoding fields have been removed from th
49. 7 Export of Diagrams Drawings in DGN Format 12 1 SP3 A new option has been added to export Diagrams drawings in the DGN format This function is similar to the existing DWG format export capability but it has some format specific handling and settings Settings Lines Map Fonts Map Levels General Export location us Exported shapes Page x Units Inches M Use Shared Cells Use Nested Cells vo E Export Embedded Objects Files Seed file pdmsSeed2d dgn X Attached libraries F font201 dgn A font202 dgn Line type and font libraries F pdms_Isty rsc a pdmsSamFont rse Load settings Savesettings Export Settings loaded For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Utilities DGN Export Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 385 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 8 Batch Export of DWG and DGN Format Files 12 1 SP3 By using the Batch Job function it is now possible to select a number of drawings and export them all in one go instead of processing them one by one Database tree Search Selection Br WORL Hydraulic_Oil W e5 SCGROU Piping Diagrams Grey_Water_Transfer_Diagram t FeS SCGROU HVAC Diagrams Fuel_Oil_System_Diagram FcS SCGROU Hectrical Diagrams Lub_Oil_System_Diagram Fire H P_S W _Service_System Diagram2
50. AVEVA Hull Structural Design 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 New Block Divide User Interface and Process 12 1 SP4 Finite Element Modeller Knuckled Panels 12 1 SP4 FEM Folderin FEMWLD 12 1 SP4 RSO CSV format update 12 1 SP3 Spaces in Structural Design Export 12 1 SP3 Patran Interface 12 1 SP2 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 131 132 132 134 135 136 137 138 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 7 New Options when Creating Envelopes 139 14 8 RSO Change Envelope 140 14 9 RSO Recreate 141 14 10 RSO Rename 142 14 11 Naming of Multiply Copied RSOs 143 14 12 Pick Option Added in RSO Keyin 144 14 13 Pick Option Added in RSO Edit 145 14 14 Right Click Menu on RSO 146 14 15 Stable Multi Face RSO Reference 147 14 16 Seam from RSO 148 14 17 COR Keyword when Referencing RSOs and Surfaces 149 14 18 Delete Surface Object from Design Database 150 14 19 Block Recreate All 151 14 20 Right Click Menu on Blocks 152 14 21 Jumbo Panels Removed 153 14 22 FEM World for Idealised and FE Models 154 14 23 FEM Additions 156 14 24 FEM Improvements 157 15 AVEVA Hull Detailed Design 158 15 1 Production Support for Frameworks 12 1 SP4 158 15 2 Drag and Drop from Manu Explorer 12 1 SP4 159 15 3 Manufacturing Objects Presented in 3D Canvas 12 1 SP4 160 15 4 Show Scheme Update 12 1 SP4 161 15 5 Mixed FRP and Steel Project 12 1 SP4 162 15 6 Bevel Side Definition on Stiffeners 12 1 SP4 163 15 7 Hole i
51. Benefits There is no longer a need to switch to the schema editor to add comments when working with the statement wizard Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 181 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 23 Split Shell Stiffeners with RSO 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to split a shell stiffener with an RSO If the RSO has panels associated with it the relevant material thickness will be used resulting in a gap in the same way as splitting with the actual panel would 7 2 Plane 3 Shell Profile Benefits A more robust reference for splitting shell stiffeners can be used When the RSO is associated with a panel which affects the split point the relevant information is used without any change needed to the definition of the shell stiffener Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design Curved Modelling Users Guide Interactive Interactive Functions Curved Hull Menu The Model Submenu Shell Stiffener Split Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 182 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 24 Turn Off Profile Generic Data 12 1 SP4 Description The Profi
52. Dabacon Marine Project Setup Getting Started Create Initial Data Structures Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 56 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 7 Stable Identification of Un named Hull Elements Description When the name of an unnamed element is displayed it is composed by its type and member position TYPE nof The n is its numbered position in the list of its owner only counting elements of the same type Some types of elements are possibly better identified by the value of an attribute than by its position among its equal type of siblings For some marine hull type of elements this is just the case The name of an unnamed element is normally presented in the format HSTIFF 3 of HPANEL ER2 LP32_2 While it onwards instead will be presented in the format HSTIFF idsp 6003 of HPANEL ER2 LP32_2 The value 6003 is provided by the TBID attribute for the HSTIFF element Hull elements with a TBID attribute will be presented in this format Command graphs are adjusted so that the same format can be used as input by user to change position in the element hierarchy Benefits More stable identification of unnamed hull elements Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to Design Reference Manual How to Use the Syntax Graphs Standard Syntax Graphs Design Element Identity lt gid gt and User Guide Hull in Dabacon General Identific
53. Default Always to other Gap Benefits Auto Formatting Rules functionality covers user needs in a better way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Auto Formatting Rules Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 405 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 23 24 Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer Description It is now possible to individually control the shape annotations for the element types in the Schematic Model Viewer The following settings can now be made using the options dialog in the Schematic Model Viewer e Display criteria for selection of shapes e Display text e Icon png file e Stencil shape Options General Settings Types Schematic Model Settings Gai E SCENGINE E CustomSelector DisplayT ext E Symbol Use icon B SCPUMP E Description Icon B Shape Shape name Stencil name DisplayT ext Symbol Use icon E BranchingPoint DisplayT ext Symbol Use icon E Defaut Path Symbol Use icon E OpenEnd Display T ext Symbol Use icon SCEQUIPMENT CustomS elector Benefits Enables the user to better control shape annotations in the Schematic Model Viewer Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Schematic Model Viewer Browse to see details OWNER n NAME Browse
54. ERAN PIPE1 1 I GASK 1 qF FLAN 1 gt REDU 1 g ELBO 1 fp FLAN PaD16 I GASK2 B Design wor H Q SITE ATEST SITE LEXI SITE H Q SITE TAPTEST H Q SITE NETWORKS TPWL Penetration_Ten B TPWL Concrete_Temp 8 TPWL ROOM DESIGN H Q SITE Steel_Tempiste_ amp TPWL Asl_Template_ v amp 8 TPWL Walls amp Floors_Te Ba APPLDW Sample_Pipe TPWL Equipment Appli TPWL STD EQUIPMEN 2 PCOM PIPE1 SEER DEMO 4 QL Goni FILT PIPEV FII VALV PIPE1 V E PIPE PIPES lt 19 03 1998 1 07 01 1999 1 07 01 1999 1 14 07 1999 1 i 14 07 1999 1 Ip casks 04 07 2000 1 De VALV PAD13 p 04 07 2000 1 Ip GASKE OV ba 01 03 2010 1 1h GASK7 ommand 01 03 2010 1 7 01 03 2010 1 ti VFWAPIPE1 02 03 2010 0 I casks 02 03 2010 0 H A BRAN PIPE1 2 02 03 2010 0 E amp PIPE PIPE2 02 03 2010 0 03 2010 1 lbr lbr lbr pm pm pm pm bill hous bill hous bill hous bill hous bill hous bill hous bill hous bill hous saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven saven gt E A PIPE PIPE Model Timeline Stamps Elen 4 5 E PIPE PIPES E Refresh C highlight ss At v The Model Changes Add in has two vertically split panes The top split contains a Design Explorer the lower split contains a tabbed pane a
55. Export Configurable DGN Export AVEVA Isometric ADP 21 AVEVA Marine Migration 21 1 Preparing Databanks for Import into Hull and Outfitting 12 1 22 AVEVA Schematic 3D Integrator 22 1 22 2 22 3 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 Compare Update Scope by Destination 12 1 SP4 Simplified Selection of Configurations 12 1 SP4 Compare Update Additional Filter Fields 12 1 SP3 Show in Diagram Option in Compare Update 12 1 SP3 Integrator Capability to Accept Differences 12 1 SP3 Design and Schematic Explorers Enhancements 12 1 SP3 New Integrator Object Method Electrical Connections Selector Rules Improved Links Administration Configuration Rules Extensions Example Macro 23 AVEVA Diagrams 23 1 23 2 23 3 23 4 23 5 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 13 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 19 23 20 Ribbon User Interface in Diagrams 12 1 SP4 View Datasheetsin Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Design Reuse for AVEVA Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Secondary Shapes for Pipe and Instrument Lines 12 1 SP4 Customisable Drawing Grid in Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Diagrams Rules Configurable Consistency Check 12 1 SP3 Export of Diagrams Drawings in DGN Format 12 1 SP3 Batch Export of DWG and DGN Format Files 12 1 SP3 Customization API for Diagrams 12 1 SP3 Explorer Enhancements 12 1 SP3 Instrument Loop Creation Dialog 12 1 SP3 Size of Imported Background Shape 12 1 SP3 Flipping Labels 12 1 S
56. For More Information See Reference Manual Database and Data Management Database Navigation and Query Syntax Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 27 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 3 Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command 12 1 SP3 The command CLEANUp cleans up unwanted references in the database It is possible to remove null references and unresolved invalid references The logical attributes NULLREf INVREF and UNRESOlved is used to sort out whether a reference attribute points to something valid or not The syntax is the same for all three Q NULLRE ATTNAME att Answers the question is the attribute att null 0 0 Q UNRESO ATTNAME att Is the attribute att pointing to an element whose existence we cannot find and verify It could be that the database is missing or that the reference is truly invalid Q INVREF ATTNAME att Is the attribute pointing to an element that is non existent This differs from unresolved in that the database that should accommodate the missing element is present in the active mdb For More Information See Reference Manual Database and Data Management Database Navigation and Query Syntax Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 28 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 4 New Database types 5 4 1 Engineering Database The new ENGI database holds engineering data that does not normally appear on the schematics drawings
57. Grey_Water_Transter H E SCGROU Project_Stencils ir see B C IE SCGROU Piping Diagrams ub_Dil_system_Diag CEA SCDIAG Hydraulic_Oil MEA SCDIAG Grey_Water_Transfer_Diagram MEA SCDIAG Fuel_Oil_System_Diagram MEA SCDIAG Lub_Oil_System_Diagram CEA SCDIAG Fire H P_S W _Service_System OE SCDIAG Multilabels EA SCDIAG Diagram2 E oge SCGROU HYAC Diagrams Update Diagrams Options Update symbols according to master shapes C Update symbols according to catalogue information C Update annotation formats C Update attribute presentation settings C Ignore stencil settings Publish Update Diagrams C Refresh shapes Select master shapes to use for update 1 selected LJ Before you can use this option you have to modify the masters that were used to create valves by checking unchecking the Classify as Instrument check box After that you need to select it using the dialog below Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 412 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Select Masters to update Stencils Masters Piston or Plunger Valve Reduced Hose Valve Diaphragm Piston or Disc or Butterfly Valve Bore Vlave Valve Plung Needle Valve Gate Valve x xX DK M Plug_Valve Disc or Needle Gate Valve Plug_Valve Ball Valve Butter Valve Globe Valve he be 5S By Directional Valve s AngledValve BallValve Globe Directional AngledV Valve Valve GTYP_INST Angled Asimetri
58. Initialisations for Nesting Forms in Nesting Nesting Replace Texts Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Nesting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 173 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 15 Improved Burning Sketch 12 1 SP4 Description The generation of the automatic Burning Sketch in Nesting has been improved to minimise overlap between the texts symbols Benefits The time for correcting overlapping texts symbols inthe Burning Sketch will be considerably decreased Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Aveva Marine Hull Nesting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 174 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 16 Direction Texts During Nesting 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to add direction texts to the parts during the nesting activity The direction texts are presented together with the plate part position number and are available while nesting but not presented on the burning sketch The texts are not stored but recreated if the nesting is brought up for modifications The presentation is controlled with the Nesting Default parameter NEST_ADD_DIRTEXT No Yes Benefits The orientation information of the parts is available during nesting Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Initial
59. Integrator User Guide Section 5 4 1 Building Equipment 22 9 Selector Rules Quotes are no longer required in selector rules for long STYPs as Integrator will automatically include quotes for text selectors For example arule with SCSTYP OF source operating on an SCVALV with SCSTYP PTFE LINED will generate Choose with STYP PTFE LINED 22 10 Improved Links Administration Integrator no longer automatically creates a Link World Project administrators are recommended to create a separate Design Reference database to hold links and then use the new Manage Links dialogue available from the Integrator gt Settings menu This can be used to create and manage Link Worlds in the appropriate database including consolidating links from separate databases Manage Links DER i File Edit Database Description fa DB CTBHTEST INTDES Primary ba DB CTBHTEST DESI Primary DB CTBHTEST REFDESI Primary Reference Database Contains Links fa DB CTBHTEST STAVIRG Primary fa DB ACTBHTEST ASSOCIATIONS Primary ba DB CTBCOPY TEMPLATE Primary fa DB CTBCOPY ASLTMPL Primary fh DB CTBCOPY EQUITMPL Primary ba DB MASTER ASSOCDEFN ReadOnly Primary fa DB MASTER CABLETMPL ReadOnly Primary Manage Links is also available with the new Compare Update Utility For More Information please refer to the Integrator User Guide sections 4 7 16 5 2 and 5 3 22 11 Configuration Rules Extensions Integrators Project Configuration Expl
60. It therefore holds more detailed information necessary to fully specify the engineering equipment in a plant For example a schematic might show a pump its name and its major connections and perhaps a little more The engineering database will include electrical data for the motor loading calculations etc process data the process conditions mechanical data etc These data may be owned and controlled by several different discipline engineers This database will make it easy to produce lists of equipment and other tagged items Using a separate database makes it simpler for the schematics and the engineering data to be compiled in parallel and later checked for consistency 5 4 2 Design Reference Database This is a restricted Design database used mainly for inistrati i A administrative purposes it cannot include any STE EGA or HULL data Its main use is for storing information Database about Systems and Areas for use in Engineering and ADMIN Schematics applications It is therefore useful for Gering Tean users who are licensed only for 2D applications Name Description It is created by setting a flag on the database when it ESTES OMAN mao f eee lt TEAM gt ASLADMIN ASL Administration Team is created this is the only way to create it and the flag lt TEAM gt CTBATEST unset cannot be removed at a later date SUEN TOCOEN unset lt TEAM gt CTBFTEST unset s p lt TEAM gt CTBHTEST unset Points
61. List element Quit 4 Integrity check 5 Show windows 6 Flag 7 Delete 8 Performance 9 Purge 10 Attributes Change text codepage E Reove densa ton PADD _ gt Benefits Improved functionality to modify dimension text evaluation Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Tools Inspect Drawing Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 264 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 7 Controlling the Prefix for Longitudinal Annotations 12 1 SP4 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 it is possible to control the prefix for longitudinals in the Annotate Position Ruler function A new Drafting Default keyword RULER_LONGITUDINAL_PREF has been introduced for this purpose Keyword RULER_LONGITUDINAL_PREF System default value npn Explanation Controls prefix for longitudinals in the Annotate Position Ruler function Legal values Any string Benefits Better control of layout for longitudinal annotations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting User Guide Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 265 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 8 Deleting Labels Generated vi
62. Ltd 288 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 27 Layers for Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 Description For along time all outfitting models have been put into the same layer in the marine drawing object You could see this when using the function View Layer for example All Outfitting models were in layer 2501 This has now been improved each Outfitting discipline is now in separate layer The Outfitting disciplines and their new layers are Pipe layer 2701 Equipment layer 2801 Cable way layer 2901 Room layer 3001 Structure layer 3101 Ventilation layer 3201 You will see the change when you create new views For old drawings an update design will change the layers If you want to upgrade many drawings in batch you can do so with the utility program sy013 Please note that the use of new layers requires that you have upgraded your database s with the optional upgrade 12010301 New layers also make it possible to identify models of different outfitting disciplines in the drawing for example with the MARAPI function Modelldentify Benefits You can now show hide the various outfitting disciplines on the screen with the View Layer function When exporting to DXF you will get one layer for each outfitting discipline Compatibility Constraints The PADD database to which the drawing belongs must be upgraded with the optional upgrade 12010301 If not the old layer will be used For More Informa
63. Managed hole reports The Hole Association Filter enables the user to specify which Managed Holes to list in the Report Current Holes associated with the Hement currently selected element only status Branch Name Evata B sze E Hole Type E Rating Hole Size E System Graphical Holes associated with elements in Selection the current graphical selection All Managed Holes in the MDB Holes Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 468 F Position Select Al Headings AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Report Headings may be specified Specify holes for all disciplines ora single one specified using the drop down menu Specify holes at any Status or at a single Status option using the drop down menu Select all holes or only those that pass or fail the validation tests Note any option other than Not Checked may significantly slow down report generation as all the validation tests will be run for every selected hole Include hole associations that have any bad references invalid references or invalid data Panels Select holes in panels Apply Filter Refreshes the Hole Report according to the element and filtering options selected Note It is necessary to select Headings required on the report before clicking on Apply Filter because heading data is collected when filters are applied Report Select headings required on the report from three categories information about the Headi
64. Mar 2010 CTBCOPY ASLTMPL Reason savework CTBCOPY EQUITMPL CTBCOPY TEMPLATE Comment Default session comment CTBCOPY UCATALOG 7 4 Engineering ENGI Database The Engineering database type has been added to the list for database creation Note that the top level database element for Engineering databases is SATWLD It has also been added to the module definitions modmac mac and as appropriate in the other admin and global forms for selection sorting allocation etc 7 5 TAGS Module Definition The new TAGS module has been added to the product modules defined by modmac mac and therefore available for use Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 49 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 8 Introduction to New Functionality This bulletin describes the new and enhanced functionality available in AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 as compared to 12 0 It gives an overview of the major changes which are described in full in new and revised User Documentation Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 50 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 AVEVA General Functionality 9 1 AVEVA Database Cache Service 12 1 SP3 The AVEVA Database Cache Servce is a feature that stores highly optimised copies of retrieved project data on the local disk to improve performance where there is repeated reading of project data across a computer network The cache must be active on the client machine running the AVE
65. Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 24 Distance to RSO Dimension 12 1 SP3 Description A new dimension function called Distance to RSO has been added to Marine Drafting It calculates the distance from a selected model part to the closes RSO along one of the X Y or Z axes It also creates a dimensioning component to display the resulting value in the drawing A Dimension Distance To RSO Leader amp s Dimension Text HSHIPY Reset Principal Plane Format ey RASONAME POS OFFSET RSONAME OFFSET RSODESC OFFSET RSODESC POS OFFSET The dimension text can be customised by clicking one of the Format radio buttons Benefits A new dimension component can be created that will show the distance to the closest RSO from a model object Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Drafting Dimension 3D Distance to RSO Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 286 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 25 Radius Diameter Dimensioning for Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP3 Outfitting model primitives involving cylindrical surfaces will be drawn as arc contours instead of polylines under the following conditions e The view is orthogonal e The view type is not true wireline or modelled wireline
66. Schematic Model Manager will need to have the 12 1 upgrade applied It is not necessary to change all dimensions at the same time For example Lengths are already handled correctly It is expected that angles are stored in Degrees so they will also be handled correctly but users will have to identify which UDAs are angles and set their UUNIT to ANGL This will be done for a project the administrator also needs to determine how to handle each of the dimensions used for other attributes volumes densities pressures etc It is possible to continue as before for any by using the NUMERIC option For details please refer tothe 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual The process for each will be If all quantities have been stored in the new Database Units e Set the UUNIT for any UDAs e Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer required and can be deleted e Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or replaced by standard functions If all quantities have been stored in the same unit which is not the new Database Unit e Set the UUNIT for any UDAs e Output a datal file with the dimensions being set to numeric e g UNITS NUMERIC TEMPERATURE e Read the datal file back in with the current units set appropriately so that unqualified values are assumed to be in those units UNITS DEGF TEMPERATURE o Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer requ
67. Solutions Ltd 239 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 17 AVEVA Design Reuse Description Design Reuse is a tool to simplify the work required to copy design data between projects and thereby reuse design work Design data that is copied is re generated and adapted to the design context of the target project Copying design data follows an export import scenario with an intermediate storage in a Transfer Set The functionality provided is accessible through the command line and through a graphical user interface Design Reuse is made as a so called addin and is hosted by the Hull Design Outfitting Design and Marine Drafting modules Design Reuse requires a specific license Benefits e Very useful for design reuse between ships The design is copied from one ship to another and adapted to the second ship The model is re generated and adapted to the design context of the second ship e Support for different naming conventions by fully customisable name substitution rules e Maintains the references within the model as well as between drawings and models by reference adaptation at import to the second ship e Drawings keep their associations and are updated at import e GUI for interactive usage inside Hull Design Outfitting Design Marine Drafting e Commands supporting all available functions e Provides high level customisation through trigger functions e Sisterships can be synchronized by customer written automation scripts e
68. Unwarp shell elements Angle Image Free Edge Image Line Image Point Image Dump Delete FE Model images stored as objects I Shell element image T Beam element image Corcel The check box Unwarp shell elements has been added Previously unwarping was done unconditionally That makes it possible to create the FE model in steps applying one option after another or in different orders Unwarping can then be done in a separate step at the end of the process Benefits More flexible creation of idealised and FE models Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Finite Element Model Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 156 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 24 FEM Improvements Description Handling of knuckled panels Knuckled main panels are now part of the idealised model Before idealised panels had been created from the subpanels without creating a kKnuckled main panel But then references to main panels where no longer correct which has been solved now This means that a knuckled panel in the original model will be represented as a knuckled panel also in the result from the XML Hull Steel Export as opposed to before when it was represented by the individual subpanels exported as ordinary panels Symmetry issues of idealised subpanels have been solved Using a limiting box for i
69. WB Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Ballast tank FR212 FR242 1016 5315 731 5448 625 186 013 10 153 1025 000 Ballast tank FR105 FR131 888 420 910 630 98 300 1 500 1025 000 Ballast tank FR105 FR131 888 420 910 630 98 300 1 500 1025 000 GR Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Grain cargo FR105 FR131 11469 102 10608 919 98 300 10 941 925 000 Grain cargo FR78 FR105 14096 393 13039 163 75 775 9 481 925 000 Grain cargo FR184 9 FR212 12860452 11895 918 165 668 9 755 925 000 Grain cargo FR52 FR78 13545 625 12529 703 53 267 9 499 925 000 Grain cargo FR131 FR158 14096 640 13039 392 120 825 9 481 925 000 FW Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Fresh water tank FR105 FR131 164 235 164 235 98 300 1 673 1000 000 Fresh water tank FR105 FR131 164 235 164 235 98 300 1 673 1000 000 Benefits Analysis tools available to provide analysis where needed will shorten design time Compatibility Constraints Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 118 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 None For more information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Space Management AVEVA Surface Manager Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 119 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 2 Hydrostatics Data Calculated for Surface 12 1 SP3 Description It is now possible to get hydrostatics dat
70. When selecting which view to restore the snapshot picture is shown to help identify the correct view Note that this snapshot is just a picture captured at the time the view was saved Elements in that picture may have been modified or deleted since the picture was saved so when the view may look different once it is restored In fact it is possible that an empty view may appear if all elements in the drawlist have been deleted or moved outside the view area since the original view was saved The Save amp Restore 3D Views function is accessed via a new icon on the 3D View Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 36 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The old numbered saved views are no longer available For details please refer to the Graphical Model Manipulation Guide 6 3 Grid Control A number of enhancements have been made to the grid control These include an enhanced column setup form a new filter on the row filter an autofit function and an ability to copy a set of grid cells and paste them into another document In addition Drag and Drop may be used in the grid for some operations The Grid Control has also been enhanced to support multi element and distributed attribute editing using Database Views 6 4 Toolbar Popup Menu The popup context menu displayed from the Toolbar area has a new entry Lock the Toolbars This enables users to lock the position of the toolbars to prevent accidental change of layout 6
71. a factor as in earlier releases The effects of weld suspension is now visible when welds are drawn in the 3D view and weld reports have weld lengths and weld suspension calculated as defined by the user Benefits End users have the ability to configure the calculation of weld suspension Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Weld Planning Weld Planning Setup Weld Suspension Rules Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Weld Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 237 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 16 3 Weld Calculation Curved Panels Description The calculation of welds on curved panels with holes crossing seams is now excluding the part of the plate boundary that represents the hole Benefits The result of the weld calculation is more accurate Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Weld Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 238 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 16 4 Weld Calculation Shell Profiles Description The calculation of welds on shell profiles with notches is now excluding the part where the notch is defined Benefits The result of the weld calculation is more accurate Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Weld Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA
72. and Outfitting will also work with ALS ALS is supported in virtual envronments and facilitates support on Citrix Please note that AVEVA Licensing is not included on the product DVD but should be downloaded from the AVEVA web site For further details of AVEVA Licensing releases please see http support aveva com services products alic index asp Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The installers use standard Microsoft Installer MSI technology which facilitates silent installations through standard MSI means They are usually triggered by use of a setup exe file There are fewer separate installers each corresponding to an AVEVA release on the DVD The Hull amp Outfitting Marine installer now includes options to install many of the associated products although for various reasons some products still use a separate installer i AVEVA Marine Setup Custom Setup Select the way you want features to be installed Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed AVEVA Marine Suite E Hull and Outfitting _X Marine Models S X v Global Client _X Global WCF Client S _X_v Area Based ADP _X Multi Discipline Sup X Schematic 3D Integrator X ExPLANT A X ExPLANT 7 Initial Design AVEVA Marine 12 1 Suite This feature requires 2270KB on your hard drive It has 2 of 2 subfeatures selected The
73. been introduced Seams can now be defined as an intersection between an RSO and a surface A seam is defined by using the interactive function for creating seams Select Surface Surface type indicate the intersecting RSO Benefits Enables seams to be defined as an intersection between surface and RSO Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 148 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 17 COR Keyword when Referencing RSOs and Surfaces Description The result of using the COR keyword has been harmonised for panel RSO and Surface references They now all work in the way planar panels have worked before Benefits Consistency when modelling Compatibility Constraints Panels created before this release with the COR keyword referencing RSOs and Surfaces might change when recreated with this release For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design and Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 149 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 18 Delete Surface Object from Design Database Description Object of type CSURF can now be deleted from database In the administration dialog Register Surfaces a new button Delete have been added Selected surface will be deleted
74. button is clicked and the change analysis operation is complete the explorer tree is updated with annotations which highlight the changed elements in detail An example is shown overleaf The annotations are as described in the Key pane in this example we can see that e The World element and SITE element ATEST are not themselves changed but have changed descendants This helps navigation to the changed parts of the element hierarchy e ZONE element ZONEEQUIP_FROM A has member list changes only Since no new or re ordered elements are displayed it can be inferred that all child elements have been removed e CONE element CHANGETYPE UDET CONE _A has been modified its type has been changed e EQUI element MOVE5 A VESS1 has been moved from the child list of ZONEEQUIP_FROM_A into the child list of ZONEEQUIP_TO_A e EQUI element CREATE A VESS1 has been created under ZONE element ZONE1 EQUIP thereby changing its member list Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 450 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin B SITEATEST J 4 D nage WL A SP EQUI EQUIPDUMMY1_A JL ppp User Reason DB Type DB Name Comment 02 03 2010 08 41 36 bill housley savework Design CTBATEST DESI Default session comment 02 03 2010 08 41 36 bill housley savework Design CTBCOPY ASLTMPL Default session comment 02 03 2010 08 41 36 _bill housley sav
75. collection of DBs to be relocated to another location If the HUB daemon is down the form will hang until all relocation commands have timed out Default Drawing files and Stencils are not propagated to location project on creating the new location REMOTE CHECK will fail to run Standalone DICE if the daemon is installed in a folder which contains spaces partly due to the semi colon delimiter 29 1 4 New Reporting Add in This new feature has a number of known limitations at this release which will be improved in future releases These include e Improving performance while running reports in batch mode e Background colour not exported in RTF format e Watermark fails to display in the report e No Copy Cut Paste available in table modifications e Changing the Zoom inthe Report designer causes Report to crash with Exception error message which you cannot close making it hard to close Tags as Report Designer keeps screen focus Some other limitations may be worked around as follows Drag and Drop of DBView Array Fields to Report Designer This does not work at present as an alternative you can use an Array field in a report and place a control which can be bound to a field on the report By setting the Data Binding property of the control itcan be bound to an array field In the example below a Label has been placed in the Detail section of a report for binding to the array field Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA So
76. current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 201 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Separate Handling of Auto Bevel for Stiffener End Web and Flange Description Today bevels can be defined automatically at a stiffener end by defining a bevel set in the bevel default file and then specifying that the set is to be valid for stiffener end in the bevel set file The bevel is then automatically defined for both flange and web It is possible to prevent auto bevel for the stiffener end by giving the key word NABE in the stiffener statement It is now possible to prevent bevel for the web or flange separately Two new keywords have been added NABF and NABW for the stiffener statement deactivating auto bevel for stiffener end flange or web respectively Benefits Makes it possible individually control the use of automatically defined bevelling for the web and flange at a stiffener end Compatibility Constraints None the keyword NABE remains and has the same meaning as before For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling Design Language of Hull Modelling Stiffener Statement Stiffeners Except Connection Stiffeners Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 202 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 42 Bevel Chamfer Option Description Previously when no bevel was set for a seam or boundary the system to so
77. defined by attribute filters These Filters are similar in concept to those in the search grid In addition if element match criteria cannot be expressed using attribute filters it is possible to define an expression for evaluation For example a Database View could be derived from all Equipment elements in the current MDB with a description of Vessel The user also specifies the required columns each can be a database attribute or an expression run against the equipment element The user can also specify how to Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 42 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin navigate to related elements such as the owning SITE or ZONE and derive further columns from that element This is similar in concept to a saved search except that editable columns may be derived from several elements Database Views may be defined and modified in the DICTIONARY database using Lexicon to set up new elements in a new Database View World DBVWWL D Their definition may alternatively be stored as a local settings file similar to saved searches or as part of an application This allows e User defined Database Views for reports ad hoc working etc e Project defined Database Views shared via Global e Application defined Database Views for specialist applications The Editor is currently available in the LEXICON and TAGS modules under Display gt Database Views Editor View Definition Set e3 Open CP Clo
78. drawings generated by Assembly ADP Benefits Possible to decide if material of assembly base panel should be up or down Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Assembly Planning Graphical User Interface Context Sensitive Menu Functions Affected Programs Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 243 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 3 Assembly Drawing amp Parts List 12 1 SP2 Description The assembly parts lists generation within the Assembly Auto Drawing Production Assembly ADP has been given a possibility to accumulate identical design parts and get them represented as one single item with an amount figure This is provided as an optional alternative configuration to the current solution where all design parts within an assembly are enumerated as individual items in parts lists The mechanism is applicable for both parts lists generated as files and parts lists put as tables in drawings A new drawing template and a new parts list template are provided that includes the required configurations for identical design part accumulation These are Standard Assembly Drawing AD 001 SUM Standard Parts List PL 001 SUM How to load the templates e New project Follow the User Guide installation of Assembly ADP library in a new project e Current project with an existing Assembly ADP library Append the templates to your library by running one of t
79. element should be created 3 Set the element name It is also possible to use auto naming rules instead of typing it in manually To do this the Use autonaming has to be checked In the case this option is disabled please check your naming settings Naming Settings Auto Naming On Off Define Naming Rules Naming Mode O Infill Append 4 Set attributes and UDAs By default these values are taken from the session defaults Benefits e Possibility to set all attributes including UDA in the creation dialog e Possibility to create any UDET that base on SCLOOP e Possibility to use the auto naming mechanism instead of manually entering the name Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Piping amp Instrumentation Diagrams P amp ID Instrumentation Elements Schematic Loop SCLOOP Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 390 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 12 Size of Imported Background Shape 12 1 SP3 Description When importing a view from Marine Drafting he the basic position of view can be chosen in the import options dialog There are three possibilities e Original e Center e Fit After import the view shape position is locked from modifying it With this fix each imported view get an extra right click menu option called Lock By default this is checked so user cannot move th
80. existed only so that users could more easy migrate from Tribon 5 into Tribon Mx version The way of creating data in Tribon 5 format does not exist anymore and is not described anywhere in the documentation This option to convert old data files into newer XML format will in AVEVA Marine 12 1 be deprecated and finally removed in a future release of AVEVA Marine Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 235 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 16 AVEVA Hull Weld Planning 16 1 Improved Edit Welds Function 12 1 SP4 Description User defined attributes defined for welds and weld joints are now possible to view and modify through the Edit Welds dialog Welds and weld joints that are displayed on the current drawing will be highlighted and set as current database element if selected in the dialog Benefits User defined data can be presented in the Edit Welds dialog Simplified process when identifying and updating welds Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Weld Planning Edit Welds Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Weld Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 236 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 16 2 User Defined Rules for Weld Suspension 12 1 SP3 Description User defined rules can be setup to control the suspension length for plates and profiles in weld calculations If no rules are defined the suspension length calculations are based on
81. face number reference giving unpredictable results when regenerating The other option to select a face within an RSO is to give a coordinate pair in the global coordinate system either XY or XZ or Y Z These coordinate pairs will geometrically describe a ray in space If this ray intersects an RSO face that face will be used to define the panel plane Using a ray to select a face is more stable than a direct face number as itis insensitive to face renumbering From AVEVA Marine 12 1 the system will automatically update the panel definition provided the panel plane is defined via an RSO face number on a multi face RSO When storing the panel a ray definition will be created and added to the panel definition The direct face number will be kept as information but the ray will take precedence At storing if the face number is out of date it will be updated from the ray Single face RSOs are not affected by this development If the ray hits multiple RSO faces the direct RSO number is kept as the primary definition Benefits Panels with location defined by multi face RSOs will be insensitive to RSO face renumbering Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 147 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 16 Seam from RSO Description A new way to define seams has
82. file as defined by the environment variable SBH_BEVEL_SETS Benefits Unified automatic bevel setting for all profiles Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup and Customisation Bevel Excess and Weld Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine Customer Set up of Bevel Standards Automatic Bevel Definition Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 204 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 44 Position of Upper and Lower Cutting Curve Description JJ C O BCD The upper and lower material curves of a plate edge are calculated from the plate thickness of the bounding plate i e the e measure of the current bevel This means that the upper material curve ends according to the point D in the upper view in the figure above This is also the position of the so called bump contour However since the chamfer defined by the variants is cut or grinded off after the normal end cutting the nested plate parts might be positioned to close to each other A more correct way to calculate the upper and lower material curve is to take the current plate thickness and the current variant into consideration when calculating the curves This means that the upper material curve will be positioned according to the point D in the lower sketch in the figure above The environm
83. format for Units in Hull and Drafting can be set to SI or Imperial SI units are default The format for Sl and Imperial respectively can be further controlled by a set of environment variables and default variables For details on the Units usage in Hull and Drafting please see the following chapters in the AVEVA Marine User Documentation 1 Hull Basic Features and Concepts gt Basic Features gt Imperial Units Syntax Description 2 Marine Drafting gt Drafting gt User Guide gt Appendices gt Drafting default file keywords gt Unit codes 3 Marine Drafting gt Drafting gt User Guide gt Appendices gt Drafting default file keywords gt Unit system 4 Hull Initial Design gt Lines Users Guide gt Technical reference gt Conventions gt Units Unit Controlled Dimensions in Hull and Drafting The dimensions that can be unit controlled in Hull and Marine Drafting are shown in the table below Core units are independent of the Unit settings and are the same for Hull and Outfitting data Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 22 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Coordinate Linear measure Area Volume Weight Density Angle Presentation Format for Units in Marine Applications Within Hull and Marine Drafting specific application functions values will be presented according to the Hull Drafting settings Attributes in Hull Initial Design are presented according to Initia
84. has been implemented for labels and dimensionings Blanking means that all model geometry behind a certain system component will be blanked out invisible during a repaint of the drawing A number of Drafting Default keywords controlling the blanking concept have been introduced for this purpose LABEL_AUTO_BLANKING i Holds the modal Yes Blank out model blanking flag during label geometry obscured by creation the label No Do not blank out obscured entities LABEL_BLANKING_MARGIN Holds the modal Non negative blanking margin during label creation DIM_BLANKING_MARGIN Holds the modal Non negative blanking margin during dimensioning creation DIM_AUTO_BLANKING Yes Holds the modal Yes Blank out model blanking flag during geometry obscured by dimensioing creation the dimensioning No Do not blank out obscured entities Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 271 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin RENDER_AUTO_BLANKING Controls globally Yes Blanking whether auto blanking enabled No Blanking disabled should be applied during repaint Benefits Improved way of visualize labels and dimensionings Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting User Guide Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current
85. ie gt Wl Paae 1 Backoround 1 7S H O SCGROU Secrest Diagrams Hi fig gt Paget pound PS j S TREF can nat be set because the connected itam was not copied Missing 241139 EC ie PORDIC Se T Session delete d When copying between projects itis possible to copy either according to the group structure in the source project which is then recreated in the destination project or to paste the copied objects according tothe session defaults in the destination project When copying branches belonging to pipelines already existing in the destination project a choice is given whether to create the branches in existing pipelines or to create new pipelines for the copied data Benefits Allows for reuse of data within a project or between projects For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Working with Diagrams Copying Pasting Data Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 393 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 15 Diagram Change Highlighting Changes to schematic diagrams can now be highlighted in the Diagrams Schematic Model Manager and Tags modules using a new Diagram Change Highlighting add in This add in enables the database changes between two database sessions to be viewed using the AVEVA SVG Viewer to highlight the changes in colour It also provides a summary of the changes in the list below the two viewer screens It can be accessed from the co
86. in AVEVA Engineering 12 1 SP4 432 24 6 Datasheets Option in Publish to AVEVA Net 12 1 SP4 434 24 7 Design Reuse for AVEVA Engineering 12 1 SP4 436 24 8 Tags 437 24 8 1 Admin Tab 438 24 8 2 Tag Deletion 439 24 9 Schematic Model Manager 440 24 9 1 Use of units 440 24 9 2 Units upgrade 440 24 9 3 Change Highlighting in Diagram 440 24 10 Tag Compare Update 441 24 10 1 Enhanced Compare Update 12 1 SP2 441 25 AVEVA Outfitting Module 442 25 1 Model Editor 442 25 1 1 Offset From Feature option 442 25 1 2 Structural primitives 442 25 2 Move Drag Move and Plane Move Commands 443 25 2 1 Summary of Move Drag Move and Plane Move options 443 25 3 Change highlighting and reversion 444 25 3 1 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions 444 25 3 2 Revert Elements Command 445 25 3 3 Change Highlighting via Extract Data Control 446 25 3 4 Change Highlighting via Model Changes Add in 447 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd xii AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 4 Enhanced attribute export to Review 452 25 5 Weight and Centre of Gravity CofG form 452 25 6 DRAFT Explorer 452 25 7 AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface 453 25 7 1 Tesselation Cache 12 1 S5P4 454 25 7 2 Import Subequipments 12 1 SP4 455 25 7 3 Import of Coordinate System Entities from STEP Files 12 1 SP3 456 26 AVEVA Outfitting Design Applications 457 26 1 CSV Import Function 12 1 SP3 457 26 2 Equipment 458 26 2 1 Equipment Interface Modifica
87. include reorder and deletion and every attribute change is allowed before proceeding If any of these tests fail for example due to legality checks read only databases or DACs then the entire revert operation is cancelled and the following error is generated 43 615 Cannot Revert elements No changes have been mad Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 445 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin In this case a series of warning messages is written to the console indicating the causes of the error for example DAC prevents deletion of element DELETE UDET B DAC prevents creation of element 15752 1363 DAC prevents modification of attribute Built on element MODIFY B VESS1 Element locks do not prevent a Revert operation if those elements were unlocked in the previous state Note that this command is not directly related to the REVERT lt database name gt command available in Admin This command allows an entire database to be reverted to the state it had at a previous session 25 3 3 Change Highlighting via Extract Data Control The Extract Control dialog has been enhanced to highlight outstanding changes in a child extract in the graphical view It can also highlight changes introduced to a child extract by a refresh operation The highlighting is controlled and customised within a Change Highlighting framebox shown below When the Outstanding in Extract checkbox is s
88. is now removed if the user wants to use the already selected view projection Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 313 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 48 Fill Styles Description The Outfitting draft Fill Style concept has been implemented in Marine Drafting making it possible to add any combination of hatch patterns to contours in the drawing A Fill Style can be system defined or user defined and contains the definition of an arbitrary number of hatch patterns Compared to the existing Hatch Pattern functionality the Fill Style concept is associative and can combine any number of Hatch Patterns Also Solid Fill is available The Fill Style can be applied to any contour in the drawing closed or possible to close It is also possible to apply the fill style on a general area defined by multiple contours In both cases the fill style will be persisted in PADD The Fill Style can be selected and applied to contours in two ways e MB right click on a contour to define or modify the fill style applied on that contour e Select the Modify Fill Style function to select a Fill style to apply to given contours The dialog for selecting Fill Styles looks like below Fill Style Select fill style m a lt ID 8001 gt A 4 fa i OH i HA ARTI Mh gi N i
89. is referenced via the URL link which must have the format file lt pathname gt The file specified by lt pathname gt must exist at both the source and destination locations Usually this is best achieved using an Environment variable to hide installation differences Link Documents fully support the use of spaces in path filenames The Update process only propagates documents that are not present at the remote location It does not support documents that have changed and as a result these will not be propagated over the top of the previous version However it is possible to force the propagation of link documents by using the following command in Admin SYNCHR lt dbname gt LINKDOC FORCI Cd Note There is no UI to support this command On allocation of a new database the propagation of all link relevant documents will be forced to the remote location Recover will force the propagation of all relevant linked documents in the direction of the recover Therefore if recovering a database back to the primary location then the linked documents will also be recovered back to the primary location Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 45 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Note The originating location of a document referenced by an extract hierarchy may be unclear For this reason RECOVER and the FORCE option of SYNCHRONISE should be used with caution for extracts Progress and State Success Failure
90. is strictly forbidden AVEVA product software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries registered in the UK Europe and other countries worldwide 3 Party Software The copyright trademark rights or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software its name or logo belongs to its respective ow ner The follow ing 3 party softw are is included in some of the AVEVA products described in this document e Teigha for dgn files 2007 2010 by Open Design Alliance All rights reserved e Teigha for dwg files 2003 2010 by Open Design Alliance All rights reserved e Microsoft Office Fluent user interface Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation The Microsoft Office User Interface is subject to protection under U S and international intellectual property laws and is used by AVEVA Solutions Limited under license from Microsoft AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Contents AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting Release 12 1 Service Pack 4 User Bulletin 1 Introduction 1 1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 1 1 1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 SP4 1 2 About this Bulletin 1 3 Software Distribution and Installation 12 1 SP4 1 3 1 Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces 1 3 2 AVEVA Database Cache Service 12 1 SP3 1 4 AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 Test Projects 2 Upgrading from Pre
91. is validated immediately e Graphical indicators per field provide help on erroneous or missing input e The textin the dialog has been revised for a more concise and user oriented language e Hull text is selected from a list and a graphical preview of the currently selected text is shown in the dialog e The originating position as well as the panel for projection can be picked in the current drawing e Surface for projection is selected from a drop down list e The auto naming feature has been improved e Rotation is given as a single angle with the most common values in a drop down list e A new hull text can be created without leaving the dialog e The dialog remains open until explicitly closed making immediate adjustments easy Create Hull Mark x Hull Mark Name Auto Hull Text SHIP_LETTERS 7 New Please enter a hull mark name Hull Mark Type 5 Cont Weld F qg Weld Pattern Plate Placement Surface TTPHULLC 5 Panel Perpendicular Looking Reference Point Left Middle Right Looking from XY Z FR95 25000 8250 ux Looking towards PS X XYZ Rotation Angle 0 v As an alternative to projecting along a principal axis the text of a hull mark on a surface can be projected in a direction varying with the surface normal at the position of each character or symbol in the hull text Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 165 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin An
92. leg length Auto hide text by text fit Auto hide text by leg length scplin namn ppbof1 CENTER 0 TOP 0 E Black Arial 6pt False False 10mm True Hide text when longest leg length in connector is shorter than default size Set 0 or empty to disable this option e Auto hide text by text fit This option will hide the text on the connector in the case the tallest leg of this connector will be shorter than the text that is currently displayed on it If this happens the system will notify this in the System Message Log Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 422 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation Sy General options E Shape text options System configuration Text scplin namn ppbof 1 Settings stored in drawing Offset longitudinal reference CENTER Annotation settings Offset longitudinal 0 Pipe Dimensioning Offset perpendicular reference TOP Instrumentation Dimensioning Offset perpendicular 0 HVAC Dimensioning Text colour WM Black Dialogues Font Arial pt Catalogue search settings Show Text on first segment only False Auto formatting rules options Annotations for first segment only False Element options Auto hide text by leg length 10mm gt Pipeline options True isi aad options ae mace teat hy teat lt i Hide text when curent shape text length is longer than longest leg in connector Fitting options Pipe destination
93. limit General Inner Structure Block Limit General Limit Backdrop canvas Benefits Easier identification of RSOs Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu Affected Programs All programs with graphical presentation of RSOs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 335 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 67 RSO Enhancements in Insert Model Description Input Model has been enhanced to allow users to easier select and insert RSOs into a drawing RSO selection can now be filtered on type Wanted type can be selected from a drop down list with the following values The values in the drop down list corresponds to e Any type no filtering e Compartment Limit e General Inner structure e Block Limit e General Limit e Backdrop RSO selection can now also be made on envelope All RSOs belonging toa given envelope are selected It is no longer necessary to specify the _RSO_ prefix when keying in the name of an RSO in the input field Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solut
94. login form is presented with the appropriate splash screen Desktop and Start menu shortcuts are provided for the popular options A new checkbox labelled Integrated Schematics and Engineering determines whether or not the Hull amp Outfitting user will also have read access to the SCHEmatic and ENGIneering databases This option is relevant to customers who also use one of AVEVA s 2D products AVEVA Diagrams or AVEVA Engineering Checking this option allows users to access to these data and is necessary in order to use the Schematic Integrator Addin during the session AV VA HullDesign login iad v Username PHULL Planar Hull User v Password TETT MDB PLANARHULL For Planar Hull User v Options Integrate Engineering and Schematics C Open Read Only C Restore Views Note The console window may be suppressed by using a noconsole argument to the start up script It may also be controlled using an environment variable if you wish to run the system with the console hidden use set AVEVA NOCONSOLE TRUE 6 2 Save and Restore Views this new feature allows a user to take a snapshot of a view and save it to file The saved view can be reinstated when required including a new session of Hull amp Outfitting A saved view consists of three elements e The current drawilist e View properties e g view direction e A snapshot picture of the view when it was saved
95. m r 4 m A new Configurations sectionis where you create individual Configurations and allocate their Colours Categories and Rule Sets The Comparison Options have also moved here Configuration ipti Check name spec and size fewer colours Basic check Sample Schematic Design RuleSet Presentation check SB Compare Colours H H Categories Rule Sets You can now define multiple sets of Compare Colours Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 364 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Integrator Project Configuration Explorer C Mac projects 121 bas basdfits ModelM Project Defaults Dictionaries ARE Spec Queries D Configurations Compare Colours ias Traffic Lights ias Ergonomic Categories B Rule Sets The Comparison Categories settings have moved inside the Configuration Explorer Configuration Explorer C Mac projects 121 bas basdfits ModelManagement ProjectConfiguration xml be ieee L amp Project Defaults 8 Dictionaries ARAL Spec Queries D Configurations Compare Colours o Categories Default JEg aaan E SJS S S S S S S JE lt JE S lt SJS lt S
96. marker and end preparation information Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information See User Guide Draft Drawing Production Automatic Drawing Production General ADP Affected Programs Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 283 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 22 Sample C Project 12 1 SP3 Description A new Samples directory is available in the installation This directory contains sample C projects that shows how tocreate stand alone applications and add ins using the Marine NET API The Samples zip projects previously found in the top directory has been moved here and a new C project has been added that shows how to create a stand alone application for DXF import This sample replaces sz020 exe and sz021 exe that have been removed along with other obsolete programs and directories customise directory sy020 exe tbdbutil exe Benefits The installation now includes a C sample that makes it easy to create customer specific applications Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs sy020 exe z020 exe z021 exe todbutil exe Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 284 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 23 Handle Subpictures as SDB Files 12 1 SP3 Description There are two new functions to handle subpictures A subpicture can now be saved direc
97. of linked document propagation is recorded in the transaction database Limitations When creating a new location with allocated databases the linked documents will not be transferred These will require a forced Synchronisation after the location has been configured and initialised Global does not delete linked documents at the remote location when the linked document has been marked with LNKPRP DELE Offline transfer is not supported Linked documents propagation does not guarantee consistency between files at different locations In particular e Linked documents functionality is primarily intended for files which are part of the data model such as PDF Plotfiles and certain Marine files e Linked documents are not definitely linked to the database which references them It is therefore difficult to track such documents once the link description is no longer available e Likewise linked documents may be referenced multiple times This will be the norm for extract databases This makes it difficult to identify the primary location of a document e It is possible to reference Linked documents for other data types of documents such as Word documents and Excel spread sheets e It is possible for users to change documents at the destination location this will lead to an inconsistency between locations The update process does not detect this e Behaviour for extract hierarchies may not be as expected For this reason the FORCE option sh
98. options Cancel Both options will work when the connector size is changed This means that text on connectors will be visible after you modify above options and accept changes To make it work the connector size must be changed To enable text that has become invisible because of these options the Show Text option in the Shape Context menu must be ticked Refresh Show Text Linebreaks Using Control Handle Resize Refit Benefits There is a possibility to hide text on connectors because of the connector leg length Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 423 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 32 Miscellaneous Minor Improvements A number of further improvements have also been made to Diagrams for this release e Area Shapes DB representation A new Database Element Type SCAREA to represent Area Shapes has been introduced This allows data to be stored in the database related with Area Shapes allowing them for instance to represent rooms with related attributes and properties e Consistency Check Improvements The Consistency Check function now detects further issues that may exist with the objects on the diagram such as bad references and inconsistent use of fluid between connected pipelines e Auto Formatting Rules Improvements The Format to Assign tab i
99. pillar contains information similar to that stored in the plate jigs From now on the jig pillars are stored in MANU and the orientation information is no longer copied to the curved panel Benefits This change means an improved structure of stored data and is beneficial for projects using Global Compatibility Constraints Projects created in an earlier AVEVA Marine release needs to be upgraded before continued use with AVEVA Marine 12 1 The upgrade will change the storing of selected objects as described above as well as reorganise the MANU contents described in another release note For More Information Further details of the upgrading of old projects are given in the 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 224 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 59 New MANU Data Model Description In AVEVA Marine 12 0 the manufacturing data base MANU reflected the design and for each design block BLOCK the corresponding block MBLOCK was automatically created when the production parts where created Below each MBLOCK MPANEL elements were created and the production parts were stored below the MPANEL element The production part elements are MPLATE for planar and curved plates MPROF for planar and curved profiles and MBPRO for built profiles In AVEVA Marine 12 1 the MBLOCK and MPANEL elements are obsolete and the production parts are
100. project and maps it against a matrix of locations This uses the common symbols of tf Swt Database Distribution Database Distribution indicates the database is primary at this location indicates the database is foreign and allocated to this location indicates the database is allocated to this location but is primary elsewhere indicates the database is in transit from this location under a pending transaction Name lt DB gt SAMPLE PADD lt DB gt SAMPLE PPROJCATA lt DB gt X SAMPLE XDESI lt DB gt X SAMPLE XDESIGN lt DB gt X SAMPLE XDRAFT lt DB gt X SAMPLE XDRAFTM lt DB gt X SAMPLE XMANTEST lt DB gt X SAMPLEDXDRAFT lt DB gt X SAMPLEDXXXDRAFT lt DB gt X SAMPLEPOOXDRAFT lt DB gt X SAMPLE YDESIGN lt DB gt X SAMPLESYDRAFT lt DB gt STATIDESI lt DB gt STAT DICT DB Number 7201 7600 Filename SAMO00 sam7201 _0001 S4M000 sam7600_0001 S4M000 sam7200_0002 SAMO00 sam0015_0002 SAMO00 sam0014_0002 SAMO000 sam0016_0002 SA4MO000 sam0004_0002 SAMO000 sam0014_0003 SAMO000 sam0014_0005 SAMO00 sam0014_0004 SAMO000 sam0015_0003 SA4M000 sam0014_0006 S4M000 sam0013_0001 SAMO000 sam0012_0001 v Sort By Name v Filter Make selected databases primary at f Clear Selection Name Location Id lt LOC gt Hub SAMCENTRAL HUB lt LOC gt EDSAT EDD lt LOC gt MARTIN MAW lt LOC gt OFFCENTRE OFF lt LOC
101. seam_at_fr32 is created then it will not get the same number The same is relevant for shell profiles as well When starting batch generation of seams and shell profiles from the interactive application the information needed to recreate any deleted seams and shell profiles with the same number as they had in the interactive application session will be sent to the batch process Benefits The name sequence database is better utilised and thus less numbers will be used Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 102 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 10 Multiple Negatives when Designing User Defined End Cut Description The current implementation of user defined end cuts has been restricted to only one negative extrusion and to cut angles less or equal to 90 degrees This has now been improved allowing any number of negative extrusions defined in any plane e g one negative extrusion used to define the end cut for the web and another one defining the flange end cut Furthermore extensions of the profile is supported allowing also cut angles greater than 90 degrees Benefits The improvement makes it possible to define any type of complex end cuts Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Set
102. selecting a new template with a different steelwork section specification or creating by dimensions pads will be regenerated if pads already exist before the regeneration process if triggered If the size of the steelwork sections is not modified then the same pad will be used If the steelwork section is modified then the pad size will be modified 26 5 Hole Management Enhancements The Hole Management Utility which creates and manages penetrations in panels has been improved by the addition of additional catalogue properties in the Pipework catalogue and HVAC penetration components The utility is available only in the Pipework and HVAC Designer applications and accessed from the Hole Management Utilities toolbar To start the application click the Hole Management Utility icon on the toolbar to display the Managed Hole Utility window The main utility form is divided into 4 sections for the creation merging modification of holes and utilities Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 466 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For further details please refer to chapter 4 Multi Disciplinary Penetration and Hole Management of the Design Common Functionality guide 26 5 1 Hole Management Enhancements 12 1 SP4 Hole management functions have been enhanced in PDMS 12 1 SP4 In addition to various defect corrections the changes consist of e Improved support for managed penetrations through SCTN GENSEC STWALL and WALL
103. stored in manufacturing package elements MANPKG These elements contain a filter element MPKGFT as well as one or more manufacturing package folders MPKGFL The rules defined in the MPKGFT elements determine in which manufacturing package the production parts will be stored Each folder within a manufacturing package has a rule which makes it possible to e g store different types of plate parts in different folders 4 Manu package Manu package filter Manu package folder Manu package folder ag Manu package folder tee Manu package folder Sbee ce coccosecccccaemeneweqeccccaqecss tes Manu package folder Manu package i Manu package filter t Manu package folder Manu package Examples of rules are MATCHWILD ATTRIB NAMN ER5 ATTRIB TYPE EQ MPLATE ATTRIB TYPECD EQ 91 MATCHWILD ATTRIB QUATXT OF FIRST MPLRWI A Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 225 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e ATTRIB NAMN OF OWNER INSET ER2 TEST e TRUE The last rule can be used in a last folder to ensure that there always is a folder to put the production part in This folder should normally be empty 5 Em MANPKG ALL Ea MANPKG CA1 Em MANPKG CA2 Em MANPKG CA3 1B MANPKG CA4 Em MANPKG CA5 Ea MANPKG CAS F MANPKG ER1 Em MPKGFT ER1Filter1 E fga MPKGFL ER1Profiles H P MPROF ER1 CP1 S1P fya MPKGFL ER1PlateParts Em MPKGFL ER1Bracke
104. surface the orientation in space of the hull text in space before projection is defined by several fields in the dialog One of these is Looking which replaces Looking from in previous versions This means that the opposite value compared to earlier versions should be set to get the same result For example a Looking value of PS is equivalent tothe previous Looking from value of SB Benefits This change aligns the way looking direction is defined with that of other functions e g for creating symbolic hull views Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Miscellaneous Functions Hull Marks Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 214 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 52 Control of Marking Gap at Holes Description When creating plane panel parts via the Plane Part Generation ppanparts functionality the user has the possibility to set a default parameter value MARKGAP that controls the distance marking lines will be cut off at the outer contour of the plates If a marking line ends at or crosses or is close to a hole no check on any marking gap has been done so far However there is one exception Marking lines defined via the MARKING statement in the Hull Modelling will be cut off at holes using the parameter MARKGAP Because of possible plate damage when burner cutter c
105. the PBS explorer is defined in Lexicon and stored in the dictionary database All the PBS definitions are created below the PBS World PBSWLD which can own PBS Templates PBSTPL Each PBS Template defines a separate PBS hierarchy and will be presented in the PBS Explorer as a single root node This makes it possible to define several PBS structures for instance one structure might present engineering items organised by system another might show schematic elements by class or other properties and another might be used for presenting design data Elements in the PBS Template define the data and its organisation to be shown in the structure The data is in the PBS tree as text nodes or nodes connected to existing database elements In both cases there is a choice of different methods for generating the result nodes For full details please refer to the Admin manuals Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 26 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 2 Use the BACKREf Attribute 12 1 SP3 The BACKREf attribute brings the back pointer reference for Reference Table Attributes and answer the question what references me ce The syntax is Q BACKREF ATINAME att ATTNAME att2 E g standing ona SPCO and querying for BACKREf attname SPREF will return all elements referencing that SPCO Q BACKREF attname SPCO Excluding the argument will list all Reference Table Attributes referencing CE E g Q BACKREF
106. the steps such as dragging objects into the canvas or checking panel definitions The panels collected to take part in the process can be selected freely and need not belong toa single block Selected panels can be added or removed during the process Cutters and Target Blocks can also be added during the process The user decides the order between cutting and sorting of the selected panels All cutters are applied to the panels as temporary seams that can be visualized and optionally adjusted before the division takes place The new Block Divide function handles all cases that were handled by the previous version except for the case where a Design block is used to populate a number of Production blocks in a multi vew project To reach this functionality set the environment variable SBH_OLD_BLO_DIV to TRUE This will make the previous wizard based Block Divide function to start instead 3 Job_001 Q Selected Objects BDRK4 1 BDRK4 2 Cutters 3 _PL2 Y LP0 BDRK4 1 BDRK4 2 B Target Blocks BDRK4A BDRK4B Benefits e Better overvew through subdivision of the Block Divide process into steps e Greater flexibility as the order of the steps is controlled by the user e Enhanced quality as the result from each step can be verified and visualised Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 132 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Structural
107. to move focus to the history combo box with fewer keyboard hits mouse clicks Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only documented here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 305 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 41 Symbolic View Menu Description All functionality handling symbolic views has been moved to a new top menu Symbolic View The Symbolic View menu is available in the following applications e Hull Design Curved Modelling e Hull Design Planar Modelling e Hull Design Structural Design e Hull Design Space Management e Marine Drafting Section Curved Hull View gt Detail Recreate Edit Modify Select Properties Please note that the menu function previously called Create has now been renamed to Section to unify the function names in this menu ee Project Symbolic View AutoDP Window Help Planar Hull View gt Curved Hull View gt Shell Expansion Bodyplan DevelopedPlate Shell Stiffener Curved Panel Recreate Modify Select Properties This means that the following has been removed Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 306 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e The Planar Hull View menu in Planar Modelling and Structural Design e The Curved Hull View menu in Curved Modelling and Stru
108. to note about Design Reference databases E E oa lt TEAM gt CTBKTEST unset e Engineering or Schematics users can use ae ee a them Sort by Name w Filter e They cannot be the default DB in an MDB i N e They cannot include SITEs this also a prevents the creation of elements below Deh scat SITEs e They can include Schematic 3D link elements making link information available in Schematics products when their users do not have access to normal DESI databases mes Matirite i et Cam C Controlled V 2D Reference Only Database Type Design v C Protected Area Number System DB Number System l System Unique File Number System System Primary Loc PROJECTHUB x Propagate Database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 29 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 5 Access to Databases The complete list of database types apart from system types is now e Administrative DICTIONARY NSEQUENCE e Parts catalogue and material properties CATALOGUE PROPERTIES e 3D Design and Drafting DESIGN amp DESIGN Reference DRAFT PADD ISODRAFT e Schematics and Engineering DESIGN Reference SCHEMATIC ENGINEERING In addition MANUFACTURING and NSEQUENCE database types are primarily used by the Marine products Access to the various types of database depends on the product and module being used as well as a user s access as determined by his team membership and any Data Access Cont
109. to see details True Ef CustomS elector Browse to see details pump Equip_Pump png Browse to see details TYPE Browse to see details True UNIQUE_ID Browse to see details True PMLLIB icons S chematicModelViewer Browse to see details True UNIQUE_ID Browse to see details True Apply Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 407 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 25 Split Merge for SCBRAN Description Split Merge functions for SCBRAN now available in Diagrams e Join To join two branches please select two valid connectors and execute the Join lt LineType gt Branch option from toolbars or menus HOEA a a AAE O Join HY AC Branches P amp ID Object Data Shape wil Oo Create Pipeline OF Join Pipe Lines oni ReneS Instrumentation gt HVAC Object Data Shape Create HVAC line Sl Join HVAC Lines Refit Ctrl F6 Refit Ctrl Fe Resize Ctrl F5 Resize Ctrl F5 Reverse Direction kt O SpecSearch Set SCSTYP Reverse Direction Off Page Connector Nozzle Specification If join will not be possible the system will notify the user in the System Message log e Split To split branches use the Branch splitter symbol which works in the same way as Line splitter Copyright 19
110. upgrading multiple projects many System Administrators will need to co ordinate The upgrade process will upgrade one project at a time Customers will need to give careful consideration to the order of upgrade for the various projects The projects will need to be locked for the duration of the upgrade with all Users out of the system The upgrade process will be Ensure all users have exited from project Lock project at all locations upgrade will check for this see below Disable Automatic update events if required Recommended but not essential Expunge all users in the system at the local location Pe Qe O Flush data from Working extracts these will not be considered in Global projects they should be deleted Check project using DICE Integrity Checker a If DICE reveals issues address them then re run DICE Administrator may want to unlock project while DICE issues are being addressed but will need to exclude all users and Lock project again before final DICE check 8 After clean DICE check 9 Back up project at all locations NOD 10 Temporarily relocate all non Foreign DBs to their master s Primary location 11 Check for No Transient Databases 12 Upgrade the project at each location 13 Optionally Merge Sessions 14 Optionally Reconfigure for Unicode 15 DICE check project 16 Relocate extracts back to their original locations 17 Perform non framework upgrades if applicable 18 Unlock the pro
111. use of the latest fix release is recommended this includes any previous fixes to products installed together Please note During the installation itis fully possible to change the path in which the Marine product is installed from its suggested default However it is required that the installation path does not include folders with spaces in the names Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For full details of the installation options and procedure and the hardware and software requirements please refer to the Marine Software Installation Guide and Minimum System Requirements Marine 1 3 1 Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 will not fully support projects with spaces in their pathnames Work is in hand to remove these limitations but no definite release date is yet set 1 3 2 AVEVA Database Cache Service 12 1 SP3 For installation of AVEVA Database Cache Service and the activation of Microsoft Message Queuing MSMQ please see the Marine Software Installation Guide provided on the DVD There is also a short description in this bulletin in chapter AVEVA General Functionality Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 1 4 AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 Test Projects The table below shows details about the sample project supplied and where to find the test data ee os fri 08 ne een Sepa
112. used explicitly in a project that does not use DBRanges A DBRange may be created in Admin under the STAT element in the SYSTEM or GLOBAL database and defines the start DBRBEG and end DBREND of a range of numbers There is anew UNIQUE option for the CREATE DB command to allow the user to create the next database in the defined range for the project a new pseudo attribute NXTDBU gives the next database number within the range For full details please refer to the Administrator User Guide and Command Reference Manual 5 6 1 Admin GUI To create a DB Range a menu in the Settings pull down takes the user to a new form to set values for a DB Range If no range already exists this will create an unnamed DB Range and populate it with the specified values if more than one range is required for the project these should be created on the command line Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 30 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin A Unique button for DB Number on the Create Database form ensures creation of a database within the project s range see picture in section 5 4 2 5 7 Duplicate Names In general AVEVA Marine products prevent the use of duplicate names within the current MDB However it may be desirable for Engineering or Schematics elements to use the same name as the 3D elements in the Design database Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 allowed name duplication between the DESI and the SCHE databases It is now p
113. value when required Benefits Handle wraparounds and name sequence restarts from specified initial value Compatibility Constraints To store an initial value other than zero upgrade of NSEQ dbs is required For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Curved Hull Design and any customisation using NSEQ dbs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 55 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 6 BLOCK Creation in Specific Database Description There is anew PML function available for creating BLOCKs in specific databases HullNewBlock blkName is STRING dbName is STRING is DBREF The parameter b kName is the name of the new block and it is mandatory The parameter dbName is the name of the new block and it is optional needs to be passed as space i e The function returns the DBREF tothe newly created BLOCK element if successful Otherwise an error message is issued and the function result is undefined Example blk HullNewBlock MYBLOCK MYTEAM MYDB That statement will create a new block MYBLOCK in the database MYTEAM MYDB blk HullNewBlock MYBLOCK MYHBLWLD That statement will create a new block MYBLOCK under the existing HBLWLD MYHBLWLD Benefits The new PML function makes it possible to create Hull Blocks without using DBPrompt Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull in
114. we have a new solution for these situations that we hope will be more robust Basically it means that if you want to do permanent changes to a drawing you have no write access to you will have to create a copy So when you now open a drawing it write mode but fail to claim it the system will ask if you want to create a copy If you still want to open the drawing as read only to avoid claiming if for other users then the system will create a temporary copy without connections to the PADD database You can do some modification to this drawing but you will not be able to save them neither with the Save Drawing nor with the Save Drawing As function You can only output the modification with Export SDB Also modifications that require the PADD database to be updated will not be possible so do For example draw outfitting create or modify associative labels dimensions Benefits There is amore robust and safe solution for opening drawings in read only mode Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Drafting File Open Drawing Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 277 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 17 Long Drawing Names 12 1 SP4 Description Until now there have been some inconsistencies in how you can name a drawing when doing New o D
115. 0 SP6 31 and 12 1 1 1 with a few exceptions In general Schematic 3D Integrator includes those in 12 0 SP6 30 with the exceptions listed below These and the defect fixes from 12 0 SP6 31 will be supplied in a future fix release P 40710 SCTUB shown yellow with differences on routing components message but no differences reported P 41424 Not matched SCFITT TEE gets green icon P 41743 SI 39870 Branch TREF not set on Integrator build P 41825 Integrator should not output messages about return refs from off page connectors P 41851 SI 40064 Build Several SCPLINs on Integrator cause error P 41855 SI 40064 Integrator View diagram form s preview check box should be off by default Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 500 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin This page left blank intentionally Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 501 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin AVEVA Solutions Ltd High Cross Madingley Rd Cambridge CB3 OHB UK Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 502
116. 07 New Explorer gt cd SCEQUI PECENE 108 g fo m 2 c 9 te EQUI ELECEQUIP_120 EQUI ELECEQUIP_121 O NavigateTo be Linked Say LOLP G G S 0 9 9 8 5 0 9 8 6 6 0 9 AN iaaiiai Matched SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_111 f EQUI ELECEQUIP_123 o w erorce aon P EQUI ELECEQUIP_12 P SCEQUI ELECEQUIP_113 mar FALI FI FCFOLIP 125 A SCFOUIFIFCFOUIP 114 In this example the equipment is matched by name but is also linked to another object This indicates a possible issue to investigate Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 375 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 7 New Integrator Object Method Integrator link information stored on CYMLNK elements consists of references to schematic and 3D elements It is possible during project execution for these references to become invalid when elements are deleted A method is provided to clean up CYMLNK elements with invalid references Integrator ValidateLinks Note This method should be used only when all of the schematic and design databases holding elements that have been linked are current on the MDB 22 8 Electrical Connections When building an equipment with a template Integrator will try to match schematic electrical connections to 3D electrical connections within the template It already does this for nozzles which are matched on BORE but for ELCONNs it now tries to match on CATREF Details are included in the updated
117. 19 20 21 22 23 A 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 F 2 2 3 3 7 E C Today 2013 06 10 Approval Date Identification Descriptior Prefix Letter Number Suffix Bala 01 Clear Filter Stabizer o Date Filters gt Equals F 2A F 2B 7 All Before fF A 7 Blanks After FF o 7 2013 06 10 00 00 00 F 2AE 7 2013 06 12 00 00 00 Between b 2B Tomorrow g Today Ihe aaa Next Week Last Week Next Month This Month w Last Month L Next Quarter Fe firatinn a Thie Niartar Benefits Better handling of date and time Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Lexicon Reference Manual User Defined Attributes Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 427 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Affected Programs All modules can use DateTime UDA s AVEVA Engineering has the filtering mechanism in the lists Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 428 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 3lcons for Linked Items and Documents 12 1 SP4 Description The List Manager now includes 4 default columns for Datasheet Linked Diagram Linked 3D Object and Linked Documents An Icon will be displayed if a linked object exists The icon can be clicked to open the related Viewer for Diagram 3D amp Linked Documents or the Datasheet Editor Empty cells in the Datasheet column can also be clicked to create a new datasheet alad aaa T
118. 2 m Ordinary 13 5000 59 4602 0 0000 j4 Cine Lxknuck 3 M Ordinary 22 0000 71 5827 0 0000 The angle curves can be created by function Curve Create Angle Curve and the angle coordinates are put by means of the dialog box Create Angle Curve View Section O Waterline Buttock Parent Curve Tangent Taft Tpmbs Knuckle Tpmbf Method Automatic Manual O File Benefits The angle curves can more easily be changed in PACE Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 78 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 13 Lines User Local View Description An oblique local vew based either on a locked curve or on a user specified coordinate system can be created The view context menu in an oblique view contains the items Local specified axes and Local from selected curve The second option is available when a curve locked in an arbitrary plane is selected The first option is always available From selected curve When available selecting this option will switch the view to an oblique view with a local coordinate system defined by the plane of the selected curve The title bar will change to reflect the curve on which the view is based and the axes it is de
119. 2000 0 182300 32000 28000 When a new envelope is defined the tick box Generate from Box can be used When ticked the boundary list will be dimmed and the key in fields for minimum and maximum points are enabled If data for general particulars is available these will be fetched and added to the key in fields when using the function Box from GP The fetched values are extended with one meter in all directions When the limits selected to generate an envelope generate more than one closed volume there is now the possibility to select which one to use as the desired envelope by specifying a point inside the created envelope Benefits The new possibility to generate envelopes enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 139 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 8 RSO Change Envelope Description A new function RSO Change Envelope has been added which allows the user to move RSOs from one envelope to another When moved the RSO is recreated in the target envelope The following dialog is presented when the function is activated E Change RSO Envelope Select Envelope Select Target Envelope BOX MART Select AS0s Existing RSOs RSOs to be moved BRSO1 BRSO2 BRSOA EA When an envelope is selected f
120. 5 PML Collections A PML Collection with unlimited scope now collects data from the entire database in other words an empty scope now means ALL rather than NONE This means that the collection operation will take much longer so it may be worth checking any PML functions to ensure that this is what is required 6 6 Attribute Display Editing and Validation A new Attributes Utility replaces the previous Query Attributes and Attributes forms it combines the functions of both and also enables attributes to be edited if access rights permit Attributes that are not editable are shown with a grey background feedback is given for inappropriate attribute values The form displays the attributes of the current database element either in a list or by category see pictures below The form allows the user to edit attributes where appropriate and is available in all modules It replaces the old PML Query Attributes form and the old C Attributes form The popup menu provides various new functions such as an ability to set the current element toa reference attribute value The details vary between modules and are documented in the appropriate manuals WRT Element gt Track CE Categorised Alphabetical Expand Nodes Collapse Nodes Modify Category Filters Manage Category Filters Display UDAs Display Pseudo Attributes Columns gt Settings Export to Excel Print Preview Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Lt
121. 5392 0836 15392 0838 Reference Data Mass Properties Pipework Pipe Splitting Pipe Assemblies Pipe Isometric System Isometric Pipe Spool Bending machine sim for P1 PS01 Bending machine sim for P1 PS02 Bending machine sim for P1 PSO03 Bending machine sim for P1 P S04 Bending machine sim for P1 P S05 Bending machine sim for P1 P S06 Bending machine sim for P1 P SO Bending machine sim for P1 P S08 Bending machine sim for P1 P S09 Bending machine sim for P1 P 510 Bending machine sim for P1 P 511 Bending machine sim for P1 P512 Bending machine sim for P1 P 313 Bending machine sim for P1 PS14 Bending machine sim for P1 P 515 Bending machine sim for P1 P 516 Bending machine sim for P1 P 517 Bending machine sim for P1 P316 Bending machine sim for P1 PS19 Bending machine sim for P1 PS20 Bending machine sim for P1 P 21 Bending machine sim for P1 PS 22 Bending machine sim for P1 P S23 Bending machine sim for P1 P S24 Bending machine sim for P1 P 525 Walid TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE Bending Machine Unset BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_
122. 74 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 302 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 38 Marine Drafting Open Sheet 12 1 SP2 Description It is possible to open a marine drawing sheet by using the right click menu of Draft Explorer and select the Open Sheet menu item Draft Explorer A Xx Fitter _ Administrator x S Oraft wort H DEPT DRAWINGS_AFT m DEPT Assembly_DRAWINGS_AFT f DEPT General E REGI StdFrm_001 S REGI MarDwg DRWG MTP_GA 0001_SHT01_REV1 DRWG DRWG MTP C4A 0001 SHTO DEVAINDIWG DRWG Open Sheet WG DRWG Add to Link Documents DRWG ca DEPT DRAWII Attributes H H DEPT Assemt H H DEPT DRAWII fA DEPT Assemt New Explorer gt w DEPT General FR DEPT TT Project_Libraries Add To My Data Benefits Quicker way to open a certain drawing if it is displayed in the draft explorer tree Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 303 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 39 Marine System Font 12 1 SP2 Description A TrueType font called Marine System with the same appearance as the TBSystemFont s has been introduced in 12 1 SP2 This font contains the entire set of glyphs from all TBSystemFonts 0 7 i e the English Cyrillic German and Scandinavian characters Benefits TrueT
123. 74 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 408 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Import Shape Wizard step 1 of 5 Type and Name of Shape Import selected shape as a Equipment items hein Pipeline elements Pipe components Instrumentation HVAC line elements HVAC components Cable elements Annotation Off page connectors Line splitter Line splitter Flow direction symbol Area shape splitter a D E j E it i Shape name Cancel Benefits The possibility to join split branches in simple way without using workarounds Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 409 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 26 Setting SCVALV GTYP to INST rather than VALV Description It is now possible to use INST as a GTYP on SCVALV elements instead of VALV VTWA or VFWA gtypes To achieve this the master shape must have the Classify as Instrument GTYPE INST option checked on the Edit Import master dialog Edit Master Wizard step 1 of 4 Type and Name of Shape Import selected shape as Element types bel paq Equipment items 2 way valve udet Pipeline elements valve Pipe components Valve 2 way valve 3 way valve 4 way valve Instrument E Fitting Pipe destination Instrumentation H AC line elements HVAC components Cable elements
124. 9003 GF SC FO9004 F SC FO9005 F SC FO9006 GF SC FO9007 GF SC FO9008 F SC FO9009 F SC FO9010 F SC FO9011 GF SC HOS001 GF SC HOS002 gp SC HO9003 GF SC HOS004 gt Ut For more information See User Guide Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Main Gui Components Possibility to sort Explorer Items by name Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 388 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 11 Instrument Loop Creation Dialog 12 1 SP3 Description It is possible to create SCLOOP element and all derived UDET s using a dialog that is available in the P amp ID menu P amp ID Object Data Shape Window Help E Create Pipeline of Join Pipe Lines gt Join Pipe Branches O Instrumentation gt amp Refit Ctrl F6 g i Resize Ctrl F5 Create Instrument Line Set Instrument Loop Reference a SpecSearch ia Reverse Direction Off Page Connector Nozzle Specification Create Instrument Loop Type SCLOOP v j Group name Demo Loopname Z Use autonaming Attributes User defined attributes Attribute Name Attribute Value FUNC Sample a a Here you can Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 389 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 1 Select the type that should be created from the drop down list The list contains all UDETs derived from SCLOOP By default base SCLOOP type is set 2 Select the group in which the
125. 93 96 978 0 938 1 027 175 000 32 000 9 500 50708 807 100 290 4 923 0 953 307 677 1 012 5801 144 96 175 0 942 1 036 Surface Manager To activate this function in Surface Manager right click on the surface in the tree browser and select Calculate Hydrostatics in the menu The dialogue below is presented where the ship particulars and the draft of the ship must be given The analysis is activated by pressing the Calculate button The result from the calculation is presented in the output window Hydrostatic Parameters x m Ship partiduars AP at x pos 0 LPP 244330 Beam 21111 Draft amp Shell thickness Draft 8500 Shell thickness 0 Calculate Cancel 13 1 2 Tank Capacities Given a space arrangement this function will reply with tables of tanks grouped on purpose the tables are displayed on the current drawing The following information are displayed in the table head the purpose is shown and for each tank the following properties are shown e id e Start End frame for the tank e Volume e Weight full Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 127 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Centre of tank LCG TCG VCG e Density of the tank content This calculation is available in Space Management on arrangements of type Compartment Space Management The calculation of Tank Capacities is activated by using the Space Management function Tank Capacities When activating the dialogue be
126. 974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 82 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 16 Release of Weights to Calc Description The default settings for releasing weight of objects to the Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics application have been changed Previously the default was to release the weight This will now be set to off As before the setting of this is done in the weight analysis dialog Benefits Ease of use Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Surface amp Compartment Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 83 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 17 Axis Setting Reflected in Dialogs Description In Hydrostatics Hydrodynamics it has been possible to set the direction of the x axis and y axis to be used in reports This setting is now also reflected in dialogs in Hydrostatics Hydrodynamics application Benefits Ease of use Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics AVEVA Marine Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 84 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 18 Sea Water Density Description A different sea water density can now be specified for each Loading Condition The sea water density is entered on the Options page of the Loading Condition dialog Benefits Ease of use Compatibility
127. A Solutions Ltd 87 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 21 Inclining Experiment Description The Inclining module In Hydrostatics Hydrodynamics has been corrected and revised according to comments received from users The calculations and output should now fully comply with statutory requirements Benefits Ensures compliance with the statutory regulations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 88 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 22 Probabilistic Stability to SOLAS 2009 Rules Description The Probabilistic Stability module In Hydrostatics Hydrodynamics has been updated to include the latest 2009 SOLAS cargo passenger ship rules The damage case generation algorithm for multi zone damage has also been revised to bring it in line with the recommended interpretation of the rules The implementation also provides for different damage permeabilities for different loading conditions as specified in the rules Benefits Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Initial Design Hydrostatics Major Tasks Probabilistic Stability Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 89 AVEVA Mar
128. AVEVA Solutions Ltd 73 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 9 Lines Curve Highlighting Description An enhancement to the highlighting of the current curve has been implemented in the curve grid The currently selected curve from the Curve tree view is now highlighted in the curves grid Selecting a curve in a graphical view will also scroll into view and highlight the corresponding curve in the curve grid p ane p coreene vane conor fons sooni irate L 2 Fos Fme 4 Stem Profile Fitted 5 PMB Aft Fitted j6 _ PMB Forward Fitted Knuckle Tran Fitted ja _ Buttock 18 9 Buttock 1 __ Fitted gt Curves Data Points A Control Points AColol lt i QARK KIKI maaa yqa E R S j 1 pm a a Benefits it is more apparent which curve is currently selected Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 74 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 10 Lines Locking and Fitting to a Plane Description Curves can now be fitted and locked to arbitrary planes Curves lying in the principal planes for example boundary curves are already locked and fitted and as such the items below are not applicable For both locking and fitting specification of the plane for the curve can be done in two ways either using automatically determined points or manually via select
129. Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Miscellaneous Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 308 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 43 New Module Name Description Hull Drafting has been renamed to Marine Drafting This name change affects the following PMLLIB hulldrafting nDraPickElement pmlfnc PMLLIB marinedrafting m DraPickElement pmlfnc PMLLIB hulldrafting apphdramain pml frm PMLLIB marinedrafting appmdramain pml frm marhdra exe mardra exe Benefits Previous name was in many cases misleading and made customers confused when it came to which Drafting module to use Using the Marine Drafting name strengthens our recommendation to use Marine Drafting for both hull and outfitting users Compatibility Constraints Please note that in order to use Marine Drafting 12 1 with a project the module definition in the project must be modified This will be done using the upgrade script for 12 1 There is also a macro PDMSUl mdra admin hdra2mdra mac that can be used from the Admin module to change the module definition It is important to note that any customisation done by customers that checks the module name might have tobe modified to work properly For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Affected Programs Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 309 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 44 Dr
130. Attributes USDAs can have a list of valid values for text attributes or a list of valid ranges for numeric attributes These lists are checked when setting the UDA to prevent the use of values outside the valid range A new logical attribute on UDA and USDA elements determines whether the valid values or ranges if such exist are optional The default behaviour remains that the restrictions remain non optional If however this attribute is set TRUE and the UDA or USDA definition is re compiled it will be possible to override the restriction and set the attribute to a value outside the valid range To support this a new method has been added to PML2 Attribute object and NET public interface The new method LIMITSVALIDOPTIONAL ELEMENTTYPE complements the existing LIMITS ELEMENTTYPE and VALIDVALUES ELEMENTTYPE methods The NET database interface class for attributes Aveva Pdms Database DbAttributehasa new method to determine whether the valid values or range is optional for a particular element type public abstract bool IsAllowedOptional DbElementType type 7 2 3 Database Views A Database View defines a table for viewing manipulating data in the database these data may be derived from a single element or multiple elements There is a row in the Database View table for each element that has a particular element type and meets the criteria
131. BD_STD is valid for drawing forms Benefits The drawing form names can be listed without being mixed by standard subpictures Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detail Design Planar Modelling planar Hull Modelling Characteristics System Components Data Banks Affected Programs Marine Drafting and Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 295 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 33 KEEP_SESSION_FILES 12 1 SP2 Description There is a default variable in Marine Drafting controlling whether sdb files belonging to old sessions should be preserved each time a new version of the sheet is created i e each time the drawing is saved This default variable is called KEEP_SESSION_FILES and can be assigned either YES or NO Unfortunately the interpretation of the value is inversed This means that in order to keep all session files KEEP_SESSION_FILES previously needed tobe set to NO This issue has been corrected in 12 1 SP2 and from now on the values have the following meaning KEEP_SESSION_FILES YES Keep old sdb files KEEP_SESSION_FILES NO Remove old sdb files except sdb files belonging to stamped sessions There is a support incident about this issue which has been marked as solved in 12 1 SP2 41493 KEEP_SESSION_FILES does not work Benefits Interpreting the value correctly makes the system more consistent Compatibility Const
132. Claims in Hull Applications Documentation 10 AVEVA Initial Design 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 Storing of CALC Output in DABACON 12 1 SP4 Project Data Supports Roaming Profiles 12 1 SP4 Sorting points in PACE 12 1 SP3 Oil outflow 12 1 SP3 Lines New Grid in PACE Lines Individual Tuft Size in Views in PACE Lines Macro Editor in PACE Lines Cline s Project Limits PMB and Mid Ships Lines Curve Highlighting Lines Locking and Fitting to a Plane Lines Curve Interrogation Lines Angle Curve Creation Editing Lines User Local View Corrugated RSOs Compartment Export Import in XML Format Release of Weights to Calc Axis Setting Reflected in Dialogs Sea Water Density Multiple Lightship Weights Oil Outflow Inclining Experiment Probabilistic Stability to SOLAS 2009 Rules Damage Case Summary Table MODU Wind Heeling Moments Connected Compartments ABS Towing Criteria 11 AVEVA Hull General Functionality Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17
133. Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 85 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 19 Multiple Lightship Weights Description Hydrostatics Hydrodynamics can now handle alternative lightweights More than one Lightweight module can be created in the General Particulars folder A combo box for selecting which lightweight to use has been added to the Loading module dialog The Deterministic Loading Sequence and Summary Table modules have also been updated to handle multiple lightweights Benefits Ease of use Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 86 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 20 Oil Outflow Description A new Oil Outflow module has been added tothe Regulations folder This calculates the oil outflow performance according to MARPOL Regulation 12A p11 concerning the probability of oil outflow from damaged fuel tanks Benefits Ensures compliance with the statutory regulations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide nitial Design Hydrostatics Major Tasks Regulations Oil Fuel Outflow Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEV
134. Design Block Division Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 133 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 2 Finite Element Modeller Knuckled Panels 12 1 SP4 Description Knuckles in knuckled panels are now considered to some extent in idealisation and FE modelling When the bending radius is larger than 0 3 intended element size the knuckle will be part of the idealised or FE model Smaller radii are neglected Benefits Improved accuracy Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 134 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 3 FEM Folder in FEMWLD 12 1 SP4 Description A folder is created beneath a FEMWLD element when it contains FEMIMGs fy FEMWLD FEM Femimgs Em FEMIMG _FGTFER2 fm FEMIMG _FGBFER2 Em FEMIMG _FGSFER2 fa HIBLO FER2 fa HIBLO FER2_R fm FEMODL FER2_FEM Benefits Improved structure of FEM related data Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 135 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 4RSO CSV format update 12 1 SP3 Description RSO information can be extracted toa CSV file and used for updating func
135. EP_STAND_REF e STRUCT_MODULES_IN_HULL e STRUCT_MODULES_IN_OUTF e TEMPERATURE_UNIT_SYSTEM e VELOCITY_UNIT_SYSTEM The volume concept in Tribon M3 has been replaced by AVEVA Outfitting so the following default variables are no longer valid e INCL_COMP_VOLUME_EVENT_POINTS_IN_EQUIP e INITIAL_VOLUME_DB e PLACVOL_NAME_CODE The database in Tribon M3 has been replaced by Dabacon so the following default variables are no longer valid e AUTO_CLEAN_WORKSPACE e BACKUP_ACT e BACKUP_TIME The control point concept in Tribon M3 has been removed so the following default variable is no longer valid e DIM_CONTROLPOINT_MID_TOL Benefits Avoid confusion by not showing obsolete default variables in the Format Defaults dialog Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 345 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 346 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 76 TBSystemFonts Description It is a Known issue that the old legacy fonts do not function very well in AVEVA Marine 12 These fonts are e TBSystemFonto e TBSystemFont1 e TBSystemFont2 e TBSystemFont3 e TBSystemFont4 e TBSystemFont5 e TBSystemFont6 e TBSystemFont7 e TBISOFont101 e TBISOFont105 The issue is that these fonts cannot be used for text elements store
136. Follow CE current element 2 Indicate a production part in the Manufacturing Explorer and related reports and drawings for the indicated part will appear in the Linked Documents dialog The reports and drawings may then be opened by right clicking on the displayed link Benefits Reports and sketches related to a specific production part may be easily viewed Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Production Program Interface Hull Production Program Interface Links to Documents from Related Production Parts Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 228 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 62 Naming of Curved Plates and Stiffeners Description Handling of names is slightly changed for shell plates and stiffeners in DESI databases and curved plate parts in MANU databases It is no longer possible to have shell plates and stiffeners automatically renamed when adding them to a curved panel This option controlled by the environment variable SBH_CPAN_ RENAME_PARTS was a legacy from much older versions of the system and might cause problems if used wrongly Shell plates and stiffeners will now always keep their initial name even after being added to a curved panel Secondly it is possible to control how curved plate parts are named in MANU by use of the above mentioned variable
137. For More Information Cancel Refer to User Guide Diagrams Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams Adding Parts to a Branch Dropping and Connecting Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 30 Default Value of the Stencil in Batch Job Description To be able to set default values for all existing items that have been created from particular equipment masters it is necessary to edit the equipment master and set the default value for the new UDA Then running the Batch Job with Update attribute presentation settings selected The master that contains the modified data must be selected Update Diagrams Options C Update symbols according to master shapes C Update symbols according to catalogue information C Update annotation formats lt Update attribute presentation settings C Ignore stencil settings C Refresh shapes Select master shapes to use for update 1 selected Load log Update Before starting the batch update it is necessary that Allow individual shape settings to override default settings is checked for items that needs to be updated Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation Referenced attributes Allow individual shape settings to override default settings amp Actuator Attribute Label Prompt Visible Visible in Item List Read Onl lt Area shape gt NAME Name S Bran
138. Guide Hull Detailed Design gt Setup and Customisation gt Alignment Marking gt Marks for Assembly GSD gt GSD Customising gt Control of GSD s via a Default File Affected Programs Plane and Curved Parts Generation and Profile Sketch and List Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 196 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 37 Enhanced Control of Profile Sketches 12 1 SP3 Description Previously the profile restriction file keyword PSKETCH was used to activate the profile sketch function both when running Profile Sketch and List and Profile Cutting Interface Now a separate control facility for those two programs has been added The three old keywords PSKETCH PSKETCH_BEND_SIMPLE and PSKETCH_BEND_ COMPLEX are now reserved for activating the profile sketch when running Profile Sketch and List Three new keywords CSKETCH CSKETCH_BEND_ SIMPLE and CSKETCH_BEND_ COMPLEX have been added to the profile restriction file They are used only to activate the profile sketch function from Profile Cutting Interface CSKETCH YES NO Default is NO so it needs to be set to YES if profile sketches in general should be created CSKETCH_BEND_SIMPLE YES NO Default is NO Used to activate profile sketches for simple bending curves but not for straight profiles CSKETCH_BEND_COMPLE X YES NO Default is NO Used to activate profile sketches for complex bending curves but not for straight profiles Benefits Flexibility C
139. HUB unset lt DB gt HVAC PADD PADD 7121 PROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt MASTERJASLCATA CATA 7010 0 0 unset a lt DB gt MASTER ASSOCDEFN DESI 7027 00 unset lt DB gt MASTERICABLECATA CATA 7021 0 0 unset lt DB gt MASTERICABLEPROP PROP 7026 0 0 unset s lt DB gt MASTER CABLETMPL DESI 7022 00 unset lt DB gt MASTERIDICT DICT 7006 0 0 unset 7 lt DB gt MASTERIEQUICATA CATA 7014 00 unset J lt DB gt MASTERIHVACCATA CATA 7002 0 0 unset lt DB gt MASTER MDSDICT DICT 7323 00 unset J Sort By Name v Filter Refresh Clear Selection Make selected databases primary at Name Location Id Connection Administered By Description lt LOC gt Hub PROJECTHUB HUB On Adm LOCAL unset lt LOC gt Cambridge CAM On Adm LOCAL unset 7 3 3 Creation of an Event without Times The Update event form will now allow the creation of an event without times to run scripts at the remote location To do this create an update event at the current location with the Frequency text box left blank and the Transfer Scripts text boxes filled in When an update occurs between A and B the scripts will be run at B The arguments will be reversed B A For details please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide Section 4 12 Creating Update Events wrt Transfer Scripts 7 3 4 Remote File Details in Admin When querying remote file details at different locations to compare them the results for the different queries are av
140. Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 153 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 22 FEM World for idealised and FE Models Description A new top level element FEMWLD for FEM related items has been introduced The FEM world can contain idealised blocks HIBLO idealised plane HIPAN and curved panels HICPAN FE models FEMODL and FE images FEMIMG Ey APPLDW 1 Ea APPLDW2 G Ba FEMWWLD FEMWLD NA Eg FEMIMG _FGBH NA ba FEMIMG _FGSH E NA Ey HIBLO M NAB HIPAN 11_DBLOCK1 DECK13900 NAB HIBLOH_R a FEMODLH_FEM BLOCK PBLOCKS BLOCK PBLOCK BLOCK PBLOCKB Idealised plane panels are now drawn inthe 3D canvas according to the applied idealisation settings no thickness stiffeners as lines Corres Sloe Q SH PDE E 2 YY36X 39Z Parallel Model Zoomrect It is also possible to draw FE images in the 3D canvas for inspection purposes example contains shell and beam image Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 154 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin a x a a bd j f i i 3 Y36X 39Z Parallel Model Zoomrect Benefits All FEM related items can be found in one place Compatibility Constraints Before running new idealisations in 12 1 a FEMWLD element needs to be created in a design database It is recommen
141. L to use the APIs from AVEVA Marine Drafting as soon as possible Benefits A Marine Drafting 12 1 license is sufficient to be able to create hull views using the Marine NET API Compatibility Constraints The APIs have been marked as obsolete in the AVEVA Marine Design namespace They will continue to be available in this namespace in 12 1 but they will be removed ina future release When using the APIs from the AVEVA Marine Design namespace you will get a warning when building a C solution For More Information See User Guide Customisation NET Customisation Hull and Marine Drafting Net API Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 344 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 75 Removing Default Variables Description A number of default variables used in earlier releases of Drafting but not in Hull Drafting 12 0 Marine Drafting 12 1 have been removed to avoid unnecessary confusion The obsolete default variables that have been removed are listed below Tribon M3 Outfitting has been replaced by AVEVA Outfitting so the following default variables are no longer valid e FLOW_UNIT_SYSTEM e IMPEDANCE_UNIT_SYSTEM e INDUCTANCE_UNIT_SYSTEM e LUMINANCE_UNIT_SYSTEM e PDILSTRUCTURE_VRML e PDITRANS_STRUCTURE e PRESSURE_DROP_UNIT_SYSTEM e STRUCT_COMP_CODE_DET e STRUCT_COMP_CODE_DRAW e STRUCT_COMP_VOLUME_COLOUR e STRUCT_KEEP_INSERT_OBJ e STRUCT_KE
142. LD2 Fa CSURPX RHRN_PX En CSURPX HULL_PX gt Cplates Cprofs H Cseams 1465 Ccurves Benefits Easier to find information Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 258 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 3 Colour Coding of Curved Plates 12 1 SP4 Description Curved plates are colour coded when drawn in the 2D canvas The coding is based on if the plates are assigned to a panel or not e Plates not belonging toa panel are coloured blue e Plates belonging to a panel are coloured green the panel colour Benefits Visual check made possible Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 259 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 4 Presenting Welds in Model and Symbolic Views 12 1 SP4 Description Welds calculated and stored using Weld Planning are now possible to draw and identify in model and symbolic views Once added to a symbolic view welds are possible to switch on and off using the View Properties function Benefits The addition has made it easier to put annotation on weld and it also allows for more automatic drawing production Compatibility Constraints None For More Inform
143. LI USEC and UDEF are no longer used they will be removed from the database in due course 2 12 2 Units in Hull and Drafting In AVEVA Marine Hull and Marine Drafting applications the set up for Units differs from the Units setup in Outfitting Presentation format for Units in Hull and Drafting can be set to Sl or Imperial SI units are default The format for Sl and Imperial respectively can be further controlled by a set of environment variables and default variables For details on the Units usage in Hull and Drafting please see the following chapters in the AVEVA Marine User Documentation 1 Hull Basic Features and Concepts gt Basic Features gt Imperial Units Syntax Description 2 Marine Drafting gt Drafting gt User Guide gt Appendices gt Drafting default file keywords gt Unit codes 3 Marine Drafting gt Drafting gt User Guide gt Appendices gt Drafting default file keywords gt Unit system 4 Hull Initial Design gt Lines Users Guide gt Technical reference gt Conventions gt Units Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 11 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Unit Controlled Dimensions in Hull and Drafting The dimensions that can be unit controlled in Hull and Marine Drafting are shown in the table below Core units are independent of the Unit settings and are the same for Hull and Outfitting data Coordinate Linear measure Area Volume Weight Presentati
144. Ltd 113 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 19 Increased Number of Surfaces Description The number of surfaces to be used in the Hull system is limited With the possibility to add parametric surfaces the limit of 100 is easily reached To be able to add and handle more surfaces the limit has been increased to 1000 This affects the Hull default keyword SURFACES where the surface numbers tobe used in Create View are listed Benefits More surfaces can be handled Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Marine Planar and Curved Hull Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 114 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 AVEVA Surface Manager Description Surface Manager is a new module that allows transfer import export of surfaces from to external systems by the use of neutral standards It also offers tools for the assessment of the quality of the imported surface and if needed can repair selected defects detected in the surface coming from 3 party Surface Manager requires a specific license Benefits Key features are e Import surfaces into AVEVA Marine projects e Graphically displays the layout of the surface e Finds problem areas and shows them graphically e f possible optimises the surface by removing problem areas e Extract curves for use in Hull Design e Extracts surfaces from existing AVEVA Marine projects e Exports surfaces to fi
145. Ltd 230 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 63 Function to Find and Remove Dangling MANU Parts Description When a panel planar or curved is removed from the model any corresponding production parts are automatically removed If this e g due to a restricted database access cannot be done the result will be dangling plate and profile parts which should not be manufactured A PML function has been developed to clean up the database and take care of this situation The function searches for elements of type MPLATE MPROF and MBPRO and removes all those for which a corresponding panel does not exist The function hullDeleteUnrefMANUParts can be found in the installation directory under PMLLIB hulldesign functions Benefits The risk of manufacturing unnecessary parts and thus increasing production cost is reduced The function does not need any parameters when called and is quite easy to use All parts to be removed will be found automatically which is more efficient than searching for them manually Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 231 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 64 Enhancement in Dialogue for Automatic Position Number Definition Description The automatic definition of position numbers is controlled by an Autopos control object with different cases for position number d
146. M which have been supported in previous releases Units that are case sensitive are m s g t K h Pa N V A F Sv d J W C S H T W P G i e metre second gram tonne Kelvin hour pascal Newton volt ampere farad sievert day joule watt coulomb Siemens henry tesla watt poise gforce SI prefixes are also case sensitive for example m means milli and M mega except in their full form e g MILLI and MEGA are both accepted The table overleaf shows the new units of measure and the options available as well as the old ones BORE DIST SQDI CUDI It gives their name or description recognised by the system the assigned hash code the database storage units and the supported standard units for the quantity For example attributes of length have a hash code of DIST are stored in mm and other standard units include inch cm ft metre etc Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 18 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Database other specific units units pascal bar atm PSI torr mmHg Pressure may be inHg absolute or gauge m s2 gforce gravity degree radian grade arcmin arcsec rpm Nms mm2 acre hectare in Range limited to mm and inch and Finch coulomb semens S mms USDollar UKPound Euro ampere g m3 kg mm3 Densities stored in MANU database Name of Dimension HashCode Word Acceleration ane ANGL Angular Frequency ANG angularMiomentum ANGM aea S
147. MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 BENDING_MACHINE2 Report Options Show Pipe System Save in File Production Checks Cc AVEVAlplant P DMS12 0 SP5 pdmsuser fab Machine NC Report txt Browse Fabrication Machine Manager Bending Machine NC Output Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd Create Report AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Reference Data Reference Data Reference Data Mass Properties gt Mass Properties gt Mass Properties Pipework Pipework Pipework Pipe Splitting Pipe Splitting Pipe Splitting Pipe Assemblies Pipe Assemblies Pipe Assemblies Pipe Isometric Pipe Isometric Pipe Isometric System Isometric System Isometric System Isometric Show Pipe System Show Pipe System Show Pipe System Production Checks Production Checks Production Checks Fabrication Machine Manager Fabrication Machine Manager Fabrication Machine Manager Pipe Router Pipe Router Pipe Router Pipe Penetration b Pipe Penetration gt Pipe Penetration gt This enables you to search for bent pipe pieces filter them and then create a report 26 3 8 Improved production checks The Pipe Production Checks can now use a user defined pipe stock length as we
148. MARINE AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting Release 12 1 service Pack 4 User Bulletin Wwww aveva com Disclaimer 1 1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted error free or free from viruses 1 2 AVEVA shall not be liable for loss of profits loss of business depletion of goodwill and or s imilar losses loss of anticipated savings loss of goods loss of contract loss of use loss or corruption of data or information any special indirect consequential or pure economic loss costs damages charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly or arise in contract tort including negligence or otherwise 1 3 AVEVA shall have no liability in contract tort including negligence or otherwise arising in connection with the performance of the AVEVA software where the faulty performance of the AVEVA software results from a user s modification of the AVEVA software User s rights to modify the AVEVA software are strictly limited to those set outin the Customisation Manual 1 4 AVEVA shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party s intellectual property rights where such breach results from a user s modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation 1 5 AVEVA total lia
149. MPLATE to the thickness of the bending templates If the thickness is greater then zero cutouts are generated for bending templates at intersections with other bending templates Benefits End users have the ability to configure how the resulting templates should be produced No manual work needed to create cutouts to be able to fit cross bending templates together Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Curved Plates Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Cross Bending Templates Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 192 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 33 Bent Plates in PPM 12 1 SP3 Description In the Production Preparation Model PPM it is now possible also to transfer bent plates The plate will be recognised as a bent plate if the attribute PURPOSE is set to BPLT The attribute DESPARAM should contain the plate thickness Knuckled panels will be created in the DESI database for the transferred bent plates Benefits A more complete Outfitting Steel model can be transferred to Hull Production Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design PPM for Outfit Steel Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detailed Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 193 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 34 Labelled Texts and Symbols 12 1 SP3 Description In the
150. Modify Delete Wi Weld Spool Break Spool Break PA Spool Break PL eS New options have been added to the Spooler Create menu to allow Spool Breaks tobe added at the arrive or leave ppoint of the current component This provides an alternate method of defining Spool Breaks to the Create Spool Break GUI interface and removes the possibility of inadvertently creating single component spools Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 461 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 3 4 New Dependent Spool Drawings Frame 12 1 SP3 Pele CE IP 34585 F01 Status Pulled Bend amp Tube numbers wil be updated m Update Choice Handling Use first available data C Always generate new data Manual data selection m Dependent Spool Drawings Align y A Dependent Spool Drawings frame has been added to the Spooler Update Number Spool Drawing form in order to allow an update to be performed without affecting any dependent Spool Drawings The Align checkbox should be checked if the update is to align dependent Spool Drawings The checkbox replaces the Need to align dependent spool drawing OK to continue message A newly created Spool Drawing will now have its SFLIMIT attribute setto PIPE rather than WORLD by default 26 3 5 Sloping piping The data structure for piping includes two new concepts for better handling of slopes or falls e An adaptive or wobbly P
151. OD Bore Capacitance Charge Conductance COND Contem Pan currency current ___ _ s Density DensityMANDB MAND ElectricConductivity CNDT ElectricField farad x rA lt 3 Si m V m2 mooo Energy kiloWatthour em OOOO newton poundal dme ker b o e Zoo o EE a rEnereyDensity o Fore m2 K W FoulingFactor FAC REQ hertz pascal bar atm PSI torr mmHg Pressure be inHg absolute or gauge 8 GaugePressure HeatCa pacity HeatingValue Om x m oln n n m m ololol lalolo BLY SI gt gt i gt s SlalE S sla Siele S S S elS s 3 S Z a A NO G lt DID A a HeatTransferCoeff HTRA W m2 K Impedance ime form matane mou heny Kinematicviscosity wis ms o millimetre m in ft cm km mile yard micron thou angstrom TinearDensity mmr MagFluxDensity v oO o F 5 n 4 fesia Magneticrlux Mex weer SSCS O Ts Pr SE y y ee PF fp y y O Mass MASS kilogram gram tonne pound oz MassFlow mro fkes o o CLL MOME O DOO y y 3 Pp Pp y y O EE Pp y y p O Doo y y as eee m MagFieldintensity MFIN k Permeability PMBT F m h pascal SSCS seven raddvemaray Permitivty PMT Pressure RadiationDose i Resistivity Pohm m Rotationalstifiness STFR N m rad HCP SpecificEnergy Speed Cd Pm s TIF Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 19 m m z B S S mis m o akja nS AVEVA Marine
152. P2 Improved Copy paste Capability 12 1 SP2 Diagram Change Highlighting Connection between Instrument and Process Items Automatic Upgrade of Options Settings Files Admin Settings vs User Settings Handling of Units in Annotations Publish Diagrams Data to AVEVA NET Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 356 357 357 357 359 359 360 361 363 367 369 370 375 376 376 376 376 376 378 379 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 391 392 393 394 396 397 398 399 401 xi AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 21 Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority 402 23 22 Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer 403 23 23 Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority 404 23 24 Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer 406 23 25 Split Merge for SCBRAN 408 23 26 Setting SCVALV GTYP to INST rather than VALV 410 23 27 Changes to Upgrade Drawing Functionality 415 23 28 Linked Files Update 417 23 29 Possibility to Determine Connector Re route Style 418 23 30 Default Value of the Stencil in Batch Job 420 23 31 Auto Hide Option for Shape Text for Short Connectors 422 23 32 Miscellaneous Minor Improvements 424 24 AVEVA Engineering 425 24 1 Project Breakdown Structure PBS 12 1 SP4 425 24 2 DateTime Data Type 12 1 SP4 427 24 3 Icons for Linked Items and Documents 12 1 SP4 429 24 4 Sublists for Reference Attributes in Engineering 12 1 SP4 430 24 5 Datasheets
153. P3 must not be applied on the project 2 3 Upgrade Overview A number of the enhancements made at Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 require an upgrade to the database Each of these individual changes is referred to as a Part Upgrade In general each of these has been Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin designed to be optional from a customer perspective in that the 12 1 software can work with a database that has not been upgraded and the software will degrade gracefully that is the software will continue to work although some new functions may not be available This means that it is possible for customers to continue to work with Foreign DBs which may be shared with 12 0 or earlier projects and which have not been upgraded included in their projects An example would be a Corporate Catalogue DB used for 12 0 and multiple projects Databases which have not been upgraded will however be read only The following warning will appear when opening an MDB from a project that has not been upgraded warmina x There are databases with an upgrade number that does not correspond to the upgrade number of this software 12010103 There are 2 databases that are not upgraded to current version They are opened as read only This warning or similar indicates that the project needs to be upgraded to the latest version in order to allow write access All the Part Upgrades will be run b
154. P4 User Bulletin 10 7 Lines Macro Editor in PACE Description The Lines macro editor is now available in PACE and can be used in a similar fashion as in Lines Recording of macros however should be avoided as not all PACE actions will generate corresponding macro commands Benefits There is now a possibility to run macros without interaction without having to switch to Lines Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 72 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 8 Lines Clines Project Limits PMB and Mid Ships Description Cline projection limits have been extended to include a general Midbody limit In this way giving e g the upper limit as Midbody a pline would stop at either the FOS FOB or PMB Aft curve whichever is the aft most point Create New Curve Planar Non Planar Points Non Planar Projected Design Curve Cline Source Type Pine v Bising a10 v Name Al10 Free hand Projection Options Direction Interpolation Limits Sections Lower None w m Waterines im C Buttocks Benefits The parallel surface limit can be automatically set for curves which has a Cline as source Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted her Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year
155. Penetrated To emphasise the penetrated items selected in the associations list check the Translucent Penetrated box 26 6 Penetration with Piping Component This new pipe penetration function enables a component such as a watertight bulkhead seal modelled as a COUP to be positioned on either side of the plate being penetrated It can cope with cases where the penetrating pipe is not orthogonal to the plate The component can be shown on pipe sketches and isometrics Isodraft has been modified to add a new SKEY CPCF and a penetration seal symbol Please see section 26 11 7 Full details are given in the Common Functionality User Guide Chapter 4 Catalogue Requirements are given in Section 4 2 13 Project Configuration for Hole Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 472 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 6 1 Creation of Penetration Normally a penetration ATTA element is created on the pipe to mark the location of a penetration It is possible to put a pipe component representing a sleeve or penetration seal at the penetration if the piping catalogue is suitably configured Pipe penetration components are modelled as COUP elements When a penetration component is required select From Pipe Spec in the Specification pull down and select Marker Type COUP Specification From Pipe Spec v Marker Type COUP v The CHOOSE form is displayed showing the couplings available from the pipin
156. Property function Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Properties and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Properties Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 144 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 13 Pick Option Added in RSO Edit Description An option to pick limiting RSOs has been added in the function RSO Edit The dialogue is presented with new command buttons which will hide the dialogue and ask the user to pick an RSO in the current drawing The command buttons are enabled when the function RSO Edit is activated from the RSO menu or when right clicking a RSO but disabled when the function is activated from the RSO Property function Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Properties and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Properties Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Cop
157. SCSTENCIL Gi SCGROU TesiDR F Equip 01 SCEQUIPMENT igp SCGROU TEST2 Z SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH A1A 01 10mmA B 2 SCSEGMENT mE SCGROU TEST EEF SCGROU Project_Templates E F SCGROU Project_Stenciis GG SCGROU Piping Diagrams SCGROU HVAC Disgrams SCGROU Marine Equipment H E SCGROU Marine Piping EE SCGROU 11 H E SCGROU Electrical Diagrams 7 ucenceta SCGROU SCHEMATICS PIPING A xX H E SCGROU Project_Templates H E SCGROU Project_Stencils H E SCGROU Project_Stenciis_DIN z x Export lt m DGN Export Settings loaded from path E AVEVA Marine Projects 12 1 SP3 Marimardf Current Line SP DRO7C 03 100mmA Session defaults Benefits e Allows Engineering items to be copied between projects including Datasheets and all attributes e Allows one or many complete diagrams tobe copied together with all related schematics data Individual Schematic items can be copied but the shape references need to be ona whole diagram e Saved transfer sets the data can be saved moved between machines emailed and copied between different locations e Works between different projects e Automatically resolves dependencies and referred items Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Diagrams Utilities Design Reuse Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams AVEVA Engineering Copyright 1974 t
158. Solutions Ltd 421 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 31 Auto Hide Option for Shape Text for Short Connectors Description Two new options have been introduced to keep diagrams nice and clean where text will be displayed on connectors only when some criteria are met The options described below are valid for pipelines instrument lines and HVAC lines e Auto hide text by leg length This option allows to determine a minimum size for the tallest connector leg where text will be visible If the tallest leg of a connector will be shorter than the default then the text will be automatically hidden and the system will notify about this in the System Message Log It is possible to use metric as well as imperial units to determine the distance value To disable this option set it to 0 or just use blank Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation SQ General options System configuration Settings stored in drawing Annotation settings Pipe Dimensioning Instrumentation Dimensioning HVAC Dimensioning Dialogues Catalogue search settings Auto formatting rules options 3 Sy Element options gt Valve options Inline instrument options Fitting options Pipe destination options A E Shape text options Text Offset longitudinal reference Offset longitudinal Offset perpendicular reference Offset perpendicular Text colour Font Show Text on first segment only Annotations for first segment only Auto hide text by
159. Supports Roaming Profiles 12 1 SP4 Description Initial Design projects can now be used with roaming profiles and more clearly shared between users The data is now stored in the local and roaming application data folders for each user Two new top nodes have been added to the tree view to reflect this Local and Shared Projects created under a shared node are available to a user with a roaming profile regardless of the machine logged in to Benefits It will now be possible to use project definition data regardless of the machine logged into when using roaming profiles Project definitions can be shared between users Compatibility Constraints None The first time the project tool is started the information stored in the old format will be read and transferred to the new Local node in the projects tree After this the old format will only be read by previous versions of the project tool For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA lnitial Design applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 66 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 3 Sorting points in PACE 12 1 SP3 Description Previously the only method of sorting points in a curve in PACE was to select them in the data points grid It is now possible to sort a group of selected points in the graphical window via a popup menu Sort in X Sort in Y gt Ascending Sort in selection Descending
160. The layout of Create Modify database form is now improved All propagation flags are now in a frame Propagation flags have been added in a frame to the Create Extract form but are only active if the extract is being created at the Hub from a local database The layout of Create Extract form has also been improved and Working extracts have been removed from the list of possible owning databases Attached are screen shots of the new forms in both Global and standalone projects A Hub user can now specify Propagation flags for Linked documents or Neutral format files when creating a local extract database For satellite extracts these settings will be inherited from the owning database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 490 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 27 3 Global WCF This option was introduced with Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 SP6 6 to improve the security of all Global communications It is an alternative to the use of RPC which has been used in previous versions of Global It provides an interface to the Windows Communication Foundation WCF as an alternative to Remote Procedure Calls RPC for network communications As a result Global can now exploit the security configurations provided by WCF which is enabled and configured by modifying values in XML configuration files The following security benefits are now available e Transport Layer o Apply security to either the connection ideal for conne
161. User Guide Hull Detailed Design PPM for Outfit Steel Production Features for Outfit Steel Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 158 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 2 Drag and Drop from Manu Explorer 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to drag and drop manufacturing items from the Manu Explorer into the 2D Canvas Benefits The result from the plate part generation can easily be checked Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 159 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 3 Manufacturing Objects Presented in 3D Canvas 12 1 SP4 Description Jig Pillar and Bending Template objects can now be drawn and be inspected in the 3D canvas The objects can be dragged from the manufacturing explorer and dropped into the 3D canvas The Jig Pillar and Bending Template objects are drawn in the coordinate system of the involved curved plates or panels Benefits The possibilities to visualize and inspect the produced manufacturing data have been improved Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current
162. VA applications and cached data is shared by relevant AVEVA Marine applications and users running on that machine If the Cache Service is installed and running applications will connect to the Cache Service and all data that is read across the network will be cached locally for the next access However the projects that are already stored on a local disk will not be cached In AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP3 and subsequent releases of AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP3 the Hull Design Outfitting Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules are able to use the Cache Service Using the Cache Service is optional and if it is not active then database access is via the network file system as usual 9 1 1 Making Use of the Cache If the Cache Service is installed and running applications will connect to the Cache Service and all data that is read across the network will be cached locally for the next access For More Information See AVEVA Marine Software Installation Guide Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 51 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 2 Expanded Selvol Graph 12 1 SP3 It is now possible to collect elements that fully encloses a physical volume using the keyword enclosing in the same way as the keyword within This will for example allow collections of spaces that a specific equipment is located in It is also possible to use the within syntax with both the keywords exactly and exclusive at the same time For more informatio
163. View F Reset Cell Feedback 2 are Refresh bessien Bi Open A Paste X Delete GE Auto Size Columns al Quick Report i aeea aA Main Project List mid Manage Lists and Schedules Clipboard Grid Actions Find 300LB RF ANSI B16 5 300LB RF ANSI B16 5 2008RF ANSI B16 5 300 RF ANSI B16 5 300 RF ANSI B16 5 300LB RF ANSI B16 5 300 RF ANSI B16 5 300LB RF ANSI B16 5 300LB RF ANSI B16 5 150LB RF ANSI B16 5 M ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 ANSI B16 5 PREEEEE E t For full details of this important new module please see the AVEVA Tags User Guide 24 8 1 Admin Tab The Tags module includes a new concept for administration There is an Admin tab in the ribbon bar which is only available for users that are e Free users Like SYSTEM Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 438 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Members of the TAGSADMIN team Allocating users to the TAGSADMIN team allows superusers or department managers to perform certain admin tasks in Tags engineering without them having to be free users 24 8 2 Tag Deletion In the new Tags module data for a single tag can be distributed over multiple databases to allow for different disciplines possibly operating in different locations For any tag the data for each discipline is stored on a separate object
164. WCF interface name has changed from that in 12 0 SP6 This affects the Global WCF client and server Configuration files The purpose of this is to force an interface change between 12 0 SP6 and 12 1 as the databases are not compatible Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 491 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The name has changed from the unversioned name used in 12 0 SP6 This is reflected in the endpoint definition within the configuration files GLobalWcfClient config and admindWCF exe config The Endpoint has changed from GlobalWcfServiceLib GlobalWcfService to GlobalWcfServiceLib GlobalWcfService_11 1 201011 As a result the WSDL file is now renamed from aveva globalservice wsdl to aveva globalservice 11 1 2010 11 wsdl The service contract is now pa IGlobalWcfService 11 1 20101 The Endpoint has changed from GlobalWcfServiceLib GlobalWcfService to GlobalWcfServiceLib GlobalWcfService_11 1 201011 The sample configuration files provided with Global 12 1 contain the new versioned names however if you wish to carry the 12 0 SP6 WCF configuration files forward to 12 1 you will need to change the references above in both the GLobalWcfClient config andadmindWCF exe config configuration files 27 6 ADUUID Attribute Length This attribute provides a UUID Universal Unique Identifier for the Global d
165. World STYLWL is added to an MDB that already has a STYLWL it is possible for duplication of numbers to occur At Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 itis the later of the duplicates in database order within the MDB that has precedence when a Style of a given number is used This is opposite to the case of duplicate names where it has always been the first that has precedence At Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 this has been changed to ensure consistency of behaviour between duplicate styles and names When an MDB contains Styles with duplicate Style Numbers it is the first in database order within the MDB that will be used when that Style Number is used to draw graphical elements 20 3 Line Widths Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 has been enhanced to allow accurate line widths to be output in all output formats The definitions of the system line styles are held in the System database and set up in the Admin module using Line style Width Definition elements LSWIDDEFINITION in a new Line style World Element LINESTYLEWORLD The upgrade from Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 to 12 1 can do this or Hull amp Outfitting can be left to use its default values The AVEVA sample projects are provided with this hierarchy and new projects will also be created with it present Full details are given in the various Draft User Manuals and the Administrator User Guide 20 4System Defined Line Styles Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 352 AVEVA Mar
166. Y Home Manage View Admin 9 e Mechanical v al Manage e RZ New Ag Expl a Copy Edit moas Datasheei plore lt pz i atashee Mech Tags DS ay Open iA Paste X Delete Database Lists and Schedules Clipboard Records Datasheet Mech Tags Mech Tags DSX E Datasheet Diagram 3DObject H Linked Docume Test Temp de 0 Z EA D 0 oon Ea amp 0 108 00 a EA amp 108 00 EA D 0 Ea amp v D Ea amp Y a amp Benefits Better visibility of linked items in lists Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Tags Create and Manage Lists Affected Programs AVEVA Engineering Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 429 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 4Sublists for Reference Attributes in Engineering 12 1 SP4 Description Now possible to have Sublists for items referenced from main list or referring to main list For example the From and To of a Line List might refer to other Lines or Equipment these referenced items can now be shown as sublists Other sublist examples could include Loops Instruments Catalogue Systems Streams Fluids etc It is also possible to create new items in the sublist depending on user access rights Reference attributes will be updated accordingly a FLEET EIE Tags AVEVA Engineering Project SAM ET Home
167. a Autotagging 12 1 SP4 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 itis now possible to delete labels created via autotagging No warning will be given Please be aware of that an update autotagging command will bring the label back Also note that deleting autotag generated labels in old drawings will not work these labels are still marked as undeletable in the Marine drawing To make them possible to delete You have to rerun the autotagging command Benefits Possible to delete labels created via autotagging Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 266 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 9 Dynamic Highlighting when Inserting Parallel Curve 12 1 SP4 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 dynamic highlighting has been introduced in the function Insert Parallel Curve This means that the resulting curve will be highlighted dynamically as the user moves the cursor for identification or pass through point Benefits Improved user interface The resulting curve is previewed Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 267 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 10 New Style Dialogs 12 1 SP4 D
168. a for a surface The following is presented for a surface of which some are given as input length between perpendiculars breadth draft displacement LCB VCB block coefficient midship section area midship section area coefficient waterplane area LCF prismatic coefficient waterplane coefficient Surface Manager Untitled ioj x A File Edit View Tools Window Help l x O amp M e8 lole gt 16 Workspace Untitled Hull Surfaces J MAR Sy Primitives AEEA Prim001 Primitive Assemblies f k Hydrostatic Parameters F Ship partiduars AP at x pos 0 LPP 190000 Beam 32716 f Draft amp Shell thickness Draft 11000 Shell thickness fe Waterplane area LCF Calculate Cancel Benefits Allow checking of a hull surface hydrostatics properties Compatibility constraints None For more information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Surface Manager Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 120 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 3 Difference Between two Surfaces 12 1 SP2 Description It is now possible to compare two surfaces by creating sample points on one and comparing them to the other directly within in the surface manager The surface manager now also displays the difference between the sample points and the surface graphically This is done by representing each differ
169. abase The new Scope by Destination provides the capability to verify the objects in the user s current scope of work This can be the current drawlist in Design or Outfitting the current diagram view in Diagrams or Schematic Model Manager or the current list in Tags If a graphical selection has been made in the 3D view diagram view or list then the scope is further reduced to those objects that have been selected The scope can also be the Current Element Compare Update will report any objects that are not present in the source database and any differences on those objects for which a match has been found The user can then choose which objects to update automatically copying over attribute data Note that Compare Update will not carry out object deletions but the comparison results can be used to trigger a manual process Depending on where invoked these options are available directly from the Compare Update button or menu entry as shown here for Tags from the Manage tab 3 Excel Import Wizard 38 Excel Export Wizard Compare Update Link 23 Pot Export prt Open p Compare Current List x E x a mia Press Open to open the Compare Update tab or dialogue in Scope by Source mode Press Compare Current List to compare all objects in the current list and similarly for current graphical view Press Compare Current Selection to compare those objects that have been selected in the list or graphical view From wi
170. abels Above all the user interface is completely new and offers a whole new experience when working with labels Some of the new features are Support for symbolic templates you can now create labels based on symbolic template which can be much more advanced that the general labels Much fewer clicks to create labels you will now start by selecting all properties of the label You can then place this label for many models Better support for intelligent texts it is now possible for the system administrator to create a predefined set of intelligent texts with descriptions The user can then select from this list and does not need to know how to form the expressions Move the leader line start position for existing labels created manually or via autotagging you can now modify the leader line start position with the new function Modify 1Label Leader line start Label placement There is a new function Modify 1Label Placement which can be used for intelligent placement of a selection of labels The labels can be spread with remote placement or local placement with a number of options Delete labels created by autotagging The function Edit DeleteLabel will now allow you to delete also labels created via autotagging Please note that this only works if you have run autotagging in 12 1 SP4 Benefits Labels can now be created in an easy and efficient way Compatibility Constraint
171. ables support Unicode values You can use Unicode characters in PML variable names PML object form Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 16 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin and gadget names PML method and function names It is recommended that PML language files should either be UTF 8 format with a BOM present or else strictly ASCII basic Latin format AVEVA application appware files are mostly ASCII at present Filenames and directory names can also contain foreign Unicode characters but may cause problems in other systems so it is recommended to keep to ASCII names This applies to some of the systems to which Hull amp Outfitting is interfaced and even to some of the interfaces where the system makes use of third party software such as output of DXF and DGN PML Publisher does not currently fully support Unicode filenames AVEVA has also encountered problems using files with non ASCII names in some development tools 4 2 4 Using Forms and Menus The default system font used by Forms and Menus F amp M is Arial Unicode MS which contains a large number of the world s alphabets Internally F amp M uses Unicode but can only display the characters accessible in its current system font You will be able to copy and paste Unicode characters from and to textual fields of F amp M gadgets This includes entering characters into the Hull amp Outfitting command window 4 2 5 Using TTY Mode You can enter Un
172. added on the Format to Assign tab in the Auto Formatting Rule Details window Name new rule Description rere Shape Selection Criteria Format to Assign Rule Options Format type Fill colour Fill pattern Fill pattern colour Fill transparency Layer Text font Text size Text colour Text style Text transparency Add line jumps v Line jumps style Gap C Clear auto formatting e Add line jumps the setting allows to specify the behaviour of the line when crossing another line shape It can be selected from a list of standard values Add line jumps Always to other v As page specifies Never Always a to other e Line jumps style allows to specify the style of jump if the line is the one which should break It also can be selected from a list Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 404 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Line jumps style The new settings together allow specifying behaviour of crossing lines depending on defined conditions If the settings are applied properly by rule the result is visible on the drawing and also appropriate values are shown for particular shapes on the tab in the Visio Format gt Behaviour dialog Behavior Behavior Double Click Connector Placement Line routing Preview Style Page Default Direction Reroute On Crossover Appearance Page
173. aemon It is a string of hexadecimal values for example 92e2714e 0a85 42b0 9d6a 100905aeffc0 Global will not work if this attribute does not contain a valid UUID While reviewing all text attributes for Unicode this one has been shortened to 40 characters the former length of 120 characters is far longer than the maximum possible value Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 492 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 28 AVEVA Catalogue amp Specifications A number of improvements have been made to the PARAGON module The most significant are listed below 28 1 Model Settings The Model Settings form has been updated The most significant change is to allow the alteration of catalogue parameters only Model Settings Parameter Settings 100000 0000 Catalogue Parameters 150 0mm Pressure 0 0000 Insu Unset Design Component Settings Design Angle 190 0000 Design Height 100 0mm Design Radius 225 0mm Model View Settings Update Catalogue Parameters Model settings can be altered by the Model View form as well as by the Model Settings form In addition to changing the catalogue parameters the Model View from may change other parameters based on a category s data set For example if the data set includes properties that define design parameters those design parameters in the model settings are set to the default property values from the data set If the Only Updat
174. ail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 188 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 30 Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design 12 1 SP3 Description The Reporting add in is now available for productive use in AVEVA Marine Hull Design Any available report can be run directly from the Tools menu The same menu also gives access to the report designer which allows creation of new reports or modification of existing ones Quick reports can be generated by right clicking in the search results of the search utility A report may include any content which is exposed as an element or attribute in the database as well as graphical elements lines images etc The reporting tool is very powerful and allows data to be sorted grouped and summarised as desired The graphical layout can be fully customisable and generated reports may be saved to text files or other common formats such as PDF or HTML Additional functionality may be added by using calculated expressions or code in e g C that runs when the report is being generated As a part of the integration of the reporting tool in Hull Design a number of new attributes have been added mostly on elements in the MANU database Some of these allow better possibilities to use PML expressions to collect information from several related elements such as a nest and plates that are nested on it Obviously there are many advantages in upgrading existing customised repo
175. ailable Each press of the Apply button appends the results to the list on the right of the form This means you can choose different locations and see the information for selected databases together in the list Press the Clear button to empty the results list Results can be stored in a file by pressing the Save Report button which will display a file browser for you to save the results into a text file For details please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide Satellite Commands filter for Transactions The Transactions form display can now be filtered so that only Global commands are listed Global commands are defined as those that take place via the Global daemon i e not locally For example an Extract claim made when an owning extract database is NOT at the same location For details please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 48 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 7 3 5 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions Forms that display details of a database session now also include the reason for that the session In particular the DB sessions form available from Query gt Project gt DB Sessions shows it thus DB Sessions Database List 5 A Display Previous Sessions 15 viv ADMIN ASLCONFIG i ADMIN NSEQ Search Date 31 m March vzo w ADMIN PADD E ADMIN UPADD ADMIN XPADD Session Number 395 ES CTBATEST DESI E bathoustey CTBATESTIISOD CTBATEST PADD 1 Date 8 41 2
176. al The new Report tool is available in Marine Drafting and Hull For the new functionality in Hull reporting see chapter 75 3 Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design in this bulletin and in the User Guides mentioned above 4 7 GML Performance There are further improvements to the Geometric Modelling software used in Hull amp Outfitting aimed particularly at speeding up the drawing of data imported using the new Mechanical Equipment Interface Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 25 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 Database changes 5 1 Project Breakdown Structure PBS 12 1 SP4 5 1 1 Overview The Project Breakdown Structure PBS allows the user to present database data in a user defined structure For example itis possible to present database items according to their system class etc A tree showing this data structure is generated at runtime An Administrator defines PBS hierarchies using Lexicon He may create more than one such data structure each starting from a root node called a PBS Template The PBS Explorer shows the structures thus defined as separate hierarchies The PBS is available in AVEVA Engineering and AVEVA Diagrams in version 12 1 SP4 but was designed as a general capability which could be in other Dabacon based products in future Future enhancements will probably include filtering searching and status control 5 1 2 Setting up the PBS definition in Lexicon The appearance of
177. al Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 142 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 11 Naming of Multiply Copied RSOs Description The naming of multiply copied RSOs is improved in the following way If name XXX is given as target name and multiple copies are requested then the copied RSOs are named XXX XXX1 XXX2 XXXn If name XXX10 is given as target name and multiple copies are requested then the copied RSOs are named XXX10 XXX11 XXX12 XXXn If name XXX10 10 is given as target name and multiple copies are requested then the copied RSOs are named XXX10 XXX20 XXX30 XXXn Benefits More accurate naming can be defined Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Copy Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 143 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 12 Pick Option Added in RSO Keyin Description An option to pick limiting RSOs has been added in the function RSO KeyIn The dialogue is presented with new command buttons which will hide the dialogue and ask the user to pick an RSO in the current drawing The command buttons are enabled when the function RSO Keyln is activated from the RSO menu or when right clicking a RSO but disabled when the function is activated from the RSO
178. al tems 22 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 477 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The example groups all clashes per branch and then clashes against the same obstruction This is a common useful grouping so there is an option to set the default presentation Clashes Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Reset System Defaults Tolerances Clash colours Touch Gap Major clash items brightred Overlap Obstruction items _ tomato Clearance View Background white Clash options Clashes Ignored Within Touches are included v C PIPE Cistru Clashes within branch are included v C BRAN O suss Connections are included v CO PTRA O FRMw C Clash midpoint position C HANG C SBFR OREST M SCTN Presentation OeEau M GENSEC 7 CWBRAN PLTFRM V Clash tem Aid Clash Obstruction Aid CPANEL Osie Clash Position Aid HPANEL Ozone Other options on this panel are covered by the standard DESCLASH defaults In addition to the DESCLASH options there are various other presentation defaults such as the View background colour and options to display aid constructs to in the 3D view Clash ltem TEE 15392 5666 Obstruction BOX 15392 9266 yr Clash Position E 11602 N 9949 U 6546 WRT By default each clash is displayed in a clipped view the clip box size can resized by direct input or a slider bar above the view o
179. an RSO the indicated RSO is recreated Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 141 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 10 RSO Rename Description A new function RSO Rename has been added which renames a RSO updates all panels located in the renamed RSO and updates all other RSOs that are topologically dependent of the renamed RSO All other topological dependences are currently not updated e g hull panels using the RSO as boundary limit needs to be manually updated The function is activated from the RSO menu when right clicking a RSO or as a right click menu option in the function RSO Property Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Space Management AVEVA Marine Structur
180. are Linked Sequence Difference SPRE BORE 3 Attributes Different Note Before a difference on a pair of objects can be accepted the objects must be linked If objects are not linked the match may not persist in subsequent sessions as it depends on data values and rules configuration If the pair of objects are matched but not linked right click in the Details tab and select the option to Link matched elements Navigate to SCFITT TEE 16385 1040 e Navigate to TEE 24578 1581 Connections Select for Linking Link matched elements SCFITT TEE 16385 1040 and TEE 24578 1581 Disable matching Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 371 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin If two objects have not been matched they will be reported on different rows to each other and may have been matched to other objects For example Integrator by default will not match an SCINST toa PCOM but if they have been modelled that way they can be linked to preserve the design intent Right click in the Details tab on one of the objects click on Select for Linking and then click on the required object Then right click on the other object and click to Link the required pair there may be more than one choice of link candidates After a redo of the comparison they will be lined up in the report The Accept Differences option in the right click menu will then be enabled To accept a difference on a pair of linked objects rig
181. arine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 28 Linked Files Update Description New ways to update linked objects in a diagram e Use Edit gt Links dialog When a drawing that contains linked objects is active then the Links option is active in the Edit menu This option is hidden when a drawing has no linked objects File Edit View Insert Format To 4 Undo Ctrl Z e Redo Ctrl Norn OW Repeat ctrl Lill y Copy Drawing g9 sa i Sche Wf Paste Paste Special Select All Select by Type GA Find Ctrl F Replace Go to gt e Use Update Diagrams in batch job File gt Batch Job This option allows the user to update linked objects in many drawings in one go Benefits Allows users to update and manage linked objects Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 417 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 29 Style Possibility to Determine Connector Re route Description It is possible to determine a connector re route style for newly created lines For HVAC Pipe and Instrument line types a special option called Reroute has been added This option allows the settings Never reroute or Use shape settings for newly created connector lines By default Never reroute is selected In case the Use shape se
182. ase note 19 1 New Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing Production ADP The DBUP command is extended with an additional qualifier OPTIONAL to apply an optional upgrade version E g DBUP PROJECT TO LATEST OPTIONAL The Q UPGRADE LIST is extended to give a short notice for upgrade versions that are optional E g Q UPGRADE LIST Db upgrade 12010301 Upgrades the database to 12 1 SP3 version 1 Optional upgrade version Benefits The benefit of an optional upgrade is that it is possible to choose whether to upgrade or not If you choose not to upgrade the 12 1 SP3 software will continue to operate with previous databases and share project data with previous software versions Compatibility Constraints As soon as a database is upgraded it is no longer compatible with 12 1 SP2 or earlier versions For More Information See User Guide Administration Database Upgrade Affected Programs All 2 8 Global and Extracts Each database must be entirely in either an upgraded or non upgraded state for Hull amp Outfitting to work correctly Therefore it is essential that all extracts of any database are processed during an upgrade The whole project excluding Foreign databases should be upgraded at once Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 2 9 The Upgrade Process The upgrade process will be undertaken by System Administrators responsible for the project at all locations When
183. ate AVEVA will no longer support its software running on XP A single 32 bit version of the Hull amp Outfitting system is available this is supported on both 32 and 64 bit versions of Windows 7 It is no longer supported on Windows 2000 indeed Microsoft no longer offers support for Windows 2000 or Windows XP SP2 Please note that User Account Control UAC introduces new security restrictions at Windows 7 In particular this makes it important to ensure that files that need to be written are accessible by users without Administrator privileges 3 3 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer Internet Explorer is required for the on line help system version 7 or 8 is recommended as version 9 does not currently work correctly Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 requires Microsofts NET Framework 3 5 which is supplied on the DVD and installed if required It should be noted that installation of version 3 5 brings with it several of the earlier versions on which it depends The updated version of NET used for Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 SP6 onwards may prevent NET add ins running if deployed on a network This will not usually cause an issue as AVEVA recommends a local installation on each machine but might cause problems for customers running their own add ins NET security can cause issues when running Hull amp Outfitting across the network where the add in assemblies reside on a different machine to the NET runtime The default security level for the l
184. ate and profile parts when running Plane Panel Parts Generation Profile parts will however only be marked on the moulded side By defining REFPLANE BOTH_SIDES in ppanparts ip profile parts will be marked on both sides of the profile web Benefits Increased marking possibilities Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts Set up of Program Set up of the IP file Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 217 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 55 Nest Profiles without Rest Description It will now be possible to nest profile parts on raw profiles without creating rest profiles To accomplish this do the following two steps e Define a raw profile with type and dimensions the same as the profile part that should be nested Define the length as zero e Insert the new keyword NEST_WITHOUT_REST YES in the general section of the profile restriction file as defined by SBH_PROF_RESTRICT Nesting will now be performed as if the length was the maximum length for the profile type When nesting is completed the length will be set to the exact length needed so that no rest part will be created Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup and Customisation Setup for Produ
185. ated to the material side generated by the value in the attribute DIST 2 e 100 149 contains points related to the mould plane The PPLS attribute returns a list of all valid PPoint indexes while the PPVI attribute returns the visible PPoint indexes In the case that DIST 1 or DIST 2 equals 0 0 i e coincides with the mould plane PPVI will not contain references to the mouldplane indexes Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull in Dabacon Hull Data in Dabacon Hull Geometry Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 99 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 7 Statement Wizard Enhancements 12 1 SP2 Description Some work has been put into making the statement wizard more efficient to work with The main areas of improvements are e Unify over all layout of data on tabs for all components e Make similar input the same for similar components e Remember entered data in an intelligent way e Graphical way of selecting which component to modify next Other enhancements are e Switching ends on a stiffener now also switches the bevel and excess values e Mandatory field markers do no longer flash They are also removed once a value has been entered and then performing an update or create operation Benefits The enhancements made to the statement wizard will make designers more productive by remembering en
186. ation Only noted here Affected Programs All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 260 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 5 Excess Line Type and Colour 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to set up line type and colour for limit lines which limit has excess of different types e g Erection or Assembly The line type and colour can be set in the keyword for the five excess types See below for an example of the default file EXC_TYPE_1 PANEL 80 CORAL SYSTEM26 EXC_TYPE_2 ASSEMBLY 83 PINK SYSTEM24 EXC_TYPE_3 ERECTION 84 ROYALBLUE SYS TEM27 A new default value DRAW_EXC_LINETYPE has been implemented The value controls if the line type and colour should be drawn or not This symbolic information can also be set visible invisible in the Display Option of Symbolic View Hull Properties JV Excess line colour Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 261 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Benefits A better visual drawing interpretation of the different types of excess on boundaries and seams in symbolic views Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions L
187. ation of Unnamed Elements Affected Programs This is a core change that affects all programs exploring hull data Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 57 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 8 New Storage Model for Hull Objects Description The underlying Hull objects i e OBJHD are stored in a more efficient way in the database Benefits Performance in terms of read write I O and less space consumed in the database I O reductions on up to 40 percent can be achieved Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See the upgrade documentation for details on how to optionally convert object into new storage model Affected Programs HullDesign HullDrafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 58 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 9 Hull Specific Design Explorer Configuration Description The Design Explorer is configured to expose an additional name for hull part nodes Beside the name derived from the FLNM attribute hull parts are presented by a second name derived from the PARNAM attribute If the environment variable MARINE_DESIGN_EXPLORER_PLAIN is assigned any value the additional name presentation is switched off Benefits None Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Outfitting Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 59 AVEVA Marin
188. awing Export Formats Description Marine Drafting can export a drawing to the following formats File Export e DXF e HPGL e HPGL 2 e IGES e SDB e SVG e TIFF with LZW compression The following formats have been removed e CGM e TIFF with PackBits compression Benefits Supporting both HPGL and HPGL 2 will make it easier for customer to interact with different 3rd party products TIFF with LZW compression offers better compression Compatibility Constraints The CGM format is no longer supported For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions File Export Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 310 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 45 Navigate To Description The context menu available in the 2D canvas of Marine Drafting Hull Design has been extended with a set of new Navigate to functions in Design Explorer in Draft Explorer in Drawing Explorer 5088 3312 0 The functions are useful to quickly find out what a selected graphical entity represents The functions will identify the closest entity in the drawing and navigate to the corresponding element in one of the explorers Draft Explorer Design Explorer or the Marine Drawing Explorer You will only see the effect of the function if the corresponding explorer is currently opened Benefits It will make
189. be used to derive data structures for a variety of purposes including the new reporting function The Excel Import Export functions also work with Database Views which are of particular importance in the integration of engineering schematic and design data 5 8 2 Distributed Attributes Distributed attributes enable the definition of objects that have groups of attributes distributed across databases currently restricted to the DESIgn and new ENGlneering database types This enables a number of new possibilities e Improved concurrency o Several users may work in parallel on an object using different sets of data o Simultaneous multi discipline updates on the same object are possible o Claims may be smaller only claiming the relevant portions of an object e Distribution of an object s attributes across hierarchies and databases o Easier distribution using Global o Reduced need for Global extracts Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 31 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Simplified access control o It may be sufficient to use database ownership by teams e Data may be included or excluded by database e Extensibility of data structures an alternative to direct use of UDETs and UDAs A binding element is used to achieve this it may bind any number of bound elements but these bound elements can only bind to one binding element The attributes defined on the bound elements are then available on the
190. bilityin contract tort including negligence or otherwise arising in connection with the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100 of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user s claim is brought 1 6 Clauses 1 1 to 1 5 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law 1 7 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the so ftware licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence Copyright Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software and every part of it including source code object code any data contained in it the manual and any other documentation supplied with it belongs to or is validly licensed by AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries The information contained in this document is commerciallysensitive and shall not be copied reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited Where such permission is granted itexpresslyrequires that this copyright notice and the above disclaimer is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made The manual and associated documentation maynotbe adapted reproduced or copied in any material or electronic form without the prior written permission o
191. binding element for both querying and manipulation Details of the configuration and use of distributed attributes can be found in the Database Management Reference Manual and Lexicon User Guide 5 8 3 Handling of Duplicated Names of UDAs and UDETs UDA keys now take into account database number to remove the possibility of conflicts between UDA names in different databases In previous versions this could occur when merging data from different projects or MDBs A new command in Lexicon allows a user to reallocate existing UKEY values to the new format for UDAs and UDETs They can operate on either a selection of UDAs and UDETs or all in the current MDB The old keys are stored in the attribute OLDKEY for reference Admin commands allow update of project data to use the new keys For details please refer to the Lexicon and Admin Command Reference Manuals 5 8 4 Top Level Element Creation in Specific Database It is now simpler to ensure that top level elements are created in a specific database a DB keyword and name can be added to the NEW command NEW element_type element_name DB database_name where element_name is also optional database_name is a full database name i e team database For example this command will create a new SITE named MYSITE in the MYTEAM MYDB database NEW SITE MYSITE DB MYTEAM MYDB 5 9 Dynamic Groups A PML1 collection expression evaluated whenever the g
192. ble matching including connected branch After a number of accept or reject operations redo the comparison to see the effect Ignoring MDS Trunnions Integrator automatically ignores MDS trunnions Trunnions are identified as any 3D branch with MDSTrun TRUE This means any trunnion defined in an application other than MDS can be handled in the same way by setting this UDA Four connection scenarios are handled e An MDS cross will be matched with a schematic tee e AnMDS reducer will be matched with a two way schematic reducer e An MDS elbow will be treated like a two way elbow and thus not significant for comparison e AnMDS set on tee will be ignored and thus not matched or treated as missing Note that differences in the SPREF attribute for an MDS cross or reducer will be ignored and will not be available to copy to 3D in the compare report Comparison Options Integrator has a new option which allows you to set whether accepted differences will be ignored i e reported as if the difference had not been accepted Comparison Options Ignore Accepted Differences V Strictly limit compare to selected elements Report unpositioned elements Compare Pipelines and Pipes without their member hierarchies Whole Diagram Compare Lines Equipment HVAC Z Cable 7 Offline Instruments Accepting Differences fromthe Command Line A set of methods provide command line access to the functionality fo
193. but presented as if on a single object It is thus possible to delete a tag but not have access to delete all of the distributed data and this can result in orphan objects remaining The Delete Tag Orphans pmlimac macro available from AVEVA Support Knowledge Base can be run in the Tags module to find and delete orphan objects Please note that all relevant databases should be current before running this macro it contains a warning It maintains a log of its results including any errors where it is unable to delete an object It may need to be run at different locations to tidy up periodically Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 439 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 9 Schematic Model Manager 24 9 1 Use of units Schematic Model Manager now uses the new units capabilities rather than its former specific units functions This means that imported data is automatically converted to the appropriate units chosen for the project In the Project Options dialogue the Units tab has been removed The specific Units UDAs have been removed from the default file and will no longer be populated on import Users can choose to use them but will need to set them up as required The Attribute Type is no longer needed in the Attribute Mapping file so has been removed from the Attribute Mapping UI 24 9 2 Units upgrade Schematic data imported prior to 12 1 must be upgraded A check is performed automatically on entry to Schemati
194. c Directional bk By GTYP_I Angled a5 Asimeti lt a Masters to update C Add all DK GTYP_INS T ok Cancel In case the system will change GTYP during this operation a warning message will be displayed in the batch job log Specification search during batch job lf GTYP has been changed and existing item has valid SPRE attribute set then system will try to find the new specification The search algorithm is presented below Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 413 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin SCVALVE Item Check if Item contains valid SPRE Item has no SPCO set before Do nothing NO A Check in diagrams settings if specification should be used and Check if SPRE type is SPCO Give a warning that current SPRE might be not valid Ne YES Check if any SELE or SPEC element asks about TYPE Find the element with TYPE question and start searching downstream looking for new SPCO The following criteria is considered during search The current SPCO does not depends on GTYP o For PPBO TYPE and STYP questions the answer is taken from SCVALVE Do nothing directly o For other questions the default answer will be used in case if there is only one possible item to choice then this item will be taken In case if above fails then system will try find the answer
195. c Model Manager and the user will be warned if an upgrade is required The upgrade process must be carefully considered by project administrators as it can affect multiple projects and locations Firstly schematic data is scanned to identify changes required Secondly UDA definitions are updated for the appropriate units Thirdly the changes identified are applied to the schematic data Please refer to the Schematic Model Manager User Guide for full details of this process 24 9 3 Change Highlighting in Diagram Changes in Diagrams may now be highlighted in Diagrams Schematic Model Manager and Tags using a new Diagram Change Highlighting add in Please see section in Diagrams chapter Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 440 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 10 Tag Compare Update The new Compare Update add in application can integrate data between Design Schematic and Engineering databases as well as data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical It enables populations of tagged objects such as equipment and line lists to be compared updated and linked between the data sources Compare Update supersedes the AVEVA Instrumentation Data Update application and is available in several Design Engineer modules Design Tags Paragon Schematic Model Manager and Diagrams v A LogOfF Instruments Accept all W Filters 2 Refresh gj Update Database E Options 42 TagNo Matched 42 Matched Agai
196. ce is deleted too However this follow up mechanism works only when itis the precise element specified for deletion that also is referenced from an assembly l e itis not working if the element deleted holds a substructure into which assembly references are made E g if a hull plate is assembled the assembly reference will be deleted if the plate is specifically deleted But if the hull panel is deleted the assembly reference is kept as an invalid reference and is denoted as lt Missing gt in assembly planning To extend this general follow up mechanism with more assembly specific code would slow down the system as it is acting generally for all delete operations As a solution an assembly planning specific core command is created that top down from the assembly selected will remove all references to parts no longer existing This core command is at delivery not available from the Assembly Planning context sensitive menu but can be added through the ordinary customise function l e you can add your Clean invalid part references function and connect the command AVEVA Marine AssemblyPlanning Clean to it The reason why it not is added from start is that it is a quite powerful command and should be used with caution and is better configured per user Customize Active Customization File Hull General v lt Command Control Type ApplicationContext l amp mport Menu c Arguments Collection 2 Active Customization File y Folii Me
197. ch AttributeDefin Text w Cable ACTTYP ActType ii De oe AREA Area ige a TPA rial DESC Description B 44 quipmen E DIAREF Diarefarray g Equipment AEE DISTAG Distag xI oe UDET for schematic engi ECRFA Ecrfarray GF UDET for schematic pum FUNC Function A Fitting re INPRTR Inprtref KIKI KI KI KI KI KI KI KI IKII KI KIKI KI KI ITT 11140400417 v IE gt lt gt j Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 420 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin If this setting is not checked the default value of the new UDA will be taken from Session Defaults Default groups Default system Default attributes Enabled EQ_10 v New VAluel 4 If the system changes the database attribute there will be detailed information in the batch job log Please note that the system will not set attribute value for items where a UDA was already defined in shape data If refresh is executed before the update then refresh will add any missing UDA to shape data with a default value Then the system detects it and will not set a default value to database Benefits The possibility to update existing items about newly created attributes values using batch job Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Utilities Batch Job Batch Update Affected Programs Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA
198. command in Admin These values have been increased at Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 it may now be set to between 20 Mbytes and 1 Gbyte Default Buffer Size The default buffer for modules in a new project is now Monitor 20 MBytes Admin Specon Propcon Isodraft 200 Mbytes Lexicon DARs Toolbox Design Draft Paragon Spooler 500 Mbytes Diagrams Schematic Model Manager Tags 5 10 1 Specifying the Buffer Size The Dabacon buffer may be set in Admin for each module orby use of an environment variable for all modules Buffer Setting for Each Module ina Project The setting for each program module is usually performed using the modmac mac file during project setup At a later date the ED MOD command may be used to change its value for one or more modules The value may be specified in Mbytes or integers 256000 integers means the same as 1 MByte For example ED MOD DESIGN 12800000 isthe same as ED MOD DESIGN 50 Mbytes Buffer Setting Per User The Dabacon value may be set for a particular user by setting the environment variable PDMSBUF before running Hull amp Outfitting This sets the buffer size in Megabytes for use by all Hull amp Outfitting modules it will be ignored if its value is greater than 1000 For example set PDMSBUF 500 sets it to 500 MByte Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 33 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Querying the Amount of Unused Buffer This may be qu
199. cted networks or individual messages ideal when sending messages over the internet e Bindings o Determine the low level protocol used BasicHTTP textual unsecured wsHTTP textual secured or TCP binary faster but cannot be validated o Determines which ports to use for connections e Encryption o WCF provides many encryption algorithms to protect data en route e Encoding o Tied in with the binding this determines how the message will be sent text slow binary fast or Message Transmission Optimisation Mechanism MTOM which will send what it can in text but will send binary data as binary a combination of the previous two e Authentication o Atthe server side the message is verified to be from a known source at the client side the message is sent to a known receiver Messages can authenticate against a Windows account or via a certificate e Message Validation o Ensure that messages meet a known format by comparing against a Schema Full details are provided in the Global WCF Configuration Guide Other Global manuals have also been updated for 12 1 27 4Global Claim Commands Global Claim to an extract commands issued from Hull amp Outfitting now pass only if ALL claims succeed This is a change as in previous versions where the Claim command would pass even when some claims had failed The Running Global Projects manual has been updated with further details 27 5 Global WCF Service Name The Global
200. ction The Restriction File Keywords in the General Section of the Restriction File Affected Programs Profile Nesting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 218 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 56 New Nesting Default Parameters Description The following additions changes have been made for the Nesting PLCM defaults SYMB_HEIGHT_EXCESS Symbol height for excess text in burning sketch DISPLAY_EXCESS_SYMBOL Code for displaying the excess symbol in the burning sketch 0 No display 1 Display MULTIPLE_NEST_NCOL Nesting only The number of nests in each column for multiple nest LABEL_AUTO_POSNO_METHOD PLCM only The method used for presenting labelled position numbers None label posno as given Partname label posno via partname control CVBA_SKETCH_ANGLE The code for the cvba angle display in the burning sketch Along End angle in burning direction Maximum The maximum of the start and end angles Minimum The minimum of the start and end angles Average The average ofthe start and end angles AUX_VALID_START_POS Text presented for auxiliary functions valid in the starting position AUX_VALID_END_POS Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 219 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Text presented for auxiliary functions valid in the ending position EDIT_PRODUCTION_TEXTS Code for editing production texts in burning sketch using Right Click No Editing
201. ctural Design e The view handling buttons in the Model Selection dialog Insert Model Benefits All symbolic view functionality is available in one single place making it easier to find these functions All symbolic views are also available from Marine Drafting making it possible to use Marine Drafting for more types of drawings Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Please see the Hull Design documentation Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 307 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 42 Default Action at Start up Description Using a default variable INITIAL_DRAWING itis now possible to define what Marine Drafting and Hull Design should do at start up The following possibilities exist NONE Do nothing Same as Hull Drafting 12 0 NEW Open a new drawing named UNTITLED lt n gt where lt n gt is selected so that UNTITLED lt n gt is non existing ASK_NEW Show the New Drawing dialog ASK_OPEN Show the Open Drawing dialog LAST Open the most recently used drawing during last session Benefit Most functions in Marine Drafting require an open drawing so the first thing a user does is to either create or open a drawing This new default variable will allow users to start working directly when Marine Drafting has started Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting
202. ctural elements to be displayed Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 470 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Hole Association Filter oO Current Element List of elements oO All Managed Holes Discipline HINES x Status ai w Claimed an E Valid Al Display V Outfitting Panels V Huli Plates C Invalid Apply fiter Hole Associations Drag a column header here to group by that column Association Discipline a Status 4 Valid Claimed 4 Penetrated item a Block a Penetra j SSO 7 DUCT ass YES lud HVA CPenPanelt dud Pen IHM AS50C 0008 DUCT judH ACPenPanelt I judHVACPen fHM amp SSOC 0009 DUCT YES fudHVACPenPanelt fudHVACPen HM amp SSOC 0010 DUCT YES AudHVACPenPanelt AudHVACPen JHM ASSOC 0011 judHVACPenPanelt judHVACPen JHM ASSOC 0012 DUCT YES fudHVACPenPanelt judHVACPen JHM ASS0C 0013 DUCT YES judHVACPenPanelt judHVACPen iHM ASSOC 0014 DUCT judHVACPenPanelt judHVACPen Total tems 6 Oo Show Tags Elements to manage Manage Selected Holes Add Current Element dudHVACPenPanel1 Reset Refresh Select the element specify the filter criteria and structural elements then select Apply Filter The selected hole associations will be displayed in the Hole Associations table If some of the hole associations fail navigate to the hole and use hole management to modify the penetration then select Apply Filter from the Hole Association Manag
203. current units for that dimension to be determined by the current units of its primary dimensions most often mass and distance Volumes areas densities temperature gradients and numeric densities can all be set to Derived units Only volumes can be set to specific units NUMERIC Units All attributes that have the UNIT field set for the first time were stored in previous versions as values with no specified unit The units that were previously attributed to their values were determined by use and convention and could change from application to application and project to project This flexibility can no longer be supported as storage units must be defined Database storage units have been set to those most commonly used but this will not be universally compatible The UNITS NUMERIC command is introduced for compatibility UNITS NUM ERIC dimension is used to Suspend unit conversions on input and output for attributes of the nominated dimension that is e No conversion from the stored value will be made on output Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 20 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e No unit qualifying strings will be appended to output values e input values with no qualifying unit strings will be stored without conversion in the database e If input values have a unit qualifying string a conversion factor will be applied This is of particular value to users who wish to con
204. d 37 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Track CE Track CE Attribute v Za Orientation WRT Ow Design 1 item e Focus 1 tem General 10 items lsodraft 1 item Mass Properties 5 items Operating Parameters 2 items Positional 2 items Specification 3 items Surface Treatment 2 items System 1 item Attributes displayed in a list Attributes displayed by Category 6 7 Auto naming Utility Enhancement This utility has been enhanced to allow the formulation of a name to use an IFTRUE statement which is a PML1 facility For example if you wish to make up a name based on attributes of a PIPE you can use the following PML2 autonaming rule ce fluref namn amp amp ce pspec namn amp amp ce ispec namn amp amp index However this rule will fail if any of the attributes FLUREF PSPE ISPE have not been set You can now use the IFTRUE function in PML1 form to do the same by using the following rule iftrue badref fluref unset namn of fluref amp amp iftrue badref pspec unset namn of pspe amp amp iftrue badref ispe unset namn of ispe amp amp index Please note that the whole Format must be PML 1 concatenated with the amp It is not possible to mix PML1 and PML2 functions The result of this rule can be seen below Co
205. d in the Design Common Functionality User Guide with the addition of new data set properties on selected piping components The following properties are used to control automatic hole sizes Property Name Description Property specifying the diameter of the hole required for the component a REAL DISTANCE expression returning the hole diameter The property is used if 1 It is associated with a piping or HVAC component that clashes with the panel at the penetration For example this property may specify the outside diameter of a COUP element that represents a penetration sleeve It is associated with a FLAN component that is adjacent to a penetration clash with pipe implied tube This allows for a flange clearance hole to be created If the AHDI property is applied the Clearance value is ignored If the AHDI property is not applied Pipe OD Clearance is used to calculate the hole size Property specifying the X dimension of a rectangular hole required for the component a REAL DISTANCE expression If the AHX property is applied the Clearance value is ignored If the AHX property is not applied Component width Clearance is used to calculate the hole size As for AHX but specifies the Y or height dimension of the hole 26 5 7 Hole Association Manager The Hole Association Manager window is used to manage the tasks associated with holes The Hole Association Filter is used to select hole association s and stru
206. d in the PADD database This is for example all texts created with the Insert Text function in Marine Drafting TBSystemFonts will in this case be replaced with a default true type font In 12 1 we have introduced a way to map a TBSystemFont with any true type font available in the project The mapping is primarily intended to be used when migrating drawings from M3 to 12 The font mapping is setup in a file with a simple format where each TBSystemFont can be associated with a true type font separated by a blank or a TAB The name of the file is assigned to the environment variable TB SYSTEMFONT MAP This is a sample file TBISOFont101 Arial Unicode MS TBISOFont105 Lucida Sans TBSystemFont0 Arial Unicode MS TBSystemFontl Times New Roman TBSystemFont2 Times New Roman TBSystemFont3 Times New Roman TBSystemFont4 Courier New TBSystemFont5 Courier New TBSystemFont6 Lucida Sans TBSystemFont7 Times New Roman The font mapping will affect the text font when e migrating a drawing with the SY013 migration utility e importing a drawing with the File lmport SDB utility e importing a drawing with the Copy Assistant utility Benefits TBSystemFonts can be replaced with any true type font available in the project not only the default font Compatibility Constraints Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 347 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin None For More Information Only no
207. d the thickness it represents The shell expansion view is initially presented with shown information controlled by new keywords available in the default file SHX_DRAW_PLATES TEXT Plates are shown with plate thickness annotated DRAW Plates are shown with hatch patterns representing the plate thickness NOT SET Plates are shown with plate thickness information hidden default Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 110 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin SHX_SHOW_POSNO when given plates are shown with position number annotated NOT SET Plates are shown with position number hidden default SHX_SHOW_MATQ when given plates are shown with material quality annotated NOT SET Plates are shown with material quality hidden default Benefits Visual overview of plate thicknesses in shell expansion view Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Curved Modelling Interactive Functions Curved Hull Menu Curved Panel Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 111 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 18 New Dialog when Setting Functional Descriptions Description The dialog for the function Hull Tools gt Functional Description has been changed The following dialog is now presented when activating the function E Select Functional Description Select Interval Stiffener
208. dditional sketches showing how bent planar stiffeners should be bent A new keyword in the SBH_SKETCH_RESTRICTION file with the purpose to suppress inverse bending sketches and sketches of bent planar stiffeners has been implemented BENDING_SKETCH YES NO When BENDING_SKETCH is set to NO plotting of inverse bending sketches and sketches of bent planar stiffeners will be turned off With this setting curved stiffener may be combined with planar stiffeners into one drawing when the keyword COMBINE_PLOTS is set On the other hand when BENDING_SKETCH is set to YES or when the keyword is omitted all sketches will be drawn Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Profile Manufacturing Production Output Profiles Automatic Generation of Profile Sketches Creating Profile Sketches Restriction File Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 184 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 26 Attachment Angles on Curved Plates 12 1 SP4 Description Marking of attachment angles on plane plate parts for components not perpendicular to the plate has been possible to create via the Plane Part Generation Ppanparts function Now this is possible also for curved plates using the Curved Part Generation function Cpanparts Benefits Information for assembling of parts on curved panel plates is improv
209. dealisation Now the idealisation process uses the common Block Division facility for plane panels Temporary copies of the original panels are no longer necessary Benefits Quality improved Redundancies removed Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 157 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 AVEVA Hull Detailed Design 15 1 Production Support for Frameworks 12 1 SP4 Description The production support for Outfit Steel models frameworks and sub frameworks is improved in two major areas e The production support for Outfit Steel models is made using the Hull Production programs In AVEVA Marine 12 1SP4 this is done without using additional programs or functions Instead relevant programs e g Automatic Generation of Parts Weld Planning and others are accepting Outfit Steel models directly and production support functions within hull have got additional functionality to select Outfit Steel models e The automatic transfer of Outfit Steel models into hull production is now made with more important features e g bevel and excess holes in profiles etc Details are given in the documentation Benefits Production data for Outfit Steel is generated more easily and with more production features taken care off Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to
210. ded to store all FEM related objects in a separate database Idealised models and FE models from AM 12 0 are not upgraded to AM 12 1 All FEM related objects are deleted from the project under the upgrading process For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Finite Element Model Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 155 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 23 FEM Additions Description Analysis ldealise Model Idealisation Settings The idealisation option ignore if prof height smaller than has been added to filter stiffeners pillars flanges and swages by their profile height The idealisation option ignore if prof area smaller than has been added to filter stiffeners pillars and flanges by their profile area Analysis Create FE Model All options to create images for investigation of FE models have been moved to the idealised block s context menu Only the options to create model images are left in the dialogue Now two separate images are created for beam and truss elements MB FE Model x Select the model to create the FEM for The FE Model will be stored with the block M Recreate FE Model IV Divide shell elements Max no of points 18 Angle deviation a5 Min length factor 10 4 IV Combine shell elements Max lenath factor 0 3 M Connect FE Model Dist tolerance jos M Remove ition steps smaller than fo IV
211. defined as free texts and for texts containing production information there has not been any information to which part a labelled text belongs This has now been improved so the missing part reference has been added for all production related labelled texts This will mean that all texts belonging to a certain nested part will be deleted when the part is deleted and transformed when the part is transformed Benefits Simplifies Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Detailed Design Mar dll Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 200 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 41 Parts Menu Display 12 1 SP2 Description The parts menu in plate nesting can now display either the object name or the part name of the listed plate parts A new nesting default parameter PARTS MENU_NAME controls which name to display By default the object name is displayed In the part name control settings the module named PARTMENU_NEST2AX controls the configuration of the part name to be displayed in the parts menu Benefits End users have the ability to configure which plate part names are displayed in the parts menu Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Nesting System Application Functions Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting Copyright 1974 to
212. delivered in the new ASCII format However please note that any symbol font files modified or created by the customer at site must be converted to the new ASCII format before it can be used This is done by running the conversion utility sb022 that is part of 12 0 or older releases Note also that the utility programs sb022 convert from binary to ASCII format and sb023 convert from ASCII to binary format have been withdrawn in this release If needed the 12 0 or older releases can be used For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 316 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 50 Dynamic Highlighting Description During the creation definition indication of lines arcs and contours in Marine Drafting the resulting entity will now be dynamically highlighted as the cursor moves over the drawing For example when creating an arc segment with three points the resulting segment is highlighted dynamically when third point is about to be defined Dynamic highlighting is implemented during the definition of e Line segments all definition modes e Arc segments all definition modes except Point radius and Tangent e PolyLine segments all definition modes e Ellipses Circumscribed Rectangle and Major amp Minor Axis and in the following functionality e Modify Stretch Node e Modify Stretch Elbow e Insert Rectan
213. ding PDF 26 11 2 TrueType Fonts 26 11 3 Large Coordinates 26 11 4 Additional Coordinate Formats 26 11 5 Drawing Pipe Spool 26 11 6 North Arrow Text 26 11 7 Pipe Penetration Seal Symbol 26 11 8 Setting Units in Options files 26 12 Future Considerations 26 12 1 Access platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL 27 AVEVA Global 27 1 Global Server Version 27 2 Layout of Create Modify Database Form 12 1 SP3 27 3 Global WCF 27 4 Global Claim Commands 27 5 Global WCF Service Name 27 6 ADUUID Attribute Length 28 AVEVA Catalogue amp Specifications 28 1 Model Settings 28 2 Parameterised Detail Text 28 3 Structural Catalogue 28 3 1 Copy Button for Structural Catalogue 28 3 2 Creation of Structural Specs 28 3 3 Raw Plates in CATA 28 3 4 Unknown Ref on NAREF reports an error 12 1 SP2 29 Known Issues 29 1 Outstanding Faults and Issues 29 1 1 General Issues 29 1 2 The Impact of the PML Form Layout Changes 12 1 SP3 29 1 3 AVEVA Global 29 1 4 New Reporting Add in 29 2 Corrections and Minor Enhancements 12 1 SP2 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 481 482 482 482 482 484 484 484 484 485 485 486 486 486 488 488 489 489 490 491 491 491 492 493 493 493 493 493 494 494 494 496 496 496 496 496 497 500 xiv AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Revision History September 2011 Initial release of 12 1 28 9 2011 Updated 29 9 2011 Added information about ASL moved Piping lsometric
214. e Reinforced Plastic Option FRP Setting Up an FRP Project Defining Blocks as Steel or FRP Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structure Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 162 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 6 Bevel Side Definition on Stiffeners 12 1 SP4 Description It has always been possible to define bevel side as 1 and 1 using the planar panel schema The value 1 denotes the mould side and the value 1 the material side The Statement Wizard has now been updated with keywords to support a similar easy definition The new keywords Mtrl Side Mould Side can now be selected by the user in order to simplify the definition of bevel side The system will automatically calculate the direction e g TOP BOTTOM which are the values that will be presented when modifying the specific component Benefits The users do not have to consider ship direction when defining bevel side only material side Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structure Design AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 163 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 7 Hole in Clips 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to define a standard hole in clips The picture below shows the definition of these holes using the Statement Wizard
215. e be known as Stairs Ladders and Handrailing SLH Until the new application is released the 12 0 ASL application is kept in the product as is The old Access platforms Stairs and Ladders application from Hull and Outfitting 11 6 is still available though it will be removed at a future release It is available hidden at Hull and Outfitting 12 and can be reactivated by a simple edit to the PML file PpMsuI des addins access This file is all commented out activate all the code lines after the header and ensure that the application is shown on the menu Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 488 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 27 AVEVA Global 27 1 Global Server Version Marine 12 1SP3 as well as Marine 12 1SP2 and PDMS 12 1SP2 are supported by Global Server 12 1SP2 A limitation in this version of Global Server is that it supports a 12 1SP3 project only if the optional upgrade has not been applied Please contact AVEVA support website http support aveva com if there is a need to apply the optional upgrade on a Marine 12 1SP3 Global project Global Server 12 1SP3 will be released together with Marine 12 1SP3 hotfix 1 This Global Server version can be used with 12 1SP2 as well as with 12 1SP3 independently if the optional upgrade has been applied or not Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 489 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 27 2 Layout of Create Modify Database Form 12 1 SP3
216. e same mechanism as used prior to introducing the PADDXP attribute It should be noted that the REGI name is picked up from the d065 file as before via the appropriate environment variable e g SB_SDB_PADD Benefits Drawings of the same drawing type can now be distributed across several databases provided that the DEPT elements have been pre created in the appropriate databases Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting Operator Instructions FILE NEW DRAWING Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting User Guide Model Viewing and General Drafting Concepts Drawings Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 276 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 16 Open Drawing in Read Only Mode 12 1 SP4 Description Until now there have been some severe problems when opening a drawing in Marine Drafting as read only When you started to modify a drawing opened as read only two things could happen 1 If you had write access to the drawing and did modification that update the PADD database create a new view for instance then the drawing would be claimed 2 If you had no write access or the drawing was claimed by another user then the modifications you made failed to be stored in the PADD database Both situation were confusing and could cause you to lose data in the PADD database In 12 1 SP4
217. e view By unchecking it the view can be flipped moved rotated and scaled After editing the view it can again be locked to avoid accidental modifications cut SA Copy FA Paste Format gt Data gt Shape gt Please note that any items that are located on foreground page like equipments etc that had their position set before view shape movement will not be automatically updated automatically after view has moved or resized They will need to be manually refreshed For more information See User Guide Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Using Background Drawings Intelligent Background Page Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 391 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 13 Flipping Labels 12 1 SP2 A new option has been introduced for label shapes they can now be flipped automatically depending on the flow direction of the pipeline True Default layer E Shape text options Use defaults False Shape text CENTER 0 4 TOP 0 E 0 0 0 Arial Spt Determines whether label should be flipped on change of flow of connector it is attached to a animate This can be used for example in KKS to show flow direction as a flag pointing in the flow direction SP DRO7C V 77 SP DRO7C HO012 Name SP DRO7C HO012 B 1 TUB1 S P D RO 7 C H OO 1 2 1 50 Text 7 scplin namn spre catr para 1 Area 0 Arrive p Borearray i Crfarray Nu
218. e 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 10 Limited Unicode Support in Hull Design Description Even if a project is in Unicode mode the same restrictions on allowed characters in the names of objects created using Hull Design still apply l e only uppercase letters A Z digits and the special characters hyphen full stop underscore _ and plus can be used ale cjojejF jej H kL MN JO P a R s r July w zl fe efas lef ee f Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 60 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 11 Improved Local Language Unicode Encoding A major internal change at Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 is that the system uses the Unicode standard for text storage and manipulation rather than the various specific and somewhat proprietary methods that are used in Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 and earlier releases This standard covers all common world languages and special characters and will make it much easier to provide support for additional character sets in the future It makes text handling more robust and makes it much easier to relax some of the previous restrictions particularly to the use of Asian 16 bit character sets For example these may now be viewed in the 3D views Inputs and outputs may be in Unicode or local standards Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 61 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 12 Units of Measure Extended Range of Conversions Hull amp
219. e Catalogue Parameters box is checked the Model View form will not update any model settings except those for catalogue parameters 28 2 Parameterised Detail Text The GUI will now accept Text Expressions in Detail Text fields these must be entered as valid string expressions beginning with and ending with If the expression is not specified in this way the Detail Text field will be treated as a simple string For details please see section 4 1 15 Detail and Material Text in the Catalogues and Specifications User Guide 28 3 Structural Catalogue 28 3 1 Copy Button for Structural Catalogue New Copy buttons have been added tothe forms for creating structural geometry components and Plines These make it easy for the user to copy an existing element and then modify the expressions rather than start from scratch This approach is similar to that used for the Data Sets Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 493 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Details of the changes are given inthe Catalogue amp Specifications User Guide 28 3 2 Creation of Structural Specs In the Specification list form available from menu Display gt Specifications there is now a button Display Spec Pressing this button brings up the Specification form as before except that the form opens in Read Only mode In this state the form UI changes slightly the title includes Read Only and changes the wording of two link butt
220. e DRAFT DXF General form which is accessed from Utilities gt Configurable DXF output gt Modify gt General or in Draft administration mode Settings gt DXF configuration settings gt General 20 8 Enhanced Angular Dimensions Angular Dimensions ADIMs no longer need to have Dimension Direction their origin defined if it can be deduced from the vectors defined by their first two dimension points Typically these are directions defined by P lines but they can also be defined by P points For example the figure shows an Angular Dimension with its origin defined implicitly by the intersection of the two Dimension directions which are P lines of SCTNs This Angular Dimension could be created by typing Dimension Origin by intersection the following commands starting at Layer level PDF files paf DXF General General Settings View Number Prefix C Z Coordinates Primitive Thickness Scale Factor 29 6 f Y Dimension Direction NEW ADIM Create new Angular Dimension element FROM DIR IDPL TO DIR Use cursor to pick P lines defining the first and second IDPL Dimension Directions DPOS Use cursor to pick a Sheet position through which the Dimension Arc will pass Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 354 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For full details please refer to the DRAFT User Guide section 12 6 Angula
221. e Hydrostatics in the menu The dialogue below is presented where the ship particulars and the draft of the ship must be given The analysis is activated by pressing the Calculate button The result from the calculation is presented in the output window Hydrostatic Parameters x m Ship partiduars AP at x pos 0 LPP 244330 Beam 21111 Draft amp Shell thickness Draft 8500 Shell thickness 0 Calculate Cancel 12 1 2 Tank Capacities Given a space arrangement this function will reply with tables of tanks grouped on purpose the tables are displayed on the current drawing The following information are displayed in the table head the purpose is shown and for each tank the following properties are shown e id e Start End frame for the tank e Volume e Weight full Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 117 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Centre of tank LCG TCG VCG e Density of the tank content This calculation is available in Space Management on arrangements of type Compartment Space Management The calculation of Tank Capacities is activated by using the Space Management function Tank Capacities When activating the dialogue below is presented to the user Select a Space world and compartment arrangement The tank report will be added to the current drawing with calculated properties presented in tables An example of such tables is shown below
222. e Knowledge Base also extracts some important layout programming guidelines and issues It also tries to present some of the experience gained so far which should help developers to solve their layout problems For More Information Key documents Software Customisation Guide see particularly e CH15 2 Defining a Form e Ch17 Form Layout e 17 2 Layout Modes e 17 4 Positioning Alignment and Size of Gadgets e 17 5 Auto placement e 17 7 1 Set Size to the Positional Extent of a Previous Gadget e 17 8 Intelligent Resizing e 17 8 1 ANCHOR Attribute e Appendix B Converting a Form to VarChars and Layout Form Software Customisation Reference Manual updated to match the Guide 29 1 3 AVEVA Global Global 12 1 does not fully support projects with spaces in their pathnames Work is in hand to remove this limitation but no definite release date is yet set The daemon will work when installed in C Program Files but there is a known issue see below RPC Daemon cannot detect if a WCF daemon is already running for current location of the project Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 496 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin PDMS reports 1 504 Unexpected error contacting Daemon check versions match when missing global client dlls Element claims can be lost for distributed extracts if an issue fails This can lead to the error message has been deleted in a later session The new Database Distribution allows a
223. e creation of cross bending templates The new options are used to control the creation of edge template and the ability to create a single template in the U or the V axis A new output file has been added as a result of the cross bending template generation The new output is a CSV file with corner points and distances between corner points in the developed plate and the base plane for the template arrangement A new output drawing has also been added generated if the template calculation is made using the new option for a single template in U or V axis The drawing contains trace curves generated for the templates that intersect the template defined as single template Benefits More possibilities to control the template calculation and more production information are available Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design Manufacturing Curved Plates Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Bending Templates Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 171 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 13 New Options for Templates Marking 12 1 SP4 Description New options for template marking have been added to control additional marking of curves on the template and in the output sketch The new options are controlled by three new IP s and also one new statement in the input file for bending template New IP s LARGESIGHTLINEMARK Large sight line mark on
224. e language pack is installed The user can specify Arial Unicode font for reporting to display multi byte characters in the report PDF excel etc without installing the respective language pack Reporting Default Values in Cells When a value is not found the error text lError is given In the UDA definition there is a default value defined which should be in the report Workaround This workaround removes Error from the report field and replaces it with empty string e Select the cell label or control in report designer e Add the script for before print select new when creating script for the first time e Change the text from Error to desired string as below private void labels BeforePrint object sender System Drawing Printing PrintEventArgs e i if label8 Text Error F label8 Text i Reporting Document Fails to Attach to the Mail This occurs for PDF files only when you have a Unicode character in the filename it does the save but doesn t send it to Outlook The workaround is to attach to email or right click the file to send it manually Quick Report exception thrown Doing a quick report and then using the HTML VIEW tab throws an exception Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 499 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin This occurs only with a large number of columns so the report cannot accommodate them within the visible area Large length Reports fail to expor
225. e product 24 1 Project Breakdown Structure PBS 12 1 SP4 Description 1 PBS for Engineering and Diagrams is a new and flexible way of structuring engineering data which can be completely customised to represent the way users want to navigate the data User defined PBS Templates are set up in Lexicon where they can use PML expressions or external NET dll s to display engineering data 2 Multiple PBS templates can be set up for different user roles which can be managed by DICT DB s amp MDB s to display the appropriate data structure for the user roo Lists anu Quntuures vupvvaoru netuIu gt Mech Tags s Project breakdown structure Drag a column heat 4J fF2 ACS Air Conditioning Supply lt 1 tf CHTS Compartment Heating System lde 4 212 HVS High Voltage System ee mend C Process System C ss 2f A Process System A La 2f SW Sea Water System o CUN dF ACR Air Conditioning Return D1201 4J tF FAS Fire Alarm System E1301 ci f CW Chilled Water System 13024 ef ELS Emergency Lighting System 1302B a es B sysgrp Process System B P15014 ef Junction Box Tag P1502A ES Electrical Tag P1502B 45 Equipment Tag H Stabilizer Reflux Drum D Linked schematic element Linked 3D element Motor q H Members 5 Stabilizer Reflux Condenser 1st Pass Stabilizer Reflux Condenser 2nd Pass a6 Stabilizer Reflux Pump Stabilizer Reflux Pump Standby 4 Ov
226. e selected from a list Line jumps style The new settings together allow the user to specify the behaviour of crossing lines depending on defined conditions If the settings are applied properly by rule the result is visible on the drawing and also appropriate values are shown for particular shapes on the tab in the Visio Format gt Behaviour dialog For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Auto Formatting Rules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 402 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 22 Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer It is now possible to individually control the shape annotations for the element types in the Schematic Model Viewer The following settings can now be made using the options dialog in the Schematic Model Viewer e Display criteria for selection of shapes e Display text e icon png file e Stencil shape For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Schematic Model Viewer Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 403 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 23 Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority Description Previously Diagrams did not provide functionality to configure automatic line jumps with priorities depending on attributes To capture the requirement support for line jumps has been introduced in the Auto Formatting Rules feature Two new format types have been
227. e the databases are protected from being updated by any version prior to 12 1 SP4 The upgrade level denoted 12010401 is an optional upgrade provided by release of 12 1 SP4 and contains one upgrade item only Item 93792 General database changes 2 2 Compatibility 12 1 SP3 Databases created and updated in Marine 12 1SP2 or PDMS 12 1SP2 can be used as they are in Marine 12 1SP3 without any need to upgrade 2 2 1 Optional database upgrade Some of the new functionality in Marine 12 1SP3 requires an upgrade though This is an Optional Upgrade which is applied by the system administrator when all users in the project are running 12 1SP3 For More Information See chapter 2 6 Database Upgrade Optional Upgrade in this bulletin NB When this Optional Upgrade has been applied the project is no longer compatible with 12 1SP2 2 2 2 Sharing data between 12 1SP2 and 12 1SP3 A project can be shared between users running 12 1SP2 and 12 1SP3 Users working in both product versions can access and update the same project databases If 12 1SP2 and 12 1SP3 are to be used in parallel in the same project certain restrictions apply Marine 12 1SP3 can co operate with Marine 12 1SP2 or PDMS 12 1SP2 in the same project under the following circumstances e All users running 12 1SP2 must use a specific hotfix for 12 1SP2 The hotfix in question will be announced at a later stage through the proper channels e The optional upgrade for Marine 12 1S
228. e user to capture multi discipline design elements store them in a library for re use and then create any number of instances of them at any position in the model as required It is accessed from a new Standard Model Library Manager form accessed from the Utilities menu and uses a Create Standard Model Library Item form these vary somewhat dependent on whether a user is a library manager or a general user The first form to appear is the Manager form which can be used to browse the library and add items to it Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 474 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin r C Toggle Name Description Library Environment v New Library Library Area Vehicles v New Area Library Item Liquid Gas Tanker w New Item Add to Standard Model Library Item copy O include Create Standard Model Library Item Name SkidTypeAB Efra APPLDA Liq_Gas_Tanker Purpose Standard Model Library ZONE Liq_Gas_Tanker Z ONE B STDMODELITEM LIQ_GAS_TANKER cH AA STRU TANK_SUPP_B_B E STRU TANK_SUPP_A_B pi STRU TANK_SUPP_B_A E A STRU TANK_SUPP_A_A 8 P EQUI TANK EQUI TANK_TOP_PLATES er EQUI TANK_PLATE_STRAPS 4 STRU TANK_TOP_PLATFORM Description Skid Structure Type AB D E amp amp amp A STRU UNDERFRAME FA STRU WAGONPIPES B E Navigate ni6w26d Parallel Model Rotate This creates a new element in a Library in the applicatio
229. eb plate is positioned at a distance equal to the web height away from the trace part Next step is to calculate the dotori angles along the trace curve of the plate and to create a guiding contour In this step the plate part is made wider and wider There is no problem with the material size because the plate part is cut from a bigger plate but the final web plate part will be too big and the position of the flanges in the figure above will coincide except for the web thickness This means that e g an abutting stiffener will be to wide and a cutout maybe to small Since the described process for converting profile parts to plate parts has been the same for a long time some customers may have found their own workarounds to meet this problem Therefore this functionality is now enhanced to give the customer a possibility to have the profiles positioned as shown in the first figure By setting the Environment Variable SBH_CHECK_PROF_TRACE to any arbitrary value further checks will be done If the profile to be examined fulfils the criteria to be converted to plate part according to the rules given in the file assigned to SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB calculations of connecting components like stiffeners brackets and cutouts will be performed according to the first figure Inclined plane panel stiffeners will be examined and treated in the same way as described for the shell stiffeners Another way already in the system to control the position of inc
230. ecking now includes SPRF elements The following warnings may be generated S 10 Sprf error PSTR not set S 20 Sprf error Unknown ref for PSTR S 30 Sprf error NARE not set S 40 Sprf error Unknown ref for NARE S 50 Sprf error No plines set S 60 Sprf error Duplicate pline key NA S 70 Sprf error GSTR not set Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 494 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin S 80 Sprf error Unknown ref for GSTR Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 495 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 29 Known Issues 29 1 Outstanding Faults and Issues 29 1 1 General Issues Unicode Filenames The use of ASCII Basic Latin filenames is recommended for two reasons compatibility with other systems and various specific issues which have yet to be resolved This applies to some of the systems to which PDMS is interfaced and even to some of the interfaces where Hull amp Outfitting makes use of third party software such as output of DXF and DGN PML Publisher does not currently fully support Unicode filenames 29 1 2 The Impact of the PML Form Layout Changes 12 1 SP3 Description PML developers using the new Forms and Menues libraries may discover unacceptable changes to the layout of some existing forms The fix for the layout changes is usually straight forward This document lists the available documentation The continuation of this document which can be found in item KB4453 in th
231. ed Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See documentation User Guide Hull Detail Design gt Manufacturing gt Automatic Generation of Curved Parts gt Release of Curved Parts for Production gt Setup of Program gt Default File Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 185 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 27 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 186 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 28 Interactive Jig Pillar Enhancements 12 1 SP3 Description The interactive Jig Pillar application is enhanced The main areas of improvements are e All definition data is stored with the jig object to be able to recreate a Jig Pillar arrangement at a later stage e Adjustments to the assembly plane are enhanced with more relevant options e Ensuring that the same Jig Pillar arrangement is obtained both from the PPI Hull function and from the interactive application e A possibility to place the Jig arrangement of the other side of the surface Benefits The enhancements made to the interactive Jig Pillar application will make the designing of the Jig Pillar arrangement easier to produce and modify It is also possible to bring in Jig Pillar arrangements made in the batch program to make modifications interactively Compatibility Constraints Old Jig Pillar objects made in previous releases do not contain all defi
232. ed points Fit to plane settings uae oo m C Use percentages Enforce limit Benefits Easier fairing and manipulation of planar curves not lying in a principal plane Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 75 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 11 Lines Curve Interrogation Description Coordinates and angles at XY Z values can be examined for a curve The function is activated by the right mouse button and values are shown on the output window Curve Query Section 13 5 Benefits Coordinates can be derived for inserting a point into a curve Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 12 Lines Angle Curve Creation Editing Description It is now possible to create and manipulate angle curves in PACE The angle curves can be set active as other curves and are visually superimposed on the existing orthogonal and oblique views They can therefore be changed graphically or edited by changing the values in the Data Point grid Curve index Active Point Type xim vim 4 Cline Lxknuck Ordinary 9 0000 50 7008 Cline Lxknuck 1 M Ordinary 10 5000 53 8875 0 0000 3 Cine Lxknuck
233. ed to see the updated data in the Diagrams Drawing A new automatic refresh function has been introduced in this release This function triggers on Database Events and automatically updates the currently open drawing For some cases the Refresh Command will still need to be used for example if changes have been done in the database and the related drawing was not open at the time Name Missing Drawing Connections Description Shape Selection Crteria Check Definition Actions Rule Options PML Expression gt v8 Diagrams Rules Name v Formatting Rules Q 3 IES HH Format W Undefined Shapes 71 Blue Lines d V Missing DB Elements 7 S Consistency Rules Ij 2 Nested Shapes YE Standard Consistency Check Bad Beferences Check from Library VID Undefined Shapes Missing connections m m Fl YIM Missing DB Elements Missing Drawing Connections chee mei v Flea YD Nested Shapes Missing DB Connections Pa Execute fi connection WY Bad Beferences V Missing Specification SEC JIV Missing connections WY incorect specticaton type 72 vissing Drawing Comectons VID Missing DB Connections Sae j Rest FIQ Missing Specification FID Incorrect specification type 3 W 6 Actuator Rules 4 m gt 4 m gt For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Main GUI Components Diagrams Rules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 384 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23
234. eed some reconfiguring e integrator links world CYMWRL has been moved to Reference database e Shape upgrades in Diagrams automatic when opening a diagram in write mode Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 12 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Systems moved to Reference Design database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 3 Configuration 3 1 Operating Environment Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 is supported on Windows XP Service Pack 3 32 bit and Windows 7 both 32 and 64 bit versions Projects are usually installed on a server both Windows Server 2003 amp 2008 R2 are supported 3 2 PC Hardware Configuration A minimum of 4 GB of memory is recommended for this release especially when installed on Windows 7 Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 will operate with less but system performance will be compromised A screen resolution of at least 1280x1024 is recommended though most users now use either two such screens or a wide screen 1920x1200 display For details please refer to the Systems Requirements Manual 3 3 Microsoft Windows 12 1 SP2 Desktop Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 is supported for use on Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack SP 3 or on Windows 7 Business and Enterprise editions Service Pack 1 with appropriate patches It should be noted that extended support from Microsoft for Windows XP ends in April 2014 after which d
235. efinition It may be relevant to have more than one Autopos object e g when defining both with and without the option to treat symmetrical parts equally The dialog for Automatic Position Number Definition has been enhanced to present all available Autopos control objects in a drop down list The cases available in the highlighted control object are presented in a list When switching to another Autopos Control Object by selecting it on the drop down the user must click the Update button to list the relevant cases for the selection Benefits No need for the user to remember the names of cases and objects Compatibility Constraints None For more information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Automatic Position Number Setting Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 232 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 65 Reflection in Hull Element Names and Hurefl Attribute Description Slightly changed naming rules apply for hull elements created in the Design database by Planar and Curved Hull e For any non symmetric object there will be only one element The name of this element will be equal to the object name as given by the user or in some cases automatically by the system e For asymmetric object there will be two elements One of these will be named as the object and one will have a name composed by the object name and a_R suffix R mea
236. eflux Cooling Return ot cw Chilled Water System 250 B 5 A3B 75 Raes S Upe Mistar oE LSe ae Pipelines referred by From or To on the 3 P amp ID 2 P amp ID 3 Max Design pascal M selected item gt To B 4 200 00 Ry 48875000 00 Identification of Nozzles Duty a PAD Tag Prefix Tag Letter Tag Nu Equipment items referred by From or To on Pescription From E1301 E 1301 the selected item D 1201 5 Continuous A1 51 2003 8 amp Continuous A1 51 2004 Record Release Al completed Number of released elements 1 Session Defauts 100 U Benefits Allows for relevant data to be presented together in a comprehensive way Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 430 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Tags Create and Manage Lists Affected Programs AVEVA Engineering Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 431 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 5 Datasheets in AVEVA Engineering 12 1 SP4 Description Datasheet instances can be created and edited in AVEVA Engineering Data entered in mapped fields in the datasheet will automatically be updated in the database Datasheet instances are based on a previously created Datasheet template see below and can be revisioned Datasheets can be viewed read only in AVEVA D
237. elected all changed elements in the child extract that have not yet been flushed or issued to the parent are highlighted if they appear in the current graphical view The Colour button allows selection of the change highlight colour using the standard colour palette The highlighting is cleared when the dialog is closed or when a subsequent extract operation is performed using the dialog In the latter case the checkbox becomes unselected When the Introduced by Get All Changes checkbox is selected all elements that are changed by the next Get All Changes action or Flush or Issue actions if these include Get All Changes are highlighted if they appear in the current graphical view The same highlighting colour is used as for outstanding changes The highlighting is cleared when the dialog is closed or if the Outstanding in Extract checkbox is selected In the latter case the Introduced by Get All Changes checkbox becomes unselected There is a subtlety to the Flush and Issue actions available in this dialog these operations include an extract refresh by default The exception is in a Global project where the parent extract is not primary In this case a refresh is not included in the operation In order to clarify whether a refresh will occur as part of a Flush or Issue action an indication has been added to the dialog as shown below Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 446 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulle
238. elements in PDMS Design Managed fitting holes were not supported in these elements in earlier versions of PDMS 12 1 Free hole penetrations remain unsupported in these elements e Support for cable tray as a penetrating discipline where the cable tray material forms a full penetration as for piping penetrations This does not replace existing Cabling System hole management which is designed to handle cables without cable tray passing through transition pieces e Support for penetrations through FLOOR elements e Support for free holes and fitting holes in FLOOR elements in the Walls amp Floors Application e Improved presentation of penetration validation errors in the hole management form e Autonaming for penetrating marker e g ATTA element creation The MAS project has been updated to include penetration ATTA components for MDGLG HDCTG and SCTG cable tray specifications Other cable tray catalogue data has not been exten ded to include penetration ATTAs MAS has also been extended to add very s imple fittings for floor penetrations and to make new hatches available to the steel panel Fitting Hole function For details please refer to the Multi Disciplinary Penetration and Hole Management section of the Design Common Functionality User Guide 26 5 2 Create Holes In the Clearance field specify the clearance to apply to the penetrating item This is not applied if the software detects a clash with a pipework or HVAC component tha
239. ence as a line with a height proportional to the size of the measured difference You will still get a report as well Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 121 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Benefits A visual interpretation of the differences between two surfaces will help in taking the correct decisions when replacing one surface with another Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager Appendices Create Sample Points Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Surface Manager Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 122 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 4 Surface Manager Replacing Surface Server Description For along time the only way of using an external surface with Aveva Marine has been through the surface server This has limited the type of operations performed on the surface and control of the quality fit for purpose of the surface Starting with AVEVA Marine 12 1 all surfaces have to be released into the database and the surface server will not be used To help with this when working with surfaces created by non AVEVA software there is a new application the AVEVA Surface Manager It can import surfaces in IGES SAT STEP and dml formats It also has a number of features for checking and repairing the surface Benefits More advanced operations can be performed on the surface and the user can check the ext
240. ent Team lt TEAM gt TEAMC Steetwerk Team lt TEAM gt TEAMD Pipework Team lt TEAM gt TEAME Mangers And Supports Team lt TEAM gt TEAMF Reporter Tear lt TEAM gt TEAMG isodrat Team a lt TEAM gt TEAMM Cliasher Team lt TEAM gt TEAM VAC Team Sot by Nare Fiter Creste STE nat Ostatese Type Design Access Mode Uoga X I Controtes I 20 Reterence Onty I Protected r 3af Jlf sees Number one system DE Number emee _Sysem _ unge Fie Numer ermen System Primary Loc PROJECTHUB z Propagate Database i F Urk Documents Only on Design Databases em oms Note The linked Document tick boxis only available for DESI databases this option is not available for other types of databases The DBLOC element for the Database contains the attribute NOLNKP to determine whether the database should be scanned for link documents This defaults to False indicating that links will be propagated if enabled To determine if a Database can support Link Documents the attribute ISLNKD can be queried The attribute DBLNKP can be queried to determine if the update process will scan this database for link documents The Global update process will scan all relevant databases to determine what linked documents to propagate to the remote location Link Documents are applied to the database through the creation if a LNDESC element The scan will select all link documents that have the LNKPRP attribute set to SEND The document
241. ent points for filleted radius at vertex P8 Bottom face fillet centre P9 Top face fillet centre There are two changes to improve performance e calculate all the p point positions in one go when drawing them in Draft e omit P5 to P9 when the fillet radius is zero as they are coincident with the first four 20 11 Drawing Gridlines Plant Design grids GRIDSYstem and GRIDAXs elements may now be added to IDLists but may not be the sole member of the IDList They are drawn using the Centreline Style Colour their GRIDLNs are considered to be of infinite length and so are extended to the VIEW boundary AUTO commands ignore these elements when calculating the VSCA THPOS and SIZE attributes of a VIEW For details please refer to the DRAFT User Guide section 4 2 4 3 and 12 9 20 12 Intelligent Text Handling Enhancement Draft allows all Design and Catalogue database attributes and pseudo attributes to be used in the annotation of drawings It is also possible to use attributes of related elements for example SITE gives the name of site owning the referenced element Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 355 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 additionally allows the more commonly used position attributes POS HPOS TPOS APOS TPOS NPOS POSS POSE DRPS and DELP to be qualified so as to provide only one of the coordinates For example e POS full 3D position e g W12250 N7890 U3120
242. ent variable SBH_ADJUST FOR _BEVEL_ VARIANT can now be used to switch to the new way of calculating the material contours By giving the variable the value YES the new method will be used In any other case the old method is still applied Benefits This development enables the user to control the size of bump contours of plates when variants are involved avoiding potential problems with plates being nested too close too each other Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup and Customisation Bevel Excess and Weld Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine End User Handling of Bevelling Bevel and Extraction of Parts Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 205 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Plane Parts Generation 15 45 Position Control of Shell Profile and Plane Panel Stiffener Description stiffener attaching longitudinal The figure above is showing a plane view with two longitudinals one with the material pointing upwards the red one one pointing downwards the black one In this example the Automatic Bevel box in the Profile section of the Shell Stiffener has been given the value No The intersection point of the mould plane of the Shell Stiffener and the hull curve in the panel plane is the same In the plane view two different panels have been defined Each of them containing a stiffener abutting
243. er A built in diagram viewer allows users to view and navigate P amp lDs and other schematics Compare amp Update Engineering data can be compared and updated against a number of other AVEVA sources such as Schematics 3D AVEVA Instrumentation etc see Compare Update It is also possible to compare individual items of the same kind against each other to find differences Excel Import Export Engineering data can be imported from external sources and exported to external applications by using Excel Import Export utilities AVEVA NET Integration Engineering data can be exported to AVEVA NET Reports Project quality formatted reports can be created direct from the Dabacon databases As Engineering is based on the same platform as the 3D and Schematics tools it is very easy to combine data from these sources into common reports Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 437 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin ags AVEVA Engineering Project SAM Data Management View Admin pi is x Line Tag Tag Status Si T Promote History ER Ta fay iz amp Flush Z gt Excel Import amp Demote G Statistics gt R Issue 88 Excel Export v Approved 75 JA kK Highlight History Claim Refresh State Publish to Compare Edit x Remove lt T 5 Drop AVEVANET Update Link Status Control Status Actions Changes AVEVA Integration Import Export Temperatures Process Ar Seg No Line Size m
244. er Guide Marine Customisation Structural Design Automatic Position Number Setting User Guide Weld Planning z Nesting User Guide Legacy Applications f Hull Standards _ Post Processors User Guide Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts User Guide Curved Plates User Guide Plate Manufacturing User Guide Profile Manufacturing User Guide Production Program Interface User Guide P Hull Miscellaneous Functions User Guide Hull Options User Guide PPM for Outfit Steel User Guide It should be noted that the PDF manuals are no longer supplied separately but may be obtained from the on line help by clicking E Printable version on entry to any manual Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 64 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 AVEVA Initial Design 10 1 Storing of CALC Output in DABACON 12 1 SP4 Description A new database type named ALYS is introduced in Dabacon It is intended for any type of analysis data Currently Initial Design Hydrostatics has an option to store data in this new database Benefits With the output from Hydrostatics available inside DABACON the Reporting Tool with all its customization capabilities can be used to produce reports Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Initial Design Hydrostatics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 65 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 2 Project Data
245. er window To add elements to be managed select Add Current Element To remove the automatically created penetrations select Reset then Refresh Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 471 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Displaying Holes The Hole Association Manager window can also be used to display selected holes in the 3D view Mole Association Fiter Qurrent Bement O Ust of cements OA Managed Holes Discipline Ae v Sous A v Osmed A w Vaki Not Checked w Display Apply fer Hole Assocastions ic that Association G Discpine a Sisus a Vaid Osmed G Penestroted Rem Glock a Penetrating Rem HMA L832 PIPE Net Checked YE RO F Rat Ts 6001 61 otter Dii Elow Togs F Trarshcert Penetrated Eemerts to manage Add Current Bemert 24171874 Retret Refresh Clipped Hole View The Focus on Hole option can be used to zoom in on a selected hole and remove all other elements from the 3D view Make sure that the clipping and capping options are selected on the active 3D view From the Hole Associations table right click to select a single hole and activate a popup menu Select Focus on Hole this zooms to the selected hole and clips the surrounding background To return to the normal view de select the clipping and capping options or select a different view Show Tags To show tags and a box surrounding a selection of holes in the associations list check the Show Tags box Translucent
246. erhead Product Pump H E Overhead Product Pump Standby 5 Heat Exchanger n lt gt A 4 Line Tag 1 if Instrument Tag Nozzle Name 41 tF HO Hydraulic Oa System p C1101 N1 maana na Benefits Allows for data to be organised in a logical way that is appropriate for the engineering workflow Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 425 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For More Information Refer to User Guides Lexicon Project Breakdown Structure Schematics Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Main GUI Components Project Breakdown Structure and Schematics Tags Project Breakdown Structure Affected Programs AVEVA Engineering AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 426 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 2 DateTime Data Type 12 1 SP4 Description UDA s can now be defined as DateTime in Lexicon In AVEVA Engineering the lists will display a date picker for DateTime attributes The date and time format is displayed and entered according to regional settings The column filters in Tags lists are specialised for DateTime attributes we vaNEo sy meu rays nn header here to group by that column Approval Date Identification L Tag q Prefix L gt D1201 E aF c 4 juni 2013 E ma ti on to fr l s E 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 F 3456789 E 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
247. eried using the command Q DABACON AVAIL 5 10 2 Dabacon Index Tables The use of Dabacon index tables has been extended to speed up selection by Hull object type code element type UDET or UDA value 5 11 Units of Measure This enhancement enables Outfitting to store attribute data in standard units and perform conversions as appropriate The system handles this automatically dependent on the units and also stores appropriate information with parameterised attributes to enable them to be handled A new dynamic UNIPAR attribute has been added to all catalogue elements with PARA attributes namely SCOM SPRF JOIN and FITT and to all design elements with DESP attributes It isa hidden VISI FALSE integer array attribute that may not be listed or queried and holds the set of WORD unit values corresponding tothe dimensions of the values in a sibling PARA or DESP attribute 5 12 Unicode Storage of Name and Text Attributes Marine Outfitting and Marine Drafting code will handle Unicode strings Administrators may have chosen to convert all DBs which do not contain Hull data to Unicode as part of their upgrade process or may decide for each DB whether and when to upgrade manually and perform this upgrade using Reconfigure as in the example above 5 13 DRAFT Line style World Hierarchy System line style widths are now stored in the system database for consistency throughout a project and are initially set to ISO defaults Thin 0
248. ernally created surface before importing it to the database Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager Affected Programs None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 123 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 5 Surface Manager Compare Surfaces Surface manager has a function which can compare surfaces in Tribon M3SP6 and AVEVA Marine 12 1 To create the input from Tribon M3SP6 there is a program sj708 that intersects a surface and writes a text file with sample points that can be read by Surface Manager compare function To get the program sj708 please contact regional support representatives Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 124 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 13 AVEVA Space Management Description Space Management is a new application that can be used to create and manage an automatic subdivision of a ship into spaces Space Management can also be used for analysis planning monitoring and follow up on space arrangements generated for different purposes such as e SOLAS classification of compartments e Design Zones e Compartmentation and stability assessment e Sub contractors subdivision e Production Planning e Painting areas e Fire Noise Thermal insulation plans e Etc Space arrangements can be reused in all other modelling disciplines and as the design evolves spaces can be interrogated regarding all objects
249. escription In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 two old style dialogs have been modernised The first one is used in the Modify Dimension Presentation function to select a layout for the arrows and text placement j S EENE x 1842 1 E The second one is used in the Tools Model View Explode to set the Panel status i e control if stiffeners flanges etc should stay on panel or be part of the explode process m Include v Stiffener Jv Flange V Pillar Ok V Bracket Cancel Benefits Improved user interface Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 268 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 11 Render Fill styled Items First 12 1 SP4 Description When creating fillstyles especially solid fill the fillstyle evaluation might obscure other entities on the display This depends on the order in which the content of the drawing is rendered and occurs for all entities that are rendered before the fill style This order depends primarily on the colour of the fillstyle and secondarily on traversal order for that colour something that has not been possible to control by user In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 it is possible to force fill styled contours to be rendered before any other entities in the drawing thus ensuring that they will not obscu
250. everal cycles to achieve the desired results Setup for Accepting Differences Note Before you can accept differences in Integrator you must ensure the necessary UDAs have been defined and you must have created and selected an appropriate GPSET This functionality requires some UDAs to have been configured by an administrator The definitions are included in a PML function In Lexicon navigate toa writable database then display the Command Line then type integratorUDAs Note If you have been using an earlier trial version of the Accept Differences functionality you will need to run this function to add one of the UDA definitions Integrator stores its accepted difference information in GPSET objects Before using the functionality a suitable GPSET must have been selected Use the Integrator settings menu to create suitable GPWL and GPSET objects and to select a GPSET to write to The selected GPSET is serialised between sessions Integrator writes some attribute information to the GPWL and GPSET to differentiate them from other objects of the same types GPSETs are claimed like other objects and so each concurrent user will need to select their own GPSET in order to write accepted differences data during their session Accepted difference data from multiple GPSETs can be read during a single comparison Select Bar Menu gt Settings gt Accept Differences gt Select GPSET then in the dialogue right click on the preferred GPSET and
251. ework CTBCOPY TEMPLATE Default session comment 01 04 2010 16 31 44 gordon smith savework j CTBATEST DESI Initial 01 04 2010 16 32 06 gordon smith savework CTBATEST DESI Changes v Model Timeline Stamps Element History Key Refresh C highlight All Changes Since w Annotated Explorer Clicking the highlight checkbox at the bottom middle of the Add in see Model Changes Add in tabs and controls picture above has an immediate effect on all 3D graphical views if changes are currently displayed in the explorer tree Any changed elements that have graphical representation and are in the drawlist for any active view are highlighted in colour This uses the same customisable colour used by the Highlight element function available via right click menu in the standard Design Explorer Add in Unchecking the checkbox returns the graphical display to normal colouring All panes of the Model Changes Add in are updated and Explorer annotations and 3D graphical highlighting are reset in the following circumstances e further element changes e Savework Getwork and Refresh e User or MDB switch Following any of these operations the Refresh button must be clicked again in order to update the change highlighting Former DB Changes Dialog The functions of the Query gt DB Changes dialog in earlier versions of Hull amp Outfitting are still available via Utilities gt DB Listing This dialog is very similar the only difference being
252. existing hull mark can be modified after it has been projected The new projection dialog allows for subsequent adjustments directly after a hull mark is created It is also possible to pick and modify a hull mark previously created Hull Tools Curve gt Window Help Ri Functional Descriptions Default Parameters gt fea PPI Hull Dimensioning Coordinates and Angles Hull Text Part Checking Benefits The revised user interaction and possibility to modify a hull mark will enable much easier creation of hull marks The variable projection direction for a hull mark on a surface allows for non distorted texts also in areas with a high degree of curvature Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Miscellaneous Functions gt Hull Marks Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structure Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 166 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 167 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 9 Parts Collection by Manufacturing Package 12 1 SP4 Description With additions to the parts menu dialog in plate nesting it is now made possible to make the selection of plate parts based on a given manufacturing package as shown in the picture below o 2 Plate part selection ae F Keep parts a
253. ext and state Benefits This will improve productivity Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 328 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 62 Unicode Description Better support for Unicode i e non latin characters such as Korean Chinese and Japanese has been added to Marine Drafting Unicode characters may be used in the following areas e Drawing names e Values of Drafting s default variables e Dimension annotations e Model names except Hull e MarAPI nb Limited or no support for Unicode in Hull functions Benefits Supporting Unicode e g provides functionality to make annotations in the user s native language Compatibility Constraints There is limited Unicode support among the Hull Design specific functions For More Information Please see the Marine Drafting documentation Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 329 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 63 Restriction of Symbolic Views Description An additional option has been added to the function Symbolic View Planar Hull View Modify to change the restriction of an existing symbolic view The restriction could be e an existing contour e acontour created interactively or e an infinite line the user is asked to choose the side
254. f AVEVA Solutions Limited Subject to the user s rights as set out in the customisation manuals to amend PML software files contained in the PDMSUI and PDMSLIB folders and any configuration files the user may not reverse engineer decompile copy or adapt the software Neither the whole nor part of the software described in this publication may be incorporated into any third party software product machine or system withoutthe prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited save as permitted by law Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions ofthe respective software licences and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries All rights reserved AVEVA shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party s intellectual property rights where such breach results from a user s modification of the AVEVA software or associated docum entation AVEVA Solutions Limited High Cross Madingley Road Cambridge CB3 OHB United Kingdom Trademark AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks
255. f pressure is psi and the value of the attribute PRESS is 23psi one can use scplin press to use the value of the attribute in annotation this will produce the value of the attribute in the current units 23 If the units are desired the withunit keyword can be used scplin press withunit will give the result in the annotation text as 23psi The following screenshot shows annotation where the withunit keyword is used 1J1 12 Shape Data PIPELINE 232 x Name SCTUBING 2 of SCSEGM Text scplin bore E ActType SCTUB Area 0 Arrive 1 Borearray Crfarray v This shows the same annotation without using the withunit keyword 12in Shape Data PIPELINE 232 x Name SCTUBING 2 of SCSEGM Text scplin bore withunit Actlype Area 0 Arrive 1 Borearray Crfarray v For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Appendices Attribute Presentation Notation Affected Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 399 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 400 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 20 Publish Diagrams Data to AVEVA NET Description This version of AVEVA Diagrams has new functionality to publish Diagrams data to AVEVA NET Publishing can be done on individual pages in a diagram This will make the diagram and the schematics data on the diagram available i
256. fined by Specified axes Create local coordinate axes 0 0 707107 0 707107 Selecting this option will provide a dialog where an arbitrary Cartesian coordinate system can be specified The user entered coordinates are normalized and adjusted to ensure the axes are orthogonal To ensure a right handed system is defined the z axis may require negation If the user coordinates can be used to form a system the resulting system is displayed as edits are made Clicking ok will switch the view to one defined by the calculated axes Benefits Makes definition and fairing of planar curves easier when they are not located in a principal plane Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 79 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 80 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 14 Corrugated RSOs Description Corrugated bulkheads with stools created in Surface amp Compartment using the Corrugation or Stool tab in the Internal Surfaces dialog now has an extended representation which closes the design loop between Surface amp Compartment and Structural Design for these RSOs As previous a parametrically defined bulkhead will be stored in the model but alongside it a geometric identical co
257. for current question from existing SPEC Question Answer path If no items fit to the answer then system put message in log that SPCO can not be found Otherwise system will continue search until it find correct SPCO If SPCO is found then the system warn the user about the SPRE change For More Information See User Guide Diagrams Utilities Batch Job Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 414 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 27 Changes to Upgrade Drawing Functionality Description Previously after Upgrade Drawing was executed either automatically on open or manually from the Tools menu it was not possible to cancel the operation However it was possible to close the drawing before the upgrade was completed and this caused an exception Now a progress bar is shown during Upgrade Drawing and the operation can be safely cancelled Upgrade Drawing Processing shapes on drawing D_RO2CO9 123 Cea Also appropriate messages are added to the message log on operations start and cancel finish Message Shape Connection DB element Page Time Upgrade document D_RO2CO9 completed 426 shapes processed 201 updated 0 failed 11 42 51 Upgrade document D_RO2C03 starting 11 42 03 Message Shape Connection DB element Page Time QU parade document D_RO2CO9 stoppet 225 shape s processed 85 updated 0 failed 11 41 14 Upgrade document D_F02C09 starting
258. fore 2007 or for MicroStation DGN v7 format As noted elsewhere see section 4 2 3 it is recommended that Latin filenames are used 20 15 Improved Drawing Feature Export These changes should result in a much more usable drawing and smaller file sizes The main improvements for the 3 formats are e User defined Line styles defined with PATDEF and PATREP but not PATNAM e Fill Styles export in native format hatch entities for all system defined styles 1 30 this includes the new ones see section 20 1 The following limitations apply e Draft s intelligent blanking primitives are not exported e User defined line styles with Glyphs and line pictures are not supported e Only built in line patterns are supported at present for layer definitions not the full range of configurable line patterns Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 356 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 20 16 Configurable DXF amp DWG Export Improvements also include e Symbols and Logos are exported as Nested Blocks differentially scaled symbols are supported e Overlays and Design Elements are exported as Nested Symbols e Ellipse is exported as an entity AcDbEllipse e Layers can be defined and exported new switches control their use for example rules can create new layers set their colour assign elements to layers by type However colour bylayer is not used for objects in the DXF DWG file e Text Alignment has been im
259. form view Compatibility Constraints The old keyword ALLOW_TEXT_MODIFICATION_IN_FORM_RULE has been removed For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Miscellaneous Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 340 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 72 Open Drawing Description Lookup of drawings using the Open Drawing dialog can be slow in projects with a large number of drawings This functionality has been improved using a type index This means that from this release itis often preferable to have the Search all departments option checked The initial value of this option is controlled via the Marine Drafting default keyword SEARCH ALL DEPTS It is also advisable to give one or more initial characters before a wild card since it speeds up the search significantly Please note that if the search string starts with a wild card and Search all departments is not checked the performance will be as in previous release Benefits Lookup drawing view name and type in the Open Drawing dialog is much faster Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 341 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 73 Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas
260. function Part Checking it is possible to define labelled texts and symbols containing production information to be stored with the panel These labelled texts and symbols are now automatically added to the nest when a plate part affected by the labels is nested Benefits Enables the user to automatically handle the labelling texts and symbols in Nesting Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions Hull Tools Part Checking Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 194 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 35 Enhanced Dimensioning in Profile Sketches 12 1 SP3 Description The user may create end cut dimensioning for profile sketches by using methods in class KcsSketchDimensioning DimensionSet The default height of these created dimensioning textis 1 5 mm Keyword DIMENSIONING_TE XT_SIZE lt text size gt has now been added to the profile sketch restriction file SBH_SKETCH_RESTRICT so that the user may define the text height to any value Dimensioning of the length needed to be cut off by the end cut angle is automatically done in profile sketches Since the user may create such dimensioning himself a possibility has been added to turn off the automatic dimensioning The new keyword SUPPRESS_CUT_DIMENSIONING YES NO in the profile sketch rest
261. g The StatusProjectHandler pml object has been modified accordingly and comments show where customised code can be placed Customised code in the StatusProjectHandler pml object must be updated into the new version Code for a single object can generally be inserted in the do loops where indicated by comments The StatusData pmi object has also been updated to better handle arrays of objects It has additional members to hold arrays of data The previously provided single object members have been maintained and hold the values of the first elements of each equivalent array at the end of each operation so previously defined calling code will generally work as before Code using the Status Data pml object will generally continue to work but must be tested and reviewed to see if it can be made more efficient by using the array members For More Information please refer to the Status Control User Guide sections 5 1 5 2 8 1 and 8 3 4 6 Report Generation 4 6 1 New Reporting Add in Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 includes a new Reporting add in based on the reporting tool Xtrareports from DevExpress This can produce sophisticated formatted reports in a wide variety of formats and can also send the results to AVEVA NET via the Gateway It is available in Design Paragon Spooler Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 24 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Draft and Isodraft as well as in some of the Engineer product modules
262. g restrictions some of which were documented in previous versions of the Hull amp Outfitting Installation Guide apply 4 3 Units of Measure The inclusion of a much wider range of units means that most real attributes now have a default unit usually in SI units for storage and input output User can also set a default unit which must be of an appropriate type for input and output Input via the command line or GUI also allows the user to specify an alternative unit This does mean some unawidable changes to the command line so user applications using real attributes will need to be reviewed There are also minor changes to many of the user interface forms The new functions can also be accessed by the NET Units interface as detailed in the NET Customisation manual Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 17 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Customers who have written or adapted PML applications may need to check these They are explained in more detail in the 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual Several of the reference manuals have been updated to reflect these changes including Catalogue and Specifications Reference Manual Data Access Routine User Guide Database Management Reference Manual Design Reference Manual Creating The Model Design Reference Manual General Commands Lexicon Command Reference Software Customisation Guide Software Customisation Reference Manual 4 3 1 Supported Dimensions and Units In p
263. g specification Select the required component and click the OK button Note In the sample MAS project an example of a pipe penetration component can be found in category MACB2OR CHOOSE COUP DER Setting SPRE Current bore 0 00 From Spec SP DROFC Connections are OFF PBORI STYP SHOP Component Description _ 150 00 MACB200 TRUE PENETRATING WATERTIGHT BLKHD amp DECK PIECE 1 0254 ST37 0 150 00 M amp CB201 TRUE PENETRATION SLEEVE STRAIGHT THROUGH 1 0254 ST37 0 150 00 MACB202 TRUE PENETRATION SLEEVE HALF HALF 1 0254 ST37 0 150 00 MACB2OR TRUE PENETRATING WATERTIGHT BLKHD amp DECK PIECE SLOPING 1 0254 ST37 0 The Hole Management Definition form is displayed If a suitably configured piping component is selected it can be placed on either side of the penetrated plate an additional Flip Side button appears on the form Positioning X Offset 0 Y Offset 0 Rotation 0 Click on the Flip Side button to place the piping component on the other side of the penetrated plate Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 473 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The symbol for this component is represented on an isometric drawing as FITTINGS 2 PENETRATING WATERTIGHT BLKHD amp DECK 6 DRO7C MA 2 TECE SLOPING 1 0254 ST37 0 26 7 Standard Model Library This new function an early version of which was included in the Marine Outfitting Update 12 0 SP6 10 allows th
264. gle Square with a fillet radius e Insert Staircase Benefits Improved UI during geometry definition resulting entity is pre highlighted Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 317 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 51 Arc Quarter Points Description The UI for defining a point on arc periphery has been improved Instead of first indicating the arc and then keying in the angle the Combo Box in the Geometry toolbar is now used to give the angle Moreover by selecting the Indicate alternative in the Combo Box the point on the arc is defined as the periphery point closest to the arc indication Periphery points close to one of the four cardinal directions will snap to the corresponding quarter points 0 90 180 and 270 degrees Benefits Easy way of defining arc periphery points and in particular the quarter points Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Format Geometry mode 2D points Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 318 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 52 New Definition of Line Segment Direction Length Description When creating a Polyline a new way of defining a segment has been implemented namel
265. gn Function Overview Functions in the XML Menu Export Structural Design Export Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 137 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 6 Patran Interface 12 1 SP2 Description An interface to the pre and postprocessor Patran has been created Via the menu item Analysis Export FE Model to Patran PCL FE models can now be exported as Patran session files using the Patran Command Language Processing this file in Patran will create the geometry materials and element properties and store them in the Patran database for further pre processing and analysis Benefits This interface provides a direct link to Patran and Nastran Compatibility Constraints None Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 138 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 7New Options when Creating Envelopes Description The function Envelope has been updated with an option to define an envelope as an axis parallel box in space The dialogue has changed as shown below E Envelopes Envelopes Boundaries Limits _ENV_BOX MAR TENV MART cyl CYL2 _RSO_1DECK RSO_2DECK RSO_3DECK RASO_4DECK RSO_5DECK RSO_BRSO1 _RSO_BRSO2 BEN PRENA lt gt lt M gt Ka Optional Point in Envelope Generate from Box Box from GP Min Point Max Point 5000 3
266. gn items to them Compatibility Constraints Coordinate system entities are not stored in the database until an optional upgrade is done After this upgrade the database is no longer compatible with 12 1 SP2 or earlier versions For More Information See User Guide Interfaces Mechanical Equipment Interface Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Mechanical Equipment Interface Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 456 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 AVEVA Outfitting Design Applications 26 1 CSV Import Function 12 1 SP3 CSV import function used at 12 1 as Equipment Import has been deployed across Piping HVAC and Cable Tray applications Import is found under the utilities menu in each application Import Equipment has changed to Import Equipment Data and the following are added for the other disciplines Import Pipe Data Import Cable Tray Data Import HVAC Data Several other data validation checks are performed for the new application of the utility For more information See User Guide Equipment Import Equipment Data Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 457 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 2 Equipment 26 2 1 Equipment Interface Modification The ability to modify imported mechanical equipment models in the form of creating and positioning nozzles and design points has been added For more information See User Guide Equipment Create Equip
267. gt SAMLAPTOP LAP Connection On On On Uninitialised Off On Administered By Adm LOCAL Adm HUB Adm LOCAL Adm LOCAL Adm HUB Description SAM central hub Ed satellite Martin satellite Offline location Sample satellite on laptop Change Primary Location By selecting a number of databases and a location it is possible to change all those databases to be primary to the selected location Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 47 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Database Distribution Database Distribution Name Type DB Number Location Description HUB CAM A lt DB gt ADMIN ASLCONFIG DESI 7596 IPROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt ADMIN PADD PADD 7203 IPROJECTHUB unset GES Ee S A S lt DB gt ASSOCIASSOC DESI 7598 IPROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt CATS CATA CATA 7161 IPROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt CATS DESI DESI 7160 IPROJECTHUB unset JcDB gt _CATS PADD____ PabD 762 __ PROJECTHUB unset J o o O cDB DEMOMDES Desi 7130 _ PRoJecTHuB unset fe o cDB gt DEMO PADD AD a a PROVECTHUB unset of lt DB gt EQUI DESI DESI 7145 PROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt EQUIEQUITMPL DESI 7015 PROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt EQUIPADD PADD 7146 PROJECTHUB unset o o lt DB gt HANGER DES esi 7110 PROJECTHUB unset of lt DB gt HANGER PADD PADD 7111 PROJECTHUB unset lt DB gt HVAC DESI DESI 7120 IPROJECT
268. guration notably the location of folders for project databases and user workspace Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 15 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 4 General System Changes 4 1 Access Platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL 12 1 SP4 The application for Access platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL as developed at 12 0 and 12 1 has been removed It has been replaced at this release with the primitive based capability available at Vantage Marine 11 6 4 2 Unicode Character Handling Earlier versions of Hull amp Outfitting handled textual data such as element names textual attributes and file names in a manner specific to the various supported character sets used in supported languages This applied to most of the input output and storage This has now changed all textual information in Hull amp Outfitting is represented as Unicode Unicode is a computing industry standard for the consistent encoding representation and handling of text expressed in most of the world s writing systems Developed in conjunction with the Universal Character Set standard and published in book form as The Unicode Standard the latest version of Unicode consists of a repertoire of more than 109 000 characters covering 93 scripts For more details please see http en wikipedia org wiki Unicode Unicode can be implemented using different character encodings The Hull amp Outfitting Internal Format for string data is Unicode UTF 8 fo
269. handle insert model will of course not give a correct result for hidden line view Here all models must be considered in order to achieve the proper result For hidden line views you will not see any performance improvement The exchange model function will actually go ahead and update but give you a warning Benefits Improved performance when inserting a few outfitting models into existing views Possibility to exchange single outfitting models Compatibility Constraints None You will see the performance improvement also in old drawings For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 293 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 31 Autotagging 12 1 SP3 Description The Autotagging functionality found in Outfitting draft is now available in Marine Drafting Benefits Autotagging helps you to automatically label design elements according to user defined rules Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information See User Guide Outfitting Draft Labelling Autotagging Affected Programs Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 294 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 32 Databank for Drawing Forms 12 1 SP3 Description The databank for drawing forms can now optionally be pointed out by a new marine environment variable SBD_FORM If this variable is not defined S
270. have their claims released as they will be available at the HUB 2 10 2 Offline Locations Global supports Offline locations therefore we cannot assume that the Hub has a Global connection to that location Offline locations do not support distributed Extracts but can support stand alone extract families It will not be possible to co ordinate the upgrade from another location if Offline locations are used Offline locations are relatively independent and can be treated as such 2 11 International Characters Unicode New databases created at Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 will by default use the Unicode character set for textual attributes and names see section 5 1 However no upgrade is required for older databases they will be handled according to the project character set as defined in Admin PROJECT CHARSET or PROJECT MBCHARSET commands They will also be converted according to this setting if they are reconfigured so itis important that it is set correctly In cases where an extended range of characters is needed Reconfigure may be used to convert a legacy database to a Unicode encoded database In the following example legacy DICT databases used to hold UDA and UDET names are reconfigured to be Unicode encoded using Admin 12 1 FROM DB MASTER DICT O FILE c DICT1 c DICT2 CFCOPY ALL ECONFIG SESSIONS J DH Hy ROM FILE e DICT1 c DICT2 O DB MASTER DICT RECONFIG
271. he following macros from Command Window M PMLLIB assembly data assembly_adp_library_acc txt for projects with metric units M PMLLIB assembly data assembly_adp _ library_imperial_acc txt for projects with imperial units Benefits Possible to make plain and condensed assembly parts lists reduced by unnecessary information This is of particularly interest for parts lists presented as tables in drawings with limited area Compatibility Constraints Some PML functions stored in PMLLIB assembly userfunctions have changed their required arguments The PML functions located in the subdirectory userfunctions are meant for users to customise If such customisation has been made or if additional customised PML functions are added a survey of the functional arguments is required This is valid only for PML functions used by the parts list handling i e following files are changed as described below assycog pmlfnc assycomment pmlfnc assydesc pmlfnec assymg pmlfnc assyname pmlfnec assyposn pmlifne assyptype pmlfnc assygqty pmlfnc assyweight pmlfnec If you have your own variants of the files above or added your own functions you need to make sure that the first argument earlier passed as DBREF now is of the type ASSYPART Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 244 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Old style define function assyPtypes elemRefe is DBREF asi
272. her methods return the names of the current Configuration Compare Colours Category and Rule Set The methods setComparisonCategory getReportCheckPosition setReportCheckPosition getCompareNoHierarchy setCompareNoHierarchy and compareStrictlyLimited have been deprecated and will now return an error if called A new PML method has also been provided to allow individual objects to be coloured on the Diagram Viewer This could be used for example to colour the diagram according to user defined criteria such as status values For more information refer to section 7 of the Integrator User Guide Reduced Information when using Comparison Categories The behaviour of the Compare Report in response to Comparison Category settings has been changed When a category of difference is switched off relevant rows in the Compare Report lower Data panel will no longer be shown Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 366 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 3 Compare Update Additional Filter Fields 12 1 SP3 Compare Update has additional filter fields to add a PML expression e g for status values Expressions can be added by the administrator to the configurations and by the end user at run time r Compare Update Configuration Wizard Step 4 of 5 Define Source Filter s Add attribute filter s to limit data from source Engineering Database e g DESC Contains PUMP Attribute Filter Combine With AND OR At
273. her with other components equipment and nozzles connected to it which form a constrained network The new form appears with four tabs Element to Move CE vio Distance Through Clearance Towards Parameters Origin Origin Distance 0 00mm Direction D WRT 100 B 1 B3 C in R Target Relative To No target The Distance tab moves an element a distance in a given direction The Through tab moves an element in a given direction until it reaches a point relative to a plane perpendicular tothe direction of movement through another point Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 443 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The Clearance tab moves an element ina given direction so that its obstruction volume or a P point is a given clearance from another element The clearance is measured in the same direction as the direction of movement The Towards tab moves an element a given distance in a direction specified in terms of another element For details please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide 25 3 Change highlighting and reversion This development provides improvements inthe management of change including that resulting from the use of extracts These changes fall into four categories e Enhanced sessions user interface to show the reason for each database session e Command syntax to revert an element or hierarchy of elements to a previous state e Imp
274. ht click and select Accept Differences a Navigate to SCFITT TEE 16385 1040 gt Navigate to TEE 24578 1581 Connections gt Unlink Select for Linking Accept missing element Disable matching Alternatively if the object is never to be matched then select Disable matching In the case of a tee connection where the connecting branch is not connected into the piping network at its other end the branch will also be accepted as missing or disabled for matching This allows for example drain connections not detailed on the P amp ID to be accepted in one operation ic Navigate to TEE 327 70 978 Select for Linking Accept missing element including connected branch Disable matching including connected branch To reverse acceptance of a difference right click and select Reject accepted differences ta Navigate to SCFITT TEE 16385 1040 fc Navigate to TEE 24578 1581 Connections Unlink Reject accepted differences To reverse acceptance of a missing element right click and select Reject acceptance of missing element 3 Navigate to VALV 32770 982 Select for Linking b Reject acceptance of missing element Disable matching To reverse a disabled match right click and select Enable matching Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 372 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Navigate to TEE 32770 978 Select for Linking gt Ena
275. iagrams if a schematic item is linked to the engineering item Cut Ne r tAl k Oen Fitter a GO Process Lines aif Manage EE Al a spt R Ei Bs ai DN Verca View Mly Reset Celt Fcc ie Lines Tat nen t t asheet z Reports Line Ge Previous ob Next Lines O8 Op z P Auto Sae Columns H Quick Report saina s Database Lists and Schedules Clipboard Records Datasheets Grid Actors Reporvng foo Mech Tage osx pote haso Powe Model Number Manufacturer Hazardous Asa Class Gas Group Tempernture Clans Ex Cussfioston Power Lood iW 2 Status Working Status Comment Zonet w n Zone w n Xe Zone 1 w n Zonet w n Zone 1 mw n Zone i we n Zonet we n Zot we n MC a Ce es E T Inquiry Number Quote Number Purchase Number Installation Drawing issued for check PUMP MAKER 001 Outdoors or Standby A1 51 2009 Templates are set up in Lexicon using the Datasheet Template Editor The templates are based on Excel format which allows for importing existing Excel templates and mapping attributes to the database It is possible to add free text fields on the datasheet templates that are not stored in the database User Defined Revision Schemas can be set up in Lexicon A Fev Test Cot A Lon Overatt T ugh Tan o Tan Th Mah or Diameter 27 Operating weight s 20 Degree ct Protection w u ep ni sheet Sheet Sheet Maw ati Pemes
276. icode characters in Teletype TTY mode but the Console Window can only display the characters which exist in its currently selected font Console fonts tend to be quite restrictive so you need to select a suitable one In the UK you will probably be restricted to Lucida Console or Consolas which will display European characters but not Asian characters etc 4 2 6 Graphical Output In general Hull amp Outfitting graphical output 2D and 3D allows only the use of the TrueType fonts set up in the Admin module This will allow you to display Unicode characters which are known to those fonts By default you get font 5 Arial Unicode MS which gives a large range of character sets Restrictions using Draft and Isodraft 2D Views For TrueType fonts the TrueType font selected must have the correct character set s present for the language s you want to use Arial Unicode MS has most but other TrueType fonts typically have a subset In this case foreign and mixed language strings will work correctly You can of course use fonts specific to a given language for Unicode characters in that language even if the font name itself is in a foreign character set It is recommended that you avoid using Hull amp Outfitting Wigwam fonts if possible It is not in general possible to have mixed language strings if you use them They are more complicated to setup and work more like 12 0 so are limited compared with TrueType The followin
277. in the Planar Hull and Curved Hull menus respectively For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 233 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 66 FRP Additions Description Laminate can be given not only for planar plates and stiffeners but also for flanges The old term GRP Glass fibre Reinforced Plastics has been replaced by the more general term FRP Fibre Reinforced Plastics As a consequence two attributes in the TIL input file when setting up FRP has been renamed PERCENT _OF_GLASS is now PERCENT OF _FIBER and GLASS_WEIGHT has been renamed to FABRIC_WEIGHT Benefits This development means better support for production with laminate technique Compatibility Constraints Old TIL input files for FRP settings must be modified adapting them to the renamed attributes For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup Customisation and Standards Fibre Reinforced Plastics Option FRP Definition of the FRP Object Laminate Plate Statement Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 234 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 67 Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input Data Description In the Tribon M series there is an option to convert Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input data for Seamgen Profgen and Cpangen This option
278. in the format of e g 1 10 1 2 9 1 9 12 8 100 2 92 as shown in picture below _ ol El Modify Sanaa Shell Stiffeners MART14 S3 General Profile End 1 End 2 Posno 100010160 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 3 GPS 4 Shrinkage 000 mm m Weld Depth Benefits When modifying several shell stiffeners the position numbers can be automatically numbered using a repetition term Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See the documentation Curved Modelling gt Users Guide Interactive gt Interactive Functions Curved Hull Menu gt The Model Submenu gt Modify gt Modifying Shell Stiffeners Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 179 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 21 Shell Plate Dialog Inside and Outside for Material Thickness 12 1 SP4 Description The default value of Mat Pos Side is now From Plate instead of empty Changing this value will also change the lables for thickness and laminate accordingly There is also a tool tip on the Mat Pos Side drop down explaining the current choice Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 180 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 22 Comment Statements Available via Statement Wizard 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to create edit and delete comment statements COM using the statement wizard
279. in to AVEVA Engineering Tags Click on AVEVA Net Gateway Setup menu in Admin Tab and the datasheet option will be now available A Publish to AVEVA Net E Configurations none Tags Location Reports Logging Options F Log Enabled Log File gt Staging Options Staging Ares A J Creste Trigger File V Output File per Object Restore Defaults Settings Apply Dismiss 3 Re implement any customisations that had been implemented in the original file An alternative approach is to replicate the Reports section under Tags module in the AvevaNetExportConfigAddin xml file in the current project folder location After copying the Reports section change the configuration name from Reports to Datasheets Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 434 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin lt Module name Tags gt lt Common gt lt ConfigStoragePath path C AVEVA P lant Projects12 1 5P2 Sample samdf1lts PublishToAvevaNet gt lt DefaultconfigPath path M PDMS Bui ld Debug AvevaNetConfig Defaults gt lt Common gt lt Deliverables gt lt Deliverable name Tags type NoncAD pi das cna al lal lt SchemaFi les ClassSchemaFi ePath PDMSEXE AvevaNetConf ig Schemas ClassMapping xsd ObjectSchemaFi 1 ePath PDMSEXE AvevaNetconfig Schemas ObjectMapping xsd gt lt Deliverable gt Change the name from Report
280. ine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 23 Damage Case Summary Table Description A summary of damage cases is now included in the loading condition intact condition report The table is included by default but there is an option for turning it off Benefits A concise way of reporting damage case results Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide nitial Design Hydrostatics Operator s Instructions Calculations Stability Calculations Damage Scenarios Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 90 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 24 MODU Wind Heeling Moments Description The IMO Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit method of calculating the wind force and moment on the structure has been implemented To use this feature all exposed above and under water elements must be defined as compartments and assigned to a special category with an identifier SL and name Sail The program assumes that the specified Structural permeability is the Shape Factor for these elements Also the wind moment must be set to the MODU wind moment in the Criteria file Benefits Allows stability assessment for MODU s Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide nitial Design Hydrostatics Major Tasks Rig Wind Heeling Moments in Initial Design Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrod
281. ine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The system line widths of THIN MEDIUM and THICK are now configurable in ADMIN using the new line style hierarchy in the system database By default they have been changed to standard values from the ISO 128 standard which specifies line widths of 0 18 0 25 0 35 0 5 0 7 1 0 1 4 amp 2 0 mm The values chosen for THIN MEDIUM and THICK are 0 25 0 35 and 0 7 mm rather than the former 0 22 0 5 amp 0 7 mm The Minimum pen line width formerly set by a gadget on the Plotting Options form no longer appears This is a parameter of the Plotcommand and is no longer required as the user has much better control of the widths A very low value will be treated as the minimum width allowed for the format specified PDF DWG etc These may vary or have some special meaning Note the line width resolution of PDF output is currently controlled by a reference printer which is either the user s default printer if there is one or the users screen resolution If the resolution of the said printer is 600dpi it will not be sufficient to show the difference in width of the example lines on AO One way to prevent this problem from occurring is to set a default printer with a higher resolution say 1200 dpi 20 5 User Defined Line Styles User defined line styles will no longer be converted to a multiple of 0 2mm Instead the precise width in mm specified by the user will be transferred directly to the export format 20
282. ines ts O esene Co O en romam OO O i emn re cits OOO O i imo feo OO O O mom peaneausnoononnn O fmm romam OO O i foom Gee SSS S C i uee reer O fwe eoma ier O fies Goes OOO O i foom romm O fon omnes OOOO O i on enonse O O en rn eater OO O i in fjera O O rrom peresan O O oeme isere OO O Oi ima en O O freona repartee wm The MDB s can be accessed by the system FREE user SYSTEM XXXXXX each has their own dedicated user as well There will be a full Project Description PDF file with each project which contains the details outlined in the table above plus the Teams and Users including passwords available in the project This can be found for the Marine MAR project at the projects installation location top level MARProjectDescription pdf and MASProjectDescription pdf Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 2 Upgrading from Previous Releases Please note that the full Upgrade documentation is available from the User Documentation index page Read Me First Upgrade 12 0 to 12 1 2 1 Moving to 12 1SP4 from Previous Releases 12 1 SP4 Mixing 12 1SP4 with prior software versions on the same databases is not appropriate such usage can cause database inconsistencies It is therefore strongly recommended though not mandatory to upgrade the project to 12 1SP4 level by running the optional upgrade provided with the 12 1SP4 installation By applying this upgrad
283. ing box calculations is a part of the Assembly ADP application Therefore this function will only work in Marine Drafting not in Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 254 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 12 POS attribute available for ASMBLY Elements Description The ASMBLY element has been given a POSition attribute The attribute is not yet used in any specific functionality but added for future purposes and to facilitate for some general draft functionality Benefits None Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 255 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 AVEVA Marine Drafting 19 1 Staggered Views 12 1 SP4 Description Staggered views are symbolic views in hull combined from a selection of restricted planes The definition of the staggered view is made using a RSO with faces representing each restricted plane of the view tobe defined Each plane within the view will be given the defined view depth and the main plane of the view is defined by selecting a face number within the RSO Component no in the dialogue below Below is shown two examples of symbolic views defined using a RSO The staggered view is creating in the second example below Create View Plane Limits Select Outfit Misc Name TRAE Scale 1 59 Plane x Y Zz 3points
284. ing modifying functions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 351 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 20 AVEVA Outfitting Draft A number of improvements have been made to Outfitting DRAFT and its associated applications 20 1 Extended Hatch Patterns This development has three components e An additional 12 system defined Fill Styles or patterns bringing the total to 30 These cover patterns such as brickwork and concrete and are shown in Fig 8 6 of the updated DRAFT User Guide e Creation of user defined Fill Styles has been enhanced to allow the use of non solid line styles Two new attributes have been added to HPATTErns see below These provide values for new Wigwam parameters As a result users can create very complicated patterns e The existing GUI allowing users to pick the system defined Fill Styles has been extended to include the 12 new ones This meant the provision of 12 new icon files In addition hatch and fill patterns are now exported to DXF as the appropriate entities rather than lines 20 2 Line Styles User defined LineStyle amp FillStyle elements have a system generated Style Number that should be unique within the MDB These attribute values are automatically created upon element creation However ifa DRAFT database containing a Style
285. integrator openreport endif endif endhandle endif Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 378 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 AVEVA Diagrams 23 1 Ribbon User Interface in Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Description Diagrams has been redesigned to use the ribbon user interface Ala amp hve ls AVEVA Diagrams Project mar Pipe DiagTest3 Home Tools Manage Insert View Admin P A fa Dt Dimensioning Cut a iy it Define A O Draw amp FillColor E JA oh Bri ard amp Find p D Oc Wa Copy Undefine Fo coraph le connector X Connection Point LineColor Diswibute Bb Send Backward SF Layers Align Distribute panen A Text G Text Block Shadow g TB Group Q Arrow Pipe Instrument Refresh Check ont Paragraph p H Nozzle Spec E Paste Ng Release lt Diagram P amp D Clipboard Object Text Tools Shape Arrange Editing Snap amp Glue i ic Shapes lt Pr B R Ban K Br a a R Ba H A R R BR R B R R R R a Fiter P Bectica x Search for e 2 SCEQUI53 SCEQUI 54 More Shapes gt _ Be Quick Shapes HO Offine instruments r a BE Cables Sample_Equi a Diagrams E Instrumentation ines H E Instrumentation loops l 24122 2613 a Area shapes i SCGROU Project_Templates i SCGROU Project_Stencils E SCGROU Piping Diagram
286. ion Programs Description The production programs are not updating any data in design databases DESI anymore Furthermore some objects previously stored in manufacturing databases MANU are not stored at all Bracket panels have until now been split and stored as plate parts in MANU The brackets pointing at that bracket panel have been stored without geometry but with a reference to the bracket panel plate part From now on the information stored in the bracket panel plate part is copied into the bracket plate part and the bracket panel plate part will no longer be stored Sub panel plate parts have until now been split and stored as plate parts in MANU Since the main panel plate parts are either referring to a single sub plate or to two or more sub plates and the main panel plate parts are built up by these parts there is no need to have the sub panel parts stored in MANU When creating bending templates for a curved plate previously the sight plane and sight line plane were stored in the plate in DESI This information will from now on be stored in the plate templates in MANU When creating plate jigs for curved panels previously the calculated assembly plane and some additional information about the orientation of the plate jigs were stored in the curved panel in DESI From now on this information is stored in the plate jigs in MANU When creating jig pillars for curved panels previously the jig pillar was stored in DESI The jig
287. ions Ltd 336 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 68 Curved Panel Holes in Input Model Description Curved panels presented using the function Input model now displays holes defined to be marked with a dashed line type Benefits The model display reflects the design more correctly Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 337 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 69 Base Line Position Ruler Description The Base Line ruler is always located at zero height in the ship But there are other constructions ships where it would benefit if this ruler could be located at another height To be able to control this a new default keyword BASE_LINE_POSITION has been added By assigning a height to this keyword the base line in the project can be set to another default position If not given the height zero will be applied Affected functions are e Dimension gt 3D gt Distance to Plane gt Leader gt 4 BL e Dimension gt 3D gt Distance to Plane gt Box gt 4 BL e Annotate gt Position Ruler gt Base Line Benefits Makes it possible to have different Base line and take automatic measure from that Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Soluti
288. ions like holes fittings and subtraction of primitives to modify the outer contour Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 465 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The Model Editor can be used to modify the shape of the trace line The interactive support to create or split this new element is implemented in the existing functions for bent panels Benefits Bent panel element now support all necessary operations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Structures Structural Design Bent Panels Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Outfitting 26 4 2 Steelwork Connectivity Upgrade The user interface for connecting structural elements has been improved in various places to use event driven graphics EDG interaction In addition several operations now also work on GENSEC elements including curved members and UNDO is now available for some functions In particular a Connect Ends check box has been added to the form for creating Curved Section GENSEC elements This check box allows the user to specify whether they wish to connect the ends ifa suitable start or end point is selected Curved Section Create Methods rProrre ee V Connect Ends Minor changes apply to creation of straight and curved members connection and disconnection and several operations related to joints For details please refer to the Structural User Guide When regenerating the support e g by
289. ip prismatic and water plane area coefficients This analysis is available both in Surface Manager and Space Management Space Management The calculation of hydrostatic parameters is activated by using the Space Management function Calc Hydrostatic Parameters When activating the dialogue below is presented to the user ANCHS1 ANCHS2 ANCHS3 ANCHS4 JKIDECK JKIHULL Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 116 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Select a surface or envelope and enter one or more drafts separated by commas The calculation is made on a closed volume If anon closed surface is selected then the function tries to close the surface using the given drafts The result of the calculation is presented as a table in the current drawing An example of such table is shown below Hydrostatics data LPP Beam Draft Displacement LCB VCB CB Midship area CM Waterplane area LCF cP cw m m m cu m m m sq m sq m m 175 000 32 000 8 000 42114 531 100 894 4 142 0 940 258 657 1 010 5662 366 98 399 0 930 1 011 175 000 32 000 8 500 44956 266 100 715 4 402 0 944 274 997 1 011 5705 333 97 726 0 934 1 019 175 000 32 000 9 000 47820 518 100 514 4 662 0 949 291 337 1 012 5752 193 96 978 0 938 1 027 175 000 32 000 9 500 50708 807 100 290 4 923 0 953 307 677 1 012 5801 144 96 175 0 942 1 036 Surface Manager To activate this function in Surface Manager right click on the surface in the tree browser and select Calculat
290. ired and can be deleted Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 21 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin o Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or replaced by standard functions If quantities have been stored in mixed units with a UDA recording the unit for each e Set the UUNIT for any UDAs e Set the dimensions to numeric e g UNITS NUMERIC TEMPERATURE e Output a file with the attribute values with the value from the unit UDA appended e Check the format of the value plus unit conforms to new input format rules e f necessary edit the file with a text editor or script to achieve this e Read the file back in e Set current units as preferred e g UNITS DEGF TEMPERATURE e Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer required and can be deleted e Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or replaced by standard functions If quantities have been stored in mixed units with custom and practice being the only record of the unit which is hopefully rarely the case e For the short term set the dimensions to NUMERIC e Plan to move to more rigorous use of units probably employing a combination of the techniques above 4 3 4 Units set up for Hull and Drafting In AVEVA Marine Hull and Marine Drafting applications the set up for Units differs from the Units setup in Outfitting Presentation
291. isations for Nesting Defaults Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Nesting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 175 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 17 Resorting Manufacturing Data 12 1 SP4 Description There are two new functions for resorting reordering production items in the manufacturing database Collections of production items can be moved and stored in a different manufacturing package and in a different database within the current MDB The functions are available via context menus activated from the manufacturing tree view e The function Resort all manufacturing items collects all production items within the manufacturing database and eventually moves the production items into new manufacturing packages The selection of manufacturing package is made using the rules attached on each manufacturing packages e The function Resort manufacturing items collects all production items within a manufacturing package and eventually moves the collected production items into new manufacturing packages During the resorting operation the rules on manufacturing packages are evaluated If a manufacturing parts is missing a corresponding design element then the production items itself is used to find an appropriate manufacturing package Benefits The ability to resort the production items within the manufacturing database has been improved Compatibility Constraints None For More Info
292. it easier to get information about a graphical entity in a drawing Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 311 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 46 General Note Description The General Note function is extended by multiple lines feature and a new Options dialog Text Source Key in Indicate from Model Info End symbol E Multiple lines Benefits More user friendly way of creating general notes Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 312 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 47 Choose Projection Description The Choose Projection dialog has been re designed T 5 Point vector e It can be displayed by clicking on the Projection button in the Insert gt Model dialog Collected Models So far 312 Block Zone Wid It is also displayed during drag amp drop from an Explorer tree when choosing to drop an element into a new view or by choosing the Tools gt Model View gt Choose Projection menu function Benefits This re designed dialog provides a more modern and attractive user experience The choose projection step during the Insert Model process
293. it in milliseconds for a multiple nest AUTONEST_STOP_SINGLE The time limit in milliseconds for a single nest Benefits Improved configuration possibilities Compatibility Constraints Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 221 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Initialisations for Nesting Defaults Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 222 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 57 Nesting Plug In Interface Description In the Nesting Plug In Interface additional parameters have been added to some of the interface modules The new parameters have been defined as Nesting Defaults Benefits The new parameters will make it easier to control any external pattern generator Compatibility Constraints The new parameters must be added in all applications using the Plug In Interface For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Nesting Plug In Plug In Interface and Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Initialisations for Nesting Defaults Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 223 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 58 Storing Changes after Running Product
294. itional Debug Information about PML Applications 6 8 1 Help About 6 8 2 PML Alert 6 9 Infragistics Toolkit Administration 7 1 GUI Improvements 7 2 Lexicon 7 2 1 New Lexicon Graphical View 7 2 2 UDA Lists of Values 7 2 3 Database Views 7 2 4 General 7 3 Admin GUI Changes for Global 7 3 1 Global Support for Linked Documents 7 3 2 Database Distribution Form 7 3 3 Creation of an Event without Times 7 3 4 Remote File Details in Admin 7 3 5 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions 7 4 Engineering ENGI Database 7 5 TAGS Module Definition Introduction to New Functionality AVEVA General Functionality 9 1 AVEVA Database Cache Service 12 1 SP3 9 1 1 Making Use of the Cache 9 2 Expanded Selvol Graph 12 1 SP3 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 32 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 38 39 39 39 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 43 44 44 46 48 48 49 49 49 50 51 51 51 52 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 Clean Up Orphan STALNK Elements 12 1 SP2 Performance Improvements in AVEVA Marine SetStart Method of NameSeq Object BLOCK Creation in Specific Database Stable Identification of Un named Hull Elements New Storage Model for Hull Objects Hull Specific Design Explorer Configuration Limited Unicode Support in Hull Design Improved Local Language Unicode Encoding Units of Measure Extended Range of Conversions Extract
295. ject 2 9 1 Locking the Project The project as a whole cannot be locked only individual locations however itis possible to lock all online locations from the HUB through Global To do this run the following command from the HUB LOCK AT lt location gt The HUB can be locked without the need for a daemon command using the command LOCK It is possible to confirm whether locations are locked by evaluating the return result from QUERY LOCK AT lt location gt 2 10 Extract Hierarchies It should not be necessary to change the extract hierarchy nor to consolidate data within extract hierarchies Therefore the System Administrator should not need to FLUSH ISSUE DROP data between extracts working extracts are an exception to this see below Nor should they need to Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin delete any extract families to leave only Masters However all extracts will need to be relocated toa single location although this does not need to be the HUB 2 10 1 Working Extracts The upgrade process will need to ensure that all data is up to date at the HUB where pre scan data checks will need to be made Working Extracts cannot be propagated as they are specific to a single location As a result all data MUST be flushed and claims released from the Working Extract into its parent This is only true for working extracts all other extracts do not need to be flushed or
296. l and b the evaluated text differs from the intelligent text For consistency reasons the choice Text value in the Modify Dimension dialog has been changed to Edit Dimension text Modify Dimension i Key in dimension text Options to switch to evaluated text j B 1842 1 _ Using the non persisting function to edit the dimensioning text To prevent the modified dimension text to be overwritten after a subsequent evaluation of the dimensioning itis now possible to remove the dimensioning from PADD before modifying it This is done by invoking the Remove Dimensioning from PADD subfunction in the Tools Inspect Drawing dialog the corresponding MarApi and Vitesse functions were introduced in 12 SP3 1 Removing the dimensioning from PADD makes it possible for the user to freely modify the dimensioning component without losing the changes when later using the Drafting Modify Dimension functions Move Dimension Line and Slant Witness Line There are two drawbacks with de persisting 1 2 The Drafting Modify Dimension functions Text Properties and Edit Dimension Text cannot be used The dimensioning loses its associativity Note also that de persisting a dimensioning component is NOT reversible Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 263 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 1 Recreate windows Options 2 List object Cancel 3
297. l Design settings Within general functions available in Hull Design or Marine Drafting e g Reporter Attribute addin or Query attribute command values will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system Within common marine applications such as Space Management and Assembly Planning all attributes will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system Within Outfitting specific functions presentation of hull attributes will follow the Outfitting Units system Input Format for Units in Marine Applications In Hull and Marine Drafting applications the input format can be SI or Imperial independent of the Units settings Units in Marine Upgrade and Migration No upgrade or unit conversion from AVEVA Marine 12 0 to 12 1 is required for Units in Hull and Drafting since core units have not been changed The unit settings including the default settings for Hull and Marine Drafting are the same in AVEVA Marine 12 1 as in AVEVA Marine 12 0 and in Tribon M3 4 4 Enhanced Password Protection Password protection was made more rigorous at Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 SP5 Additional checks have been at this release introduced to trap potential error conditions A confirmation dialog as shown below warns if a user is created with no password Confirm No password has been specified new user 2 will not be able to login Continue with creation Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 23 AVEVA Ma
298. l on Application Level Graphical Representation of Shell Plates Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 94 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 2 Folders in the HCMWLD 12 1 SP4 Description Folders have been added below the surfaces in the node HCMWLD of the database browser The folders contain all plates profiles seams and curves that are associated with the surface The folder names are shown in the picture below a HCMWLD HCMWLD2 Fa CSURPX RHRN_PX En CSURPX HULL_PX gt Cplates Cprofs H Cseams 1465 Ccurves Benefits Easier to find information Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 3 Save Work in Inithull 12 1 SP4 Description If objects are updated using the Inithull software the user is now asked if Save Work shall be done at exit Previously the Save Work was done automatically Benefits The user can select to leave Inithull without saving changed objects Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Initialization Utility Program Inithull Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 96 AVEVA Marine
299. ld piping BRAN cable trays and CTRAY cable trays can be supported by the same cable tray support using the Add Rack function as usual gt 26 10 2 Automatic generation of pads There is a new application default to turn the auto generation of pads on or off the default is on If the setting is on pads are created when using a cursor based creation method CURSOR or CLEARANCE with a PANEL or HPLATE element identified The section type is checked and a suitably shaped pad chosen appropriate to the section type For example triangular shapes are used for angle and square rectangular for flat bar A new Modify pad size button on the Modify Section form enables the user to change the dimensions of an existing pad In Paragon the default value for the Automatic Pads option can be set On or Off in the MDS Admin Data form under the top bar menu Modify gt MDS Application Defaults 26 10 3 Updating client project defaults Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 482 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin From time to time new or updated component standards will become available in the MDS catalogue Where users are maintaining their own application defaults databases these changes will not be immediately available because they need to be added to the database A new upgrade tool allows the MDS administrator to update existing standards or add new ones This is useful for users upgrading from a p
300. le e Possible to select only part of a surface to export e Mirror surfaces in the centre line plane e Supports the most commonly spread formats IGES SAT DML STEP AP203 Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager Tools and Functions Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 115 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 12 1 Surface Analysis 12 1 SP3 Description Functions have been added to Space Management and to Surface Manager to analyse the hydrostatic parameters of a surface or to do tank capacity analysis on a compartment arrangement The added functions are not complete and not intended for productive use but are available for evaluation and to give comments for further development For this reason all documentation is currently only within this release note In final versions it will be part of all official documentation 12 1 1 Surface analysis Surface analysis can be used on surfaces that are closed or can be closed by a plane The analysis will calculate physical properties of closed volumes to use for the stability analysis There are two analyses available hydrostatic parameters and tank capacities Hydrostatic parameters Given a surface and drafts hydrostatic properties can be obtained for the surface e Displacement e Centre of buoyancy e Centre of floatation e Midship area e Water plane area e Block midsh
301. le Sketch and List and the Profile Cutting Interface programs normally create generic files and mounting data files Some customers do not need these files Two new keyword with the purpose to turn off writing of generic files and mounting data files have been invented The following keywords should be included in the file defined by SBH_PROF_RESTRICT PGEN YES NO When PGEN is set to NO generic files will not be created by Profile Sketch and List On the other hand when PGEN is set to YES or when the keyword is omitted generic files and mounting data files will be written CGEN YES NO When CGEN is set to NO creation of generic files and mounting data files by Profile Cutting Interface will be turned off Generic files and mounting data files will be written when the keyword is omitted or set to YES Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup Customisation and Standards Setup for Production Set Up for Profile Production Restriction File Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 183 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 25 Turn Off Profile Bending Sketch 12 1 SP4 Description When the Profile Sketch and List program draws shell stiffeners inverse bending sketches are included as a part of the drawing Some customers do not need the inverse bending sketches Neither do they need the small a
302. lined profiles is via the Environment Variable SBH_PROFPT ADJUST However automatic bevel selection va SBH_BEVEL SETS will always be the first choice Benefits Enables the user to control the position of inclined profiles curved as well as planar Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See also User Guide Hull Model Concept Run Mode Control Control on Application Level Reference Point of Profile Section Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 207 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 46 Compensation for Shell Plate Thickness Description For each shell profile an additional trace is calculated considering the actual surface of shell plates over which the profile extends This may be important in areas of heaw curvature along the profile trace if the profile and shell plates are located on the same side of the moulded surface and in particular in areas with thick plates In Inithull it is possible to specify per surface whether to compensate for shell plate thickness This setting is done separately for planar panels and shell profiles Benefits This development means that views will be more accurately drawn and production output such as profile sketches and weight and centre of gravity calculations will be more accurate Compatibility Constraints For a project first created in an earlier AVEVA Marine relea
303. ll as the bending machine maximum material length MML The Pipe Stock Length is set up in the Pipe Data Table type PDAELE using Paragon the data elements of that table now have a field PStLen for pipe stock length It may be queried using q PStLen on a pipe data table element New Pseudo attributes enable the pipe stock length of a particular implied tube to be queried q ATST for Arrive Tube Stock Length or q LTST for Leave Tube Stock Length The production checks perform two tests on each pipe piece e Compare the pipe piece length with the stock length for that tube spec If the piece is longer the test will fail regardless of bending requirements e Compare the pipe piece length with the maximum pipe length for the bending machine assigned to this branch or pipe If it exceeds the machine defined value the test will fail These two tests will be performed in the order above and in addition to any other tests such as wall thickness corrosion etc The user will be notified of the success or the reason for the failure 26 3 9 Material search for Pipe Bending Machine setup A Search button has been added to allow the user to search for the appropriate material from all SMTE in catalogue or SOLI in the Property database with Filters if required 26 4 Structures 26 4 1 New Bent Panel 12 1 SP4 Description When creating bent panels in Outfitting a new element BPANEL can be used The new element supports operat
304. llected in one selection Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 105 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 13 Blocks and Panels from Tree View Description Like some other functions within Hull Design the Panel Scope of a Selection can now also be defined by picking blocks or panels via a tree view dialog in addition to the existing picking from the picture Benefits Tree view available for picking blocks and panel for the Panel Scope Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 106 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 14 Set up of a Project to Use Free Naming Description Today the environment variable SBH_FREE_SEAMPROF_NAMES is used to control if a project is set in free naming mode or not From now on this has to be set using the InitHull application Benefits It will no longer be possible to change this setting if seams or shell profiles have been created ina project Compatibility Constraints The variable will still be used as a last resort for determining whether the project allows free naming However as soon as the hull reference object has been recreated in InitH
305. lled sa021 exe for this purpose sa021 sourcedb lt dbname gt sourcedir lt dir gt targetdir lt dir gt Example Convert the databanks in a native Tribon M3 project to Tribon Model Index databanks sa021 sourcedir c m3projects testproj targetdir c tmi This will convert all databanks in the directory given by sourcedir to Tribon Model Index databanks and store them in the directory given by the targetdir option Please contact your local AVEVA representative to get a copy of the sa021 utility Please note that this is a Tribon program and must be copied to and executed in the Tribon bin directory for example C Tribon M3 bin Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 359 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 AVEVA Schematic 3D Integrator Integrator has been extensively updated since its first release at 12 0 some of the developments noted below were first introduced in the Schematics Update Release at 12 0 SP6 8 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 360 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 1 Compare Update Scope by Destination 12 1 SP4 Compare Update provides a new Scope by Destination capability alongside the existing scope now renamed as Scope by Source Scope by Source provides the capability to synchronise populations of objects It takes as its scope the set of objects of chosen type from the source database and looks for matching objects in the destination dat
306. low is presented to the user Select a Space world and compartment arrangement The tank report will be added to the current drawing with calculated properties presented in tables An example of such tables is shown below WB Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Ballast tank FR212 FR242 1016 5315 731 5448 625 186 013 10 153 1025 000 Ballast tank FR105 FR131 888 420 910 630 98 300 1 500 1025 000 Ballast tank FR105 FR131 888 420 910 630 98 300 1 500 1025 000 GR Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Grain cargo FR105 FR131 11469 102 10608 919 98 300 10 941 925 000 Grain cargo FR78 FR105 14096 393 13039 163 75 775 9 481 925 000 Grain cargo FR184 9 FR212 12860452 11895 918 165 668 9 755 925 000 Grain cargo FR52 FR78 13545 625 12529 703 53 267 9 499 925 000 Grain cargo FR131 FR158 14096 640 13039 392 120 825 9 481 925 000 FW Compartment Position Volume Weight LCG VCG Density frame cu m ton m m kg cu m Fresh water tank FR105 FR131 164 235 164 235 98 300 1 673 1000 000 Fresh water tank FR105 FR131 164 235 164 235 98 300 1 673 1000 000 Benefits Analysis tools available to provide analysis where needed will shorten design time Compatibility Constraints Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 128 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin None For more information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Space Management
307. lready in menu F Include already nested plate parts in search Plate part name ER Plate part quality v Plate part thickness 12 Additional search criteria Panel name D Black name Assembly name Manuf t Benefits Options to limit the search to a manufacturing package for finding the plate parts that are interesting for the current nest job Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting Nesting System Application Functions Functions Overview Nesting Functions Parts Menu Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting application Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 168 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 10 Automatic Generation of Parts using Right Click 12 1 SP4 Description The automatic generation of parts is normally made using the Hull PPI for selection and then background processing to actually create the parts with all production features An additional possibility typically used to check the production output is added by right clicking on the object from which parts shall be generated as illustrated by picture below Trim Extend Fill Style Navigate gt ER1 FR27_4 Activate Deactivate Apply and Deactivate Create Plate gt Generate Parts The automatic part generation is made within the current process and the results can be vi
308. lref Nulref Nulref Nulref Nulref Nulre Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 392 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 14 Improved Copy paste Capability 12 1 SP2 The capability of copying and pasting diagrams data between diagrams has been improved substantially In this release it is possible to copy any shape within a single diagrams and paste it into another diagram together with the entire database structure and all its attributes Copying can be done between diagrams in a single project but also between different projects and instances of AVEVA Diagrams A AVEVA Diagrams Project mar Pipe Hydraulic_Oil A File Edit View Inset Format Tools PAID Object Data Shape Window Help Deana kanane PECL Kosa ae K l DE k e ODD Aness EE gt SCGROU Project Temetstes g SCGROU Project_Stencts 7 5G SCGROU Pping Diagrama Degrems aan aan t View Insert Format Tools P amp ID Object Data Shape Window Help D Tenas one wa N vna baa ne jah W EPEA EITA ET D ScOuG Fue On Sys EI gt age Detout jiz B bole lire sets OP Ma TO ot sa 2 E SCDIAG Lub_Of Sy D SCDIAG Firash P S H i E har 5 9 SCGROU HVAC Digrams H 7 2g Scerou pea E sceau aru soo i sceaui sc Hosoo7 E Sceau sc Fos0s SCENGINE Sc Foxe SCEQUI sc Fosos SCEQUI Sc FoeG06 SCPUMP sc F0900 SceauI sc Fosc0s SCEQUI sc Fo9009 SCeQUI Sc Fos010 sceauiseFoan Iiis
309. lue for Name Sequence Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Assembly POS Attribute e Line widths in Draft widths of thin medium and thick lines now stored in system database The upgrade tool puts an upgrade number in the databases indicating the level to which they have been upgraded This makes it easy to detect on opening whether a database has or has not been upgraded This upgrade number will also be used by the Reconfigure process 2 5 Database Version Control The upgrade version number is used to verify that the versions of the database and the software that accesses them are compatible During application start up databases are checked against the software access may be restricted according to the following table Database Upgrade Version Pre 12 1 12 1 1 Future e g 12 2 Max Open Mode Pre 12 1 es x T x 12 1 1 rk w x Future teg azz RO R w This control ensures that AVEVA software that opens a database is compatible with the contents of that database and thereby prevents accidental data corruption It also ensures that data intended for use with one software version is not modified by a newer incompatible software version X indicates no access however versions earlier than 12 1 do not make this check so cannot detect a database upgraded to 12 1 or later 2 6 Part Upgrades Outside the Framework These are independent of other non f
310. lutions Ltd 497 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin DIAREF ARRAY OF DIAGRAM REFERENCES Ej Detail u z I abel Tasks IAREF Schematic Pi aD chematic Pipes Edit Text Text label1 Data Binding NewDataSet DIAREF Schema Format String i Fes DIAREF Schematic E DPREMA Schematic S DPREMI Schei DIAREF Schematic Pipes Angle S DIMPMA Schematic ReportFooter one band per report Summary SA DTMPMI Schematic S FLUR Schematic Pipes E FUNC Schematic Pipes A Ee E INPRTR Schematic Clauto width E ISPE Schematic Pipes ene Sb LNTP Schematic Pipes i E NAME Schematic Pi 47 C Can Shrink i C Multiline Word Wrap Anchor Vertically Formatting Rules Quick Reporting Handling of Grouping Where grouping is applied in the search results grid the group layout result will not be maintained when a quick report is generated This is because e This would lead to an inconsistency with quick reporting functionality in Instrumentation e Different layouts need to be maintained for use in the reporting tool for grouped and non grouped quick reports Note To enable group sorting right click on the search results grid column heading selecting Enable Group Sorting and then dragging the column heading of the attribute you wish to group by into the group area of the search results grid see example below Name LOCK a DESC a FUNC a PURP a BUIL
311. m Orig P amp ID Normal Op Min C 100 8 1 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 133 00 000 00 B 2 STABILIZER 400 A1 51 2003 236 00 0 00 150 A 3 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 123 00 0 00 1200 B 4 STABILIZER 200 A1 51 2003 236 00 0 00 1250 B 5 STABILIZER 250 A1 51 2003 236 00 0 00 180 B 7 STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 123 00 0 00 150 B 9 STABILIZER 50 A1 51 2003 45 00 0 00 N50 B 6 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 236 00 0 00 N00 B 8 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 23 00 0 00 140 B 10 STABILIZER 40 A1 51 2003 23 00 0 00 180 A 11 STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 23 00 00 C 13 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 N00 C 12 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 180 B 14 STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 N50 A 57 STABILIZER 11 51 2003 180 A 112 STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 M00 C 131 iC STABILIZER 100 A1 51 2003 00 C 121 IC STABILIZER JA1 51 2003 180 B 148 B STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 1830 6 77 1B STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 150 8 97 1B STABILIZER 50 A1 51 2003 150 B 63 B STABILIZER 150 A1 51 2003 00 8 82 B STABILIZER 100 A1 51 2003 26 67 140 B 101 1B STABILIZER 40 JA1 51 2003 80 A 118 JA STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 issued in Check Not Controlled 00 C 311 IC STABILIZER 400 A1 51 2003 Ga ee H00 C 211 IC STABILIZER 400 A1 51 2003 oe 130 B 144 JB STABILIZER 80 A1 51 2003 EE m Promote status has been changed Number of change J AVEVA Engineering Project SAM irre A Home Data Management View Admin Actions amp Cut a New SelectAll SK Clear Filters Ba Copy E Edit if Vertical
312. mbering C Obstruction CI Primary C Reference Summary Report to file Filename PDMSUSER My Report txt Other Changes to the Application e The old Clasher settings forms from Settings gt Clasher have been removed e The old Clasher form is removed but the Menu Utilities Clashes is still the same 26 9 Cable Design A number of enhancements have been made Of particular note is a new Manual Route Cable task that allows the user manually to create or modify a cable s route between its start and end references For details please refer to the Cable Design User Guide 26 9 1 Copy Cable 12 1 SP2 The Copy Cable form has been revised To copy acable select Create gt Copy gt Cable Elements from the main menu bar to display the Copy Cable window 26 9 2 Cable Tray Volume Converter 12 1 SP2 A new form enables the creation of Cableway branches from existing cable trays The form allows the user to select an existing tray and create volumes with dimensions extracted from the tray members The user can select the zone for creation of the new elements and set some cableway branch attributes using the same form Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 481 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 10 Multi Discipline Supports 26 10 1 Cable Tray Supports MDS can now support the new cable tray CTRAY elements as used in the Cable Design application A CTSUPP element is used instead of an ATTA O
313. me extent assumed a bevel type 10 Square butt welding The benefit here was that chamfer was taken in to consideration when such an edge was included in an abutting boundary When the option 99 was introduced to the CHAMFER_ADJUST default keyword this faulty way of handling edges without any bevel was removed This has caused problems when reusing old designs since the behaviour now is different In order to get this default behaviour back in older designs an environment variable SBH_DEFAULT_BEVEL has been introduced and should preferably be set to a tight butt bevel type that is defined in the bevel control object Behaviour when SBH_DEFAULT_ BEVEL is defined as a tight bevel code of type 10 Default behaviour Behaviour when SBH_DEFAULT_ BEVEL is defined as a tight bevel code of type 10 Benefits Old designs are still presented with correct chamfer information Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 203 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 43 Bevel for Shell Stiffener Ends Description The handling of automatic definition of bevel for shell stiffener ends has been harmonised with the corresponding functionality for planar panel profiles Therefore itis no longer controlled by the environment variable SBH_PROF_TIGHT but by settings in the
314. ment Create Primitives 26 2 2 Create Equipment Form The Create gt Equipment form has been redesigned with several enhancements e Equipment may be positioned using graphical picking e Attributes are input directly using the creation form rather than a sub form e UNDO is available e The form is resizable For details please refer to the Equipment User Guide Section 4 Name P1204B Position East s 12345 00mm Noth v 1280 00mm Up v 4364 00mm wrt i Attributes Description COMBI FLEX DN150 DN125 Function PUMP Design Code Paint Specification Inspection Schedule 26 3 Piping 26 3 1 Non standard Pipe Connections 12 1 SP4 This new feature allows the addition of an additional connection to pipe components enabling the user to add tappings or boss connections at any point on a pipe for a wide variety of purposes such as vents drains instrument connections The mechanism used is to position an extra ppoint PIPCA to which an additional branch is connected on a pipe component The PIPCA s stored in the database as a child of the component The connection is created by clicking Create gt Non standard Branch Connection Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 458 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Create Modify Delete Position Orientate Copy gt Site Zone Group From Standard Model Library System Hierarchy
315. ments to assembly This addin is enabled in Hull and Outfitting Design only for the purpose to facilitate multiple select Additionally the addin exposes a general function to an edit element such as create and delete Please note that although the addin is called Edit Elements it must never be used to edit any elements in Hull In Hull it is useful for listing members making selections etc Benefits Extended possibilities to make element selections for e g drag amp drop operations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Outfitting Design Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 253 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 11 Change Projection of an Assembly ADP Drawing View There are some improvements when using the Marine Drafting function Tools gt Model view gt Change Projection in an Assembly ADP drawing Before there was a problem that labels and bounding box were not updated to fit the new projection This is now taken care of If the drawing is of type Assembly ADP Drawing then the user will be asked if he wants to regenerate the labels and bounding box Limitations This will only work for drawings that are of the new drawing type Assembly ADP drawing Assembly ADP drawing generated in previous program versions will not be handled since they are of another type The utility doing the label and bound
316. meters and tank capacities Hydrostatic parameters Given a surface and drafts hydrostatic properties can be obtained for the surface e Displacement e Centre of buoyancy e Centre of floatation e Midship area e Water plane area e Block midship prismatic and water plane area coefficients This analysis is available both in Surface Manager and Space Management Space Management The calculation of hydrostatic parameters is activated by using the Space Management function Calc Hydrostatic Parameters When activating the dialogue below is presented to the user ANCHS1 ANCHS2 ANCHS3 ANCHS4 JKIDECK JKIHULL Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 126 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Select a surface or envelope and enter one or more drafts separated by commas The calculation is made on a closed volume If anon closed surface is selected then the function tries to close the surface using the given drafts The result of the calculation is presented as a table in the current drawing An example of such table is shown below Hydrostatics data LPP Beam Draft Displacement LCB VCB CB Midship area CM Waterplane area LCF cP cw m m m cu m m m sq m sq m m 175 000 32 000 8 000 42114 531 100 894 4 142 0 940 258 657 1 010 5662 366 98 399 0 930 1 011 175 000 32 000 8 500 44956 266 100 715 4 402 0 944 274 997 1 011 5705 333 97 726 0 934 1 019 175 000 32 000 9 000 47820 518 100 514 4 662 0 949 291 337 1 012 5752 1
317. mparison report for situations where the 3D and schematic models have a different level of detail or are functionally equivalent but do not match precisely Examples include vent and drain detail instrument connections and welded attachments Note that Integrator automatically ignores MDS trunnions but trunnions defined by other means may still be included in the comparison and so could be handled as described below The differences can be accepted and managed in the following ways and will not be flagged up thereafter in the comparison report 1 Accept Differences A pair of linked objects having differences such as attribute values sizes connections or sequence can be accepted as different 2 Accept Missing Element For unmatched objects such as a drain connection the corresponding elements can be accepted as missing Integrator will still match the object if it is added subsequently to the model 3 Disable Matching For objects that should not be matched ever such as a tee for a trunnion whether or not Integrator has currently matched them matching can be disabled All of these actions can be reversed and the differences will then revert to being flagged up in the comparison report Once a number of differences have been accepted it is necessary to redo the comparison in order to see the effects This in turn can change which objects are matched and thus offer more opportunities to accept differences and so the process may take s
318. ms of hull objects before making modifications to them l e when modifying a hull object e g a planar panel in an extract the application will implicitly try to claim the object to the extract Benefits Hull user does not need to make explicit extract claims Compatibility constraints None For more information Only noted here Affected programs Hull Design applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 63 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 14 Documentation A great many changes have been made to the documentation set for Hull and Outfitting 12 1 with all manuals updated Notable improvements to the documentation set include e Anew 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual e Manuals for new functions and products Design Reuse Space Management Surface Manager Report Designer Tags Isometric ADP e Major update for Lexicon manual e A new section on Event Driven Graphics in the Software Customisation Reference Manual A new index page gives access to the online help system which may also be accessed direct from the system using lt F1 gt as usual AVEVA Marine gt Design Hull Basic Features amp Concepts gt 3 Engineer Outfitting Detailed Design Manage Administration Model Concept EEEa Read Me First Assembly Planning In Dabacon Planar Modelling User Guide Factory Automation Space Management Curved Modelling User Guide Marine Migration Surface Manager Automatic Generation of Curved Parts Us
319. n Controls if invisible elements should be treated in the Delete By Area function or not Legal values No Do not treat invisible elements in the Delete By Area function Yes Treat invisible elements in the Delete By Area function It is also possible to change this condition while inside the Delete By Area function For this purpose the OPTION button has been enabled inthe multiple choice dialog in which the user selects the Restrict condition Keep inside or Keep outside Clicking the OPTIONS button here swaps the treat invisible geometry condition from invisibles ignored to invisibles captured and vice versa Delete By Area Benefits Improved productivity in the Restrict function Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 298 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Edit Delete By Area Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 299 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 36 Delete System Components 12 1 SP2 Description In Marine Drafting it has been possible to delete system components of a certain kind one by one or all in drawing In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP2 the user can also delete all system components of a certain kind within a specified subpicture view or subview System components of following kind are treated e Dimensioning
320. n See User Guide Design Design Reference Manual General Commands How to Use the Syntax Graphs Standard Syntax Graphs Selection lt selatt gt Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 52 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 3 Clean Up Orphan STALNK Elements 12 1 SP2 Description Deleting status controlled elements leaves orphan STALNK elements behind with their attribute CELREF reported as BADREF by Dice A new PML function has been added to fix this problem Execute stmcleanup on the command line to clean up all STALNKs with an invalid CELREF Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Status Control Status Pseudo Attributes and Commands Clean Up Orphan Status links Affected Programs All PDMS based applications Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 53 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 9 4 Performance Improvements in AVEVA Marine Description A number of improvements have been made to speed of functions and usability AVEVA Marine e In start up of AVEVA Marine the loading of DIl s have been improved to take less time e Many of the Addins will be loaded but they are only notifying the main process that they exist Data load by an Addin will take place when needed e New indexes are introduced in the database to speed up searching of different Marine objects such as panels profiles plate and profile parts nesting s For example
321. n AVEVA NET ee Ve woe une I Diagrams AO E SCDIAG Highlight Changes H Stencils ey Open ao sy Open read only H E Instrumentation E SCGROU HVAC Connected Diagrams E3 SCGROU Cable_0 Set Release Status H Equipments a BE Cc Publish to AVEVA Net H Diagrams Attributes E9 SCGROU Project New DA SCrmanil Oraiart Publish to AVEVA NET Select pages to export from drawing A1 51 2003 M Page 1 It is also possible to publish several diagrams using the Batch Job function and also to publish the diagrams while releasing the Diagrams data to 3D For More Information See User Guide Schematics Diagrams Utilities Publishing Data to AVEVA NET Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 401 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 21 Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority Support for line jumps has been introduced in the Auto Formatting Rules feature Two new format types have been added on the Format to Assign tab in the Auto Formatting Rule Details window e Add line jumps allows the user to specify the behaviour of the line when crossing another line shape It can be selected from a list of standard values Add line jumps Always to other v As page specifies Never Always oo to other e Line jumps style allows the user to specify the style of jump if the line is the one which should break It also can b
322. n Clips 12 1 SP4 164 15 8 Hull Marks User Interaction and Functionality 12 1 SP4 165 15 9 Parts Collection by Manufacturing Package 12 1 SP4 168 15 10 Automatic Generation of Parts using Right Click 12 1 SP4 169 15 11 Frame Selection in Bending Template 12 1 SP4 170 15 12 Cross bending Template Additions 12 1 SP4 171 15 13 New Options for Templates Marking 12 1 SP4 172 15 14 Enhanced Part Table in Nesting Sketch 12 1 SP4 173 15 15 Improved Burning Sketch 12 1 SP4 174 15 16 Direction Texts During Nesting 12 1 SP4 175 15 17 Resorting Manufacturing Data 12 1 SP4 176 15 18 Default Bracket Profile Position Number 12 1 SP4 177 15 19 Extended Curve Flange 12 1 SP4 178 15 20 Automatic Position Numbering for Shell Stiffener 12 1 SP4 179 15 21 Shell Plate Dialog Inside and Outside for Material Thickness 12 1 SP4 180 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 22 15 23 15 24 15 25 15 26 15 28 15 29 15 30 15 31 15 32 15 33 15 34 15 35 15 36 15 37 15 38 15 39 15 40 15 41 15 42 15 43 15 44 15 45 15 46 15 47 15 48 15 49 15 50 15 51 15 52 15 53 15 54 15 55 15 56 15 57 15 58 15 59 15 60 15 61 15 62 Comment Statements Available via Statement Wizard 12 1 SP4 Split Shell Stiffeners with RSO 12 1 SP4 Turn Off Profile Generic Data 12 1 SP4 Turn Off Profile Bending Sketch 12 1 SP4 Attachment Angles on Curved Plates 12 1 SP4 Interac
323. n data world APPLDW the library item is an APPLDA element in an APPDAR A similar form is used to modify these items Libraries Areas and Items are modified or deleted from a pop up menu on the same form C Toggle Name Description Library Environment _____ Modify Library Library Area Vehicles Delete Library Library Item Liquid Gas Tanker For full details please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide manual 26 8 Clash Utility enhancements The Clash utility uses a new form which shows all the options it uses a grid gadget for filtering and grouping and a 3D view of the clash with aid graphics Simple clipping navigation reporting and printing are also available Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 475 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Clashes DER Check IPIPES Clipping Check CE Clip Box 2000 00 Clashes 22 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report V Navigate Clash Item v Drag a column header here to group by that column No Clash 4 Type Clash item Obstructer a Clashed x Ya ZHCHOH A Ay v 15392 5 ka TEEM 15392 5 PLANS u 163924 TUBMB TUBIB TUBB 1639216 TUBB 163924 TUBMB 16392 5 TUBUB 153928 TUBB 16392 5 TUBIB 153925 TUBIB u 15392 5 TUBIP
324. n the Rule Details window now includes more options for format type a number of Ul enhancements have also been made to the Auto Formatting Rules windows e Diagram and Page References Pseudo attributes that return references to the diagram s and page s on which objects are shown have now been introduced for further types of objects for instance inline valves amp fittings This may help integration with other data sources such as Instrumentation e Fixed Shape Text and Label position For tube amp branch labels on Visio connectors when the option Use Control Handle is set and the text of a line is positioned using this the position will be kept when the line is split by inserting a component For all 2D shapes there is now anew Move label with 2D shapes setting in the Annotations section in Diagrams Options This allows the user to have labels with a fixed position for instance Equipment Data Block labels that will not move when the equipment item itself is being moved Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 424 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 AVEVA Engineering A new AVEVA Engineering product has been introduced with the release of AVEVA Plant and AVEVA Marine 12 1 This new product includes a new Tags module as well as anew ENGlIneering Dabacon database type designed and optimized for Engineering data The Engineering product also includes Schematic Model Manager which is no longer sold as a separat
325. nce to PADD has been further implemented Creation and modification of contours will now be persisted in most situations like e All Insert functions except Spline and Fillet e Modify Transform and Copy e All Modify Trim functions To Entity By Length Gap Cutout e All Modify Stretch functions Node Elbow By Polygon e Modify Chain and Dechain e Modify Fill Style e Tools Subpicture Regroup and Split However any persistence of contours must be explicit enabled by the user by setting the environment variable TB ENABLE PERSIST CONTOUR to Yes Benefits More drawing information persisted in PADD Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 326 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 60 Text Font Attributes Description The attributes Bold Underline and StrikeOut of texts using legacy system fonts will now be displayed properly Benefits This will improve graphic feedback Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 327 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 61 Dimming amp Checking of Menu Items Description The enabling and checking of menu items and toolbar buttons has now been implemented and will reflect the current cont
326. nd controls as shown below Model Timeline Stamps Element History Key Caio Only Changes At Model Changes Add in tabs and controls The tabbed pane condenses the following displays see over Model Timeline every session for every Design database in the current MDB ordered chronologically Stamps details of every stamp that records session numbers for all of the Design databases in the MDB Element History details of every database session in which the selected current element has changed Key static tree control with images colour and text explaining annotation of changes in the Explorer Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Fitter C User Bulletin B Design woRL Q SITE ATEST E7 ZONE ZONE1 CIVILS fa Ker ZONE ZONEI STEE IAL Time User 19 03 1998 10 48 06 07 01 1999 14 13 34 07 01 1999 14 13 34 lbr 14 07 1999 11 58 45 pm 14 07 1999 11 58 45 pm Reason savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework savework DB Type Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design Design 04 07 2000 14 19 12 pm 04 07 2000 14 19 12 pm 01 03 2010 13 44 47 bill housley 01 03 2010 13 44 47 bill housley 01 03 2010 13 44 47 bill housley 01 03 2010 13 44 47 bill housley 02 03
327. ndle Subpictures as SDB Files 12 1 SP3 285 Distance to RSO Dimension 12 1 SP3 286 Radius Diameter Dimensioning for Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 287 Remove Obsolete SDB Files 12 1 SP3 288 Layers for Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 289 List Drawings 12 1 SP3 290 Set Drawing Type during DXF DWG Import 12 1 SP3 291 Draw Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 293 Autotagging 12 1 SP3 294 Databank for Drawing Forms 12 1 SP3 295 KEEP_SESSION_FILES 12 1 SP2 296 Z021 12 1 SP2 297 The Restrict Function 12 1 SP2 298 Delete System Components 12 1 SP2 300 Multi line Dimension Texts 12 1 SP2 301 Marine Drafting Open Sheet 12 1 SP2 303 Marine System Font 12 1 SP2 304 Insert Text Shortcut Keys 12 1 SP2 305 Symbolic View Menu 306 Default Action at Start up 308 New Module Name 309 Drawing Export Formats 310 Navigate To 311 General Note 312 Choose Projection 313 Fill Styles 314 Symbol Files 316 Dynamic Highlighting 317 Arc Quarter Points 318 New Definition of Line Segment Direction Length 319 Simple Arithmetic in 2D Offset Input 320 Automatic Chaining of New Contours to Existing Ones 321 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 55 19 56 19 57 19 58 19 59 19 60 19 61 19 62 19 63 19 64 19 65 19 66 19 67 19 68 19 69 19 70 19 71 19 72 19 73 19 74 19 75 19 76 19 77 Dimensioning Ul Improvements Improved Dragging Technique Plane Reference Text in Distance To Pla
328. ne 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 18 Admin Settings vs User Settings It is now possible for customers to define and set up which settings should be Admin Settings and which settings should be possible for regular users to change The administrative set has the same format as the current version of diagrams options store but is located at a location which is write protected for the user but read write for administrators When an option in the administrative set has a ro value of the access attribute access ro this option s value will overwrite the value set in the user s options store and the option will be disabled greyed out in the Diagrams Options dialogue Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 398 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 19 Handling of Units in Annotations With the release of AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 some changes and enhancements have been made to the handling of Units In AVEVA Diagrams changes have been made to accommodate the new functionality and to allow presentation of values with or without units in shape text and annotations Some attributes with numeric values are now dimensioned and have associated units For example attribute PRESS of element of type SCPLIN currently has a dimension of type pressure and can have units of pressure psi bar etc All attributes that are dimensioned have current session units If the current session unit for the dimension o
329. ne Dimensioning Delete Last Entity Persisting Contours to PADD Text Font Attributes Dimming amp Checking of Menu Items Unicode Restriction of Symbolic Views Inspect Drawing Draw Assemblies RSO Default Colours RSO Enhancements in Insert Model Curved Panel Holes in Input Model Base Line Position Ruler Overlays Protection of the Drawing Form View Open Drawing Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas Marine NET API hull views Removing Default Variables TBSystemFonts Persisting of part level modifications in Linear Dimensions 20 AVEVA Outfitting Draft 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 Extended Hatch Patterns Line Styles Line Widths System Defined Line Styles User Defined Line Styles Minimum Line Width Plotting User Interface 20 7 1 DRAFT Plotting Options Form 20 7 2 DXF General Options 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 20 13 20 14 Enhanced Angular Dimensions Enhanced P line Picking Improved Performance of Extrusions Drawing Gridlines Intelligent Text Handling Enhancement Export to CAD Formats Support for Unicode Text Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 332 333 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 345 347 349 352 352 352 352 352 353 353 353 353 354 354 355 355 355 355 356 356 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 20 15 20 16 20 17 20 18 Improved Drawing Feature Export Configurable DXF amp DWG
330. ne drafting provided that VIEW element is given the correct SPPURP attribute of the view It must be set to PSKETCH or PASSMB In 12 1 SP3 we have made this easier by automatically setting this attribute to PASSMB when the user adds a pipe spool to the view via the Marine Drafting user interface for example with drag amp drop or via the search utility However you should not mix drawing of pipe spools and drawing of pipes in the same view If you draw pipes in a view where the SPPURP is PASSMB there is a side effect both the pipes and the pipe spools will show up in the drawing In other words the pipes will appear with double geometry This can have a strange effect if you try to pick p points in the drawing or if you are using the Model gt Exchange function Benefits It is now easier to draw pipe spools in any drawing Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 282 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 21 Automatic Drawing Production ADP 12 1 SP3 Description The General Automatic Drawing Production General ADP and Steelwork Detailing SD functionality found in Outfitting draft is now available in Marine Drafting Benefits General ADP automatically creates an annotated drawing from a specified part of the design SD creates drawings of steelwork sections with
331. nformation See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts Plane Panel Parts Set up of Program Environment Variables Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 177 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 19 Extended Curve Flange 12 1 SP4 Description Previously the extension of a curved flange modelled on a panel boundary defined by a surface and a displacement CORR was extended along the tangent of the boundary Now the curved flange is extended along a curve parallel to the surface fla cor PAN FLA COR SEP BLO JUMBO DT 101 XW FRS1 BOU SUR MAR Z 5000 SUR MAR COR 500 Z 2000 PLA MAT 11 MSI AFT NO 1 FLA PRO 10 160 12 CUR LIM 3 NO 1 Z1 1700 Z2 5300 f A j rA f J VA a f Jo Fi pf J Benefits The extended flange endpoints will be located on a distance from the surface which is equal to the panel boundary itis placed on Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design AVEVA Marine Structural Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 178 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 20 Automatic Position Numbering for Shell Stiffener 12 1 SP4 Description Position number definition for shell stiffeners is improved It is now possible to use incremental repetition term
332. ng built profiles there is a need for marking the flange and the web parts so that they may be correctly aligned to each other This may now be done by setting the new keyword BUILT_FLA_SHAPE in the GSD default file BUILT_FLA_SHAPE may be assigned three different values giving different options for the marking of the flange part BUILT_FLA_SHAPE THICKNESS will mark the flange with two parallel lines indicating the web thickness This is the default option BUILT_FLA_SHAPE HOOK will mark the flange with a hook BUILT_FLA_SHAPE HOOK_THICKNESS will result in a marking which is a combination of the thickness and hook marking where a line and the hook together indicate the web thickness The generic files created by the Plate Interface and the Profile Sketch and List programs will contain the new marking types FACE_PLATE_ALIGNMENT Benefits Increased accuracy when assembling built profile parts Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup Customisation and Standards Alignment Marking Marks for Assembly GSD GSD Customising Control of GSD s via a Default File Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 216 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 54 Mark Reference Plane on Both Sides of Profiles Description lf REFPLANE is defined in the ppanparts ip then reference plane markings will be added to pl
333. ng on an element Setting the flag false has the effect of disabling matching integrator integrator integrator integrator DisableMatching Name is STRING EnableMatching Name is STRING EnableMatching Name is STRING Flag is BOOLEAN EnableMatching Name is STRING Flag is BOOLEAN TncludeConnectedBranch is BOOLEAN The following methods can be used to return a report of all accepted differences as an array of strings or to print it out in the command window arrayOfStrings integratorSupportHandler acceptedDifferences integratorSupportHandler printAllAccepted Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 374 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 6 Design and Schematic Explorers Enhancements 12 1 SP3 The Design and Schematic explorers have new context menu options to navigate to linked or matched objects and the Schematic explorer in Design and Outfitting now has virtual folders for consistency with its presentation in Diagrams and Schematic Model Manager Objects can be linked by Schematic 3D Integrator or Compare Update Matched objects are not linked but have the same name there is no guarantee they will be of appropriate types This functionality is for schematic and 3D objects and does not currently extend to engineering objects There may be multiple linked pipes for pipelines whereas most types are linked one to one
334. ngs hole information about the penetrated item and information about the penetrating item Displays Managed Hole Report window The Managed Hole Report window displays the specified report Poneta The Peeing Danch hone 42 Pole Type h See a ER eimo 12 auz_sewoos OMI SEWOTAMWY x You can use grid column functions to sort and filter columns before printing or exporting the report Select Print Preview to view the report or select Export to Excel to export it Right click the Hole Associations list to display the following pop up menu Navigate to the Association the penetrated or the penetrating item single selection only Adds the selected holes and associated items Remove from 3D view Removes the selected holes and associated items Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 469 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Focus on Hole Zooms the 3D view to centre on the selected hole and zoom in Clipping is applied if it is enabled single selection only Export list to Excel Exports the report grid to Excel Shows a standard grid print preview for the report grid 26 5 6 Configuration of Hole Management Data Additional hole size properties on piping and HVAC components are used to control automatic hole dimensions If these properties are not provided the system uses hole management default sizes e g OD for pipe holes Hole Management Design and Catalogue data configuration is as describe
335. ning reflected e For asymmetric object with the geometry defined on PS the PS element will have the shorter name and the SB element will have a_R suffix e For asymmetric object with the geometry defined on SB the SB element will have the shorter name and the PS element will have a_R suffix Currently only planar panels can be symmetric and have their geometry defined on SB The Hurefl attribute will strictly answer the question Is the current element in its reflected position relative to where the geometry is defined This implies two things e Even anon symmetric element may have a Hurefl value of True e The Hurefl value True False and the element name with or without _R suffix will not always match Benefits There will be less confusion regarding element names for non symmetric objects and there will for certain always be an element with the object name as given by the user This solution is more intuitive and customised development may be simpler as well Still functionality using the Hurefl attribute e g weld detection will work properly Compatibility Constraints Objects generated in AVEVA Marine 12 0 that are valid on one side but with the geometry on the other must be recreated before the new rules for element name and Hurefl fully apply Note in particular that this applies to SB specific curved panels which internally have their geometry reflected to PS The objects are recreated via the Recreate functions
336. nition data They are not possible to bring in for updates or to recreate For More Information See user Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Curved Plates Interactive Jig Pillars Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 187 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 29 Hull Mark Update 12 1 SP3 Description Hull Marks are now stored in the data base as one object containing all relevant curves and plates All Hull Marks are stored below a node in the data base structure a Hull Mark world which needs to be defined prior to any definition of new Hull Marks The syntax of the command to create the Hull Mark world is NEW HMKWLD lt name gt DB lt team gt lt dbname gt Benefits A Hull Mark object is now acting as a container for all relevant hull mark information and can be used as any other objects e g to drag into the canvas for display Parts generated from Hull Marks are linked to the Hull Mark object Compatibility Constraints Old Hull Mark objects are not converted into the new format but can be used as before when e g marking on plate The naming of Hull Mark plate objects is changed They are now named in the following way lt Hull Mark name gt lt running number gt For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Miscellaneous Functions Hull Marks Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structure Design AVEVA Marine Det
337. not possible Yes Editing possible DRAW_RAW_PLATE_CORN Code for drawing the raw plate corners in the burning sketch No Do not draw Yes Draw MOVE_START_CONFIRM_OPPSITE Code for confirmation when a marking start is moved to a marking line valid only on the opposite side No No confirmation Yes Confirmation MARK_AUTO_OPPOSITE This default is now valid also in PLCM CUTSEQ_MIN_AREA Minimum area of plate for which cutting sequence information are added to the sketch ALL_STARTS_TYPE The type of starts to be treated when the start sequence is added in the burning sketch All starts All burning starts ALL_STARTS_COLOUR Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 220 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The colour for the start sequence information in the burning sketch ALL_STARTS_HEIGHT The text height for the start sequence in the burning sketch AUTONEST_ASSEMBLY_LEVEL The assembly level for the parts Ignored if zero AUTONEST_CUS TNAME_CTRL Customised part name control No Do not use customised part name Yes Use customised part name AUTONEST_PART_SELECTION The minimum area in mm2 for the parts to be nested large parts first If lt 0 the Parts are not nested by area AUTONEST_ROTATION_CTRL Rotation control No No control any rotation angle can be used Yes Only rotation angles which are a multiple of 90 degrees are used AUTONEST_STOP_MULTIPLE The time lim
338. nst Number of Changes J Changed Attributes 1 Attributes to be Updated m M a CEL C C a a A O orje pem fa OO C a a a B E E m tribute Details For More Information please refer to the new Compare Update User Guide 24 10 1 Enhanced Compare Update 12 1 SP2 Compare Update in Tags has been improved to allow Engineering Data to be both source and target for comparison This allows one list of engineering objects tobe compared against another A new configuration wizard will be delivered in a future service pack to fully support this capability In the meantime this capability can be provided only with specialist customisation Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 441 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 AVEVA Outfitting Module 25 1 Model Editor 25 1 1 Offset From Feature option This new option has been added to the popup menu for the following Model Editor modes Model Editor Equipment Editing Quick Pipe Routing and Pipe Component Modification Enter Value Align with Feature Offset From Feature Snap to Point Move Handle Cancel Selecting it gives the user a form to specify the offset and then pick the relevant feature Through Ppoint ote 500mm Offset 25 1 2 Structural primitives Primitives owned by structural elements can now be edited in a similar way to Equipment Editing with a right click on the selected item Edit Members of SUBSTRUCTURE
339. ntext menu of the Schematic Explorer Fitter Electrical v B Schematic WORL if SCGROU SAMPLE CABLDIA Instruments S SCGROU SAMPLE CABLDIA Diagrams B Scdiagrams SCDIAG 001 SCDIAG RU Highlight Changes gt Set Release Status Show Diagram f SCGROU SAMPLE BE i 4 SCGROU HVAC Di New S A gejl Q WA usersetings 6D A1 51 2003 Page 1 A1 51 2003 Page 1_ 3 lt A1 51 2003 Page 1 e EA RANA i 1 i 1 i 1 i ses 7 D4 O aooaa a et ame Target Session Db 7612 Session 932 Date 2011 08 29 User henrik hultin Base Session Db 7612 Session 929 Date 2011 08 29 User henrik hultin Element REF a Element Name Element Type H Compare Result a Modified Attributes A 4 23996 6082 A3B V 02 SCVALV New Element 23996 6084 SCTUBING 4 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 1 SCTUBING New Element p 23996 6088 A3B V 03 SCVALV New Element 23996 6090 SCTUBING 2 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 3 SCTUBING New Element J 4 23996 6092 A3B R 32 SCFITTING New Element F 23996 6094 SCTUBING 12 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 2 SCTUBING New Element 23996 6068 SCTUBING 2 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 3 SCTUBING 23996 6072 SCTUBING 1 of SCSEGMENT 1
340. nts and attributes as well as general descriptions of all attributes can be found in User Guide Database and Data Management Data Model Reference Manual Affected Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 189 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 190 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 31 Minimal Bending Templates 12 1 SP3 Description A new type of bending template shape has been introduced minimising the material needed for the template A minimal template has a free edge that is parallel to the one along the plate instead of a straight line The height of the template i e the distance between the edge along the plate and the opposite one is controlled by the new IP MINIMALTEMPLSHAPE Benefits End users have the ability to configure how the resulting templates should be produced and minimise the material consumption Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Curved Plates Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Bending Templates Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 191 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 32 Cutouts in Cross Bending Templates 12 1 SP3 Description Cutouts can now be generated in intersecting cross bending templates Creation of the cutouts is activated by setting the new IP THICKNESSOFTE
341. nu Caption CleanReferences Command Bars tra z Category Menubar G y Mode Menu Command AVEVA Marine AssemblyPlanning Clean amp D i l Context Menus 2 Menu DisplayStyle Default FindOutputContextMenu Hull General 3D_Points Menu leon C No Image or resource id specified AssemblyPlanningContextMenu Hull Gene amp Arc Menu KeyTip CleanReferences Hull General x Conic 5 Menu MenuToolUpdateOptions None oe Ribbon Line Menu Name CleanReferences Resource Files Polyline Menu Shortcut None a a cae tedText z pForma tid ToolipTite amp lnsert Menu amp Nodes 5 Menu Tannanta aa f gt m Benefits Remove invalid assembly references Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 250 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 9New Drawing Type for Assembly ADP Drawings There is a new drawing type in 12 1 Assembly ADP drawing dedicated for drawings created by the Assembly Automatic Document Production application You can see that there is a new drawing type in the open save drawing dialogues Open Drawing Hull weight amp centre of gravity drawing Hull part list drawing _ Hull profile sketch Hull nested profile sketch Hull plate j jigs drawing Hull 3 axis nesting sketch Hull receipt drawing subpicture individ
342. o current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 436 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 8 Tags The new Tags module provides an easy to use and powerful user interface for engineering users allowing them to work on Engineering Lists amp Schedules and related data Some of the more prominent features and functions of the Tags module are as follows Easy to use User Interface Familiar Microsoft Office 2010 like Ul See pictures overleaf List Editing Grid based editing of list data in the new ENGI database List views can be set up Project Wide by administrators It is also possible for regular users to create and use their own specialized layouts This includes grouping filtering and bulk editing capabilities Multi discipline concurrent engineering By using the new Distributed Attributes and Database Views mechanisms it is possible to allow true parallel work between different disciplines even on the same object Navigation In addition to the list editing it is also possible to navigate the engineering or system hierarchy to find and edit individual items Data Management functions A number of management functions such as Status Control Change Highlighting Attribute History and Extracts are available to manage the lifecycles of engineering objects Change Highlighting It is possible to highlight and report on changes made by different users and disciplines This also includes highlighting of changes made in diagrams Diagram view
343. ocal intranet is not set to Full Trust which means that programs may not be able to access resources on the local machine To overcome this the intranet security may be set to Full Trust though this means that any NET assembly may run Alternatively Full Trust may be given to a specified group of strongly named assemblies Trust levels may be set using the Microsoft Code Access Security Policy tool caspol For details please see http msdn microsoft com en us library cb6t8dtz v VS 90 aspx Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 14 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Serialization Please note that serialized settings of the user interface configuration are now saved in the following location on Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt username gt Local Settings Application Data Aveva and on Windows 7 C users lt username gt Appdata Local AVEVA 3 3 2 Microsoft Office amp Fonts AVEVA Marine 12 1 is supported with Office 2007 and Office 2010 The use of the 32 bit version of Office including Visio is recommended on both 32 and 64 bit Windows as issues have been encountered with the 64 bit version Excel Interoperability Import of data into a grid control requires an optional component from Microsoft Office This is not supplied with Hull amp Outfitting but is an installation option for Microsoft Office Please ensure that NET Programmability Support under Advanced customisation of applica
344. of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 4 SCTUBING Deleted Element p 23996 6074 SCFITTING 2 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 1 SCFITTING Deleted Element 23996 6076 SCTUBING 4 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 A3B B 1 SCTUBING Deleted Element 23996 6078 ASB V 02 SCVALV Deleted Element p 23996 6080 SCTUBING 2 of SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH 100 B 1 ASB B 4 SCTUBING Deleted Element 23996 2385 C1101 SCEQUIPMENT Modified Element FUNC 23996 4580 C1101 N4 SCNOZZLE Modified Element CATR p 23996 4755 P1502A SCEQUIPMENT Modified Element DESC Ready A1 51 2003 Pagel Note For this function fully to work with the data created by the Diagrams application it requires that SVG files are created for the relevant sessions This is affected by the Keep session files and Create SVG on Save Work settings in Diagrams Options as well as the possible use of the Release Diagram to 3D button Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 394 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For more information Only noted here Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 395 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 16 Connection between Instrument and Process Items Offline instrument Offline instrument adeys diysuonejoy aT ee edeys diysuoyejoy lt Process Line Valve Valve Process Line It is now possible to use Instrument Relationship Shapes to connect Offline in
345. of the line were the geometry is to be kept There is also an option to make a new view as the restricted view Note that this restriction is an addition to the restriction possible in the view create function with limitation in the principal axis The second tab Limits contains the limits Create View Plane Limits Select Outfit Misc Limits Minimum Maximum v Ponside Starboard aw Depth Before 100 000 Behind 100 000 Restriction It is possible to take away the restriction made in View modify by removing the tick for the restrict button Benefits Enables the view tobe restricted in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 330 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 331 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 64 Inspect Drawing Description In some cases text will not be displayed properly on drawings migrated from Tribon M3 to AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting 12 One reason could be that the codepage used to encode multibyte text has been changed to UTF 8 in AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting 12 The Inspect Drawing function has been extended with an option to correct such texts This new function displays a dialog box presenting a list containing all texts within the c
346. ompatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design gt Setup and Customisation gt Setup for Production gt The Restriction File gt Keywords in the General Section Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Profile Sketch and List and Profile Cutting Interface Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 197 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 38 Deprecated Environment Variable 12 1 SP2 Description The environment variable SBH_NO_IND_SYMPARTS is removed from the system Plate and profile parts generated from symmetrical structures are always stored individually with one instance on portside and one on starboard For More Information Only noted here Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 198 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 39 Holes in Brackets 12 1 SP2 Description It is now possible to define holes in brackets The available hole types to use is limited to standard holes Benefits You are able to create hole in Brackets Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Planar Modelling Deign Language of Hull Modelling Bracket Statement Common Input for Syntaxes 1 to 7 Affected Programs Hull Detailed Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 199 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 40 Labelled Texts 12 1 SP2 Description In Nesting the labelled texts have previously been
347. on Format for Units in Marine Applications Within Hull and Marine Drafting specific application functions values will be presented according to the Hull Drafting settings Attributes in Hull Initial Design are presented according to Initial Design settings Within general functions available in Hull Design or Marine Drafting e g Reporter Attribute addin or Query attribute command values will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system Within common marine applications such as Space Management and Assembly Planning all attributes will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system Within Outfitting specific functions presentation of hull attributes will follow the Outfitting Units system Input Format for Units in Marine Applications In Hull and Marine Drafting applications the input format can be Sl or Imperial independent of the Units settings Units in Marine Upgrade and Migration No upgrade or unit conversion from AVEVA Marine 12 0 to 12 1 is required for Units in Hull and Drafting since core units have not been changed The unit settings including the default settings for Hull and Marine Drafting are the same in AVEVA Marine 12 1 as in AVEVA Marine 12 0 and in Tribon M3 2 13 Schematics Functions Projects that are upgraded from Hull and Outfitting 12 0 or earlier need a suitable module definition in order to use the new Engineering functions in the new Tags product see above The data will n
348. ons Ltd 338 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 70 Overlays Description The ability to use overlays on a drawing has been added to Marine Drafting Overlays may take the form of external plot files plt or may be database elements An overlay sheet can be placed anywhere on the drawing sheet and can be of any size Any number of overlay sheets may be used on a drawing sheet Benefits Overlays have been made available to Marine Drafting and Hull Design Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Outfitting Draft Underlays and Overlays Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 339 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 71 Protection of the Drawing Form View Description In order to give Marine Drafting users better control of how to protect the contents in the drawing form view the Drafting keyword ALLOW_TEXT_MODIFICATION_IN_FORM_RULE has been replaced by the keyword ALLOW_MODIFICATION_IN_ FORM_VIEW Keyword ALLOW_MODIFICATION_IN_FORM_VIEW System default value No Explanation User can modify protection flag for contents in the drawing form view Legal values No Whole form view is protected from modification OnlyRuleBasedText Texts defined by rules can be modified Yes Contents of whole form view can be modified Benefits Better control of how to protect the contents in the drawing
349. ons from Edit Spec Atts and Edit CAT Atts to Show Spec Atts and Show CAT Atts The Create menus in Steel Work and Equipment have had the Specification menu restored moving the Specification World entry down to a submenu next to Create Specification The Modify menus have had the Specification entry restored i Create Modify Delete Window Help Copy 7 Catalogue Section i Category gt Specification gt World Selection Table Specification Part Text Draft Symbol Set Properties When modifying specifications some non piping specifications cannot be altered by the form Attempting to modify such a specification will put the form into read only mode as described above This form allows you to access various tasks which administer all aspects of a new Specification The current version is primarily intended for use with piping specifications and may not always be suitable for other specifications 28 3 3 Raw Plates in CATA The raw plate definition has been moved from the manufacturing database MANU to the catalogue CATA in the Catalogue World The raw plate elements are defined in Paragon using the PML script HullDefineRawPlates Input to the script is the file which previously was used to create the raw plates in MANU This change is beneficial for projects using Global 28 3 4 Unknown Ref on NAREF reports an error 12 1 SP2 Catalogue Data consistency ch
350. opyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 39 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin An additional button has been added to the PML alert dialog to allow extra information relevant to the alert to be saved to file Clicking the Save Support Info button will bring up a save file dialog and allow the user to save the extended information za n90d Parallel Eye Rotate a gt Ea Error Command Window 47 15 CP Syntax error x GLAD CES a In ine 1 of Macro c pdms macro1 mac tw rubbish Called from line 1 of Macro c pdms macro2 mac re Save Support Info Savc pdms macro1 mac 6 9 Infragistics Toolkit Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 uses an updated Infragistics Netadvantage toolkit version 10 3 for its GUI The filenames of the Infragistics DLLs no longer include the version number which will make future upgrades easier Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 40 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 7 Administration 7 1 GUI Improvements A number of features have been added to the GUI to improve its ease of use and make it more consistent with other modules For example Import from Excel Data for Admin elements such as users teams etc may now be imported reliably from Excel This has resulted in three changes in behaviour e Access Control Assistant ACA is no longer hidden during Import and Rollback operations e The Export and Import logging dialog no longer ha
351. or File Name gt TO lt id gt AS SUBE VALIDATE LOG lt log filename gt e Import every STEP file as Equipment and when the file contains assemblies create an additional Subequipment level Settings Import model as Equipment V Create SUBE level Command line IMP lt Root Directory or File Name gt TO lt id gt AS EQUI SUBEQUI VALIDATE LOG lt log filename gt Benefits Improved structure of imported model data Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Interfaces Import Model Graphical User Interface Affected Programs AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface Import Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 455 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 7 3 Import of Coordinate System Entities from STEP Files 12 1 SP3 Description A STEP file may include coordinate system entities that specify locations and orientations in three dimensional space Coordinate systems are normally used to define connection points placement of assemblies or to define any other positions and orientations that the exporting system has decided to include in the STEP file These coordinate systems entities are now imported and stored in the database together with the imported geometry Stored locations and orientations can be used directly or indirectly via P points Benefits These coordinate systems will make it much easier to position imported parts or to relate other desi
352. or HPREND and CPREND Elements 12 1 SP3 Description The PPOS attribute for planar panel profile ends HPREND and shell stiffener ends CPREND returns the event points in the end cut geometry Ppoints may be retrieved for the mouldside and the non mouldside of the web and for the top and lower side of the flange s The PPCOUNT attribute shows the total number of visible ppoints on the end cut The PPVI attribute returns a list of ppoint identity numbers with the following meaning e 1 25 on the web mould side e 26 50 on the web non mould side e 51 75 top side of first flange e 76 100 lower side of first flange e 101 125 top side of second flange e 126 150 lower side of second flange The PDIR attribute shows the direction in each ppoint Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull in Dabacon Hull Data in Dabacon Hull Geometry Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 98 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 6 Ppoints for HPLATE Elements 12 1 SP3 Description The PPOS attribute for planar panel plate elements HPLATE returns event points at plate corners There are 3 points for each corner one for each material side and one for the mould plane PPOS index e 0 49 contains points related to the material side generated by the value in the attribute DIST 1 e 50 99 contains points rel
353. orer is now shared with the Compare Update Utility and so can hold rules for comparing elements between design schematic and engineering databases A Rule Set holds all the Rule Groups for a particular pairing of database types For example the sample configuration has a default Rule Set for comparing Design database content against Schematic Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 376 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin database content You can add Rule Sets for other combinations of database types e g schematic and engineering for use with Compare Update Integrator Project Configuration Explorer C Mac projects bas1 21 basdflts SEE File Edit Insert f 7 Project Defaults Assign Action H Dictionaries Spec Queries i lt 9 Compare Colours Diets Rule Set Default Schematic Design RuleSet Assignee target o o ooo Rule Set Sample Engnesing Design Rues Value G in PIPELINE Engineering pipeline rules Build Action o an Compare Acton 77 peee ETS Mismatch Seveit_ warn EET ssign Action CCLASS Ba Assign Action DUTY CCLASS Ba Assign Action PSPE Attribute Value NUMBER of source MisnaichReret d Top level Rule Groups now have a source type which is the type of element for which they will be applied in place of the condition setting type of source For More Information please refer to the Integrator User Guide section 6 5 5 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd
354. ose found during AVEVA s extensive test programme The user documentation has been updated to suit each manual now has a revision sheet which gives a brief history of changes tothe manual 1 2 About this Bulletin This manual gives an overview of changes since the previous major release Hull and Outfitting 12 0 It is aimed primarily at users upgrading from that release those upgrading from earlier releases should also read the Hull and Outfitting 12 0 User Bulletin preferably the edition issued with Service Pack 6 This bulletin also covers many of the associated products supplied on the same DVD R These products fall into 3 families Engineer Design and Manage and these groupings within the Marine portfolio are reflected in this document Those aspects that are common between most of the products are generally covered in the first part of the document Significant changes to this document introduced at service pack 4 are indicated thus 12 1 SP4 1 3 Software Distribution and Installation 12 1 SP4 AVEVA Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 SP4 is supplied on a DVD R which self installs using standard Microsoft installation procedures The full software suite is usually loaded onto individual PCs running Windows with the license server and file loaded onto a networked Windows server Please note that this release requires AVEVA Licensing System ALS and an appropriate license it will not work with FlexMan Older versions of Hull
355. ossible to create or rename an element in an Engineering ENGI database to have the same name as any element in any Schematic SCHE Design DESI or Marine Production MANU database in the current MDB Similarly it is now possible to create or rename an element in any Schematic SCHE Design DESI or Production MANU database to have the same name as any element in any Engineering ENGI database in the current MDB 5 8 Flexibility of Data Organisation 5 8 1 Database Views Database views provide a way to consolidate data from elements and attributes distributed across databases in an MDB These views are set up by an administrator using the Database Views Editor and stored in the Lexicon DICT database in a Database View World DBVWWL D Users database views may also be saved a local settings file The Editor is currently available in the Lexicon and Tags modules under Display gt Database Views Editor A Database View uses a table to define a view of the data which may be derived from a single or multiple elements There is a row in the Database View table for each element of a particular type that meets the criteria defined by filters These filters use the same concept as the search grid If the criteria cannot be expressed using attribute filters itis also possible to define an expression for evaluation A row is present in the table only if all the filter criteria are met This is a very powerful technique which can
356. ould be used with caution on databases in an extract hierarchy since it could overwrite the wrong version of the file e No documents are deleted when a database is de allocated For this reason ALLOCATE will always overwrite any pre existing files e There is a strong likelihood that orphan linked documents will be left behind after databases have been merged backtracked de allocated or deleted 7 3 2 Database Distribution Form This new form helps visualise where databases are allocated and which location databases are primary This form provides additional functionality to change the primary location of a series of databases It is available from the Data menu in Admin Admin AVEVA PDMS Admin elements HA Admin Display Query Settings Utilities Project Data Help Remote Window i CE Change Management System Explorer ax Global E Inter DB Macros min elements Fiter C m Fiter O Extract Database Control is B System WORL B Gh Database Allocation Fa EERE 4 _ FR DatabaseDistribution F in Update Name ag E EEE lt TEAM gt ADMIN js i lt TEAM gt ASLADMIM ia Recover gt lt TEAM gt ASSOC E DEEN lt TEAM gt AVEVANE E n pe eames lt TEAM gt CABLE f Era saith lt TEAM gt CATADMII Be TEAM HVAC lt TFAM gt CATS Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 46 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin The Data Distribution form lists all Databases in the
357. our Description Instrument line Properties Dialog Custom Instrument line Properties Dialog Allow multiple Instrument loops references Flow direction symbol s stencil Flow direction symbol Reroute Shape text options GS SteelBlue GB Blueviolet EA Violet True True False Never feroute Select connector reroute style for newly created lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation User Bulletin Offline instrument options Instrumentation line options Actuator options Instrument relationship shape opl Equipment options Sub equipment Nozzle options Electrical connection options Cable options Multi cable options Off page connector incoming of Off page connector outgoing op gt HVAC line options HVAC fitting options Area shape options Benefits E Annotation styles group 01 E Default options Colour Released to 3D Colour Linked to 3D Colour HVAC line Properties Dialog Custom HVAC line Properties Dialog Description Flow direction symbol s stencil Flow direction symbol Reroute Shape text options Reroute GSS YellowGreen GS LimeGreen EA Violet True True Never reroute Select connector reroute style for newly created lines Newly created ducts or tubes can have routing style set to Never Reroute by default Compatibility Constraints None
358. pace Interrogation API 12 1 SP3 Description The Space Interrogation API aims to extend some of the functionality within the Space Management module by including a set of new Pseudo attributes These attributes can be used to retrieve information about particular spaces such as the closest face or adjoining spaces They can also find out details about an RSO s planar panel and its thickness Benefits e New SPMAS Attribute Finds the adjoining space of a given space based on a user defined point e New SPMCF Attribute Finds the closest face of a given space based on a user defined point e New SPMRSO Attribute Finds the RSO of a selected face e New RSOPP Attribute Finds the Planar panel of the selected RSO with a user defined point e New RSOPPT Attribute Finds the thickness of a planar panel from the selected RSO and point Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Space Management Basic Concepts Space Worlds and Space Arrangements Attributes Pseudo Attributes Affected Programs AVEVA Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 131 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 AVEVA Hull Structural Design 14 1 New Block Divide User Interface and Process 12 1 SP4 Description The Block Divide function has a new user interface based on a tree view Also the process is broken down in steps where all other functions are available between
359. pare the start and ending points of a new contour with the ones of existing contours structurally belonging to the same component as the created one If any of them coincides with the start ending points of the new contour it will be chained to the new contour Note that at most two contours can be chained to the new geometry one in the beginning and one in the end The criterion for an existing contour to be chained to the created one is thus e AUTO _CHAIN is set to Yes e The existing contour belongs to the same component as the created one e The existing contour is not closed e The start or ending points of the existing contour coincides zero tolerance with the start ending points of the created contour The Automatic Chain concept is implemented in the following functions e Insert Polyline e Insert Staircase Benefits This will improve productivity Instead of invoking the Modify Chain function as post action the chaining is performed automatically as new contours are created Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Miscellaneous Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 321 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 55 Dimensioning Ul Improvements Description A Reset button has been implemented in all dimension dialogs Clicking it will reset
360. parts are first bent and then welded together By setting the new ip WELD_BEFORE_BEND in the curved panel parts generation ip file cpanparts ip the lengths will be calculated to fit a manufacturing process where web and flange parts are first welded together and then bent Benefits Support for a manufacturing process where built profile parts are first welded together and then bent Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Automatic Generation of Curved Parts Release of Curved Parts for Production Set Up of Program Default File Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 210 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 49 Weight Unit in Profile Sketches Description It will now be possible to choose if the approximate weight of profiles should be presented in tons or kilograms in profile sketches This is accomplished by setting the new keyword WEIGHT_UNIT in the restriction file identified by the logical variable SBH_SKETCH_RESTRICT Possible settings are WEIGHT_UNIT KG and WEIGHT_UNIT TON where the latter setting is default Benefits More possibilities to customise output data Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Profile Manufacturing Production Output Profiles Automatic Generation of Profile Sketches Crea
361. pe For full details please refer to the Piping User Guide 26 3 6 Direct setting of Insulation Thickness amp Material This allows the piping designer to choose piping insulation of a given thickness and material rather than setting the temperature and spec for automatic selection New sample insulation specifications are provided as a basis on which users can base company and or project insulation specifications 26 3 7 Bending Machine NC Output A new option Bending Machine NC Output in the Utilities Menu allows users to save a file which contains the bending details of a specified list of pipe pieces To use this the current element must be a Site Zone Pipe Pipe Spool List PSLIST Pipe Spool PSPOOL Pipe Piece List PPLIST or a Pipe Piece PPIECE Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 463 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Find Bent Pipe Pieces in User Bulletin Bending machine simfor P1 Fitter the Pipe Pieces using Pipe Piece name All or part Bore Range Bending Machine All Search Results 25 found Name of Pipe Piece 15392 10766 15392 0792 16392 0794 15392 0796 15392 10798 15392 10800 15392 0802 16392 0804 15392 0806 15392 1 0808 15392 10810 1539210812 15392 0814 15392 0816 15392 10818 15392 10820 153921 0822 15392 0824 15392 0826 15392 10828 15392 10830 15392 0832 15392 0834 1
362. point that can accommodate a specified range of angles this is achieved by introducing a tolerance attribute OFFTOL on all types of P point in Paragon A PDIR pseudo attribute defines the actual direction which must be within the tolerance of the nominal direction e A Slope element or SLOELE in a Slope table or SLOTAB that can be referenced by the SLOREF of a SPEC PIPE or BRANCH to specify default minimum and maximum slope The introduction of these new concepts has no effect on existing Cats amp Specs or models The new features are used in Quick Pipe Routing and also for sloping existing orthogonal piping The Paragon GUI has been extended to cover Slope Tables The pipe creation form has an additional option for selecting from a list of slopes and the modify pipe form has the same option for setting branch values The older pipe and branch modification forms Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 462 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin have also been changed to include new options for slopes Note If the SLOREF attribute is set at pipe level it is automatically inherited by new branches The Model editor has been extensively revised to handle elbows as well as bends and the new P point options as well as adding slope options to the menus A new form can assist in applying a slope to an existing pipe including all the branches within it To display it navigate to an existing pipe and select Modify gt Pipe Slo
363. ported items is unique within this file Note It is still not possible to create a multi level assembly hierarchy in a single STEP file Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 453 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 7 1 Tesselation Cache 12 1 SP4 Description An option has been added to create a facetted approximation of the model data during the import and to store it with the model Settings Import model as Equipment v les m t Y V Save existing nozzles on import Options olerance 0 1 20mm 10 00mm Enable tessellation cache The used tolerance should be in the interval 0 1mm and 20 0mm default value is the arc tolerance When the default tolerance is changed and the approximation is no longer valid a facetted model with the new tolerance will be created that replaces the stored one Benefits Better performance Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Interfaces Import Model Graphical User Interface Import Affected Programs AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface Import Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 454 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 7 2 Import Subequipments 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possible to import model data at the SUBE level There are two new options e Import every STEP file as Subequipment Settings Import model as Subequipment Command line IMP lt Root Directory
364. press Select GPSET There is also an option to create a GPSET here The currently selected GPSET is indicated in the status bar of this dialogue Select Bar Menu gt Settings gt Accept Differences gt Create GPWL then in the dialogue enter a name and select the database in which to create the GPWL Select Bar Menu gt Settings gt Accept Differences gt Create GPSET then in the dialogue enter a name and select the GPWL in which to create the GPSET A new compare colour for Accepted Differences has been added to the configuration The out of the box colour for a new configuration file has been set to colour 120 which is a shade of green Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 370 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin cenied ence S20 How to Accept Differences Accepted differences are shown with a small green icon in the report and have their own colour for the graphical views Ep 3D Elements E Piping BR PIPE 100 WORK 2102 E BRAN 100 WORK 2102 B1 pq VALV DRO7C V 07 F BRAN 100 WORK 2102 B2 Schematic Element E SCPLIN TESTSCPLIN21 02 EA SCBRAN 16385 1056 Pd SCVALV DRO7C V 07 SCTUB 16385 1055 PI VALV DRO7C V 06 EA SCBRAN 16385 1058 oo 9 UIE bd SCVALV DRO7C V 06 ofa TEE 24578 1583 ola SCFITT TEE 16385 1046 ba SCVALV DRO7C V 08 SCFITT TEE 16385 1040 EFA BRAN 100 WORK 2102 B3 Pel 2 VALV DRO7C V 05 Elements
365. proved 20 17 Configurable DGN Export Improvements also include e Symbols Backing Sheets Frame and Logos are exported as cells differentially scaled symbols are supported Cells are exported with Tag data attached The following limitations apply e Although user defined glyphs and line pictures are ignored it is possible to specify a MicroStation custom line style for a given DRAFT pen number e Hatching fill patterns from HPATTERN19 to HPATTERN30 use a common shared cell definition For these Colours Line weight and Line style will not be set e Dimensions are not exported as MicroStation dimensions However they may be grouped 20 18 AVEVA Isometric ADP This add on application has been completely overhauled for Hull amp Outfitting 12 1 It can now be used for drawing detailed drawings complete with parts lists of both HVAC and Cable trays It is fully configurable and produces a fully annotated Isometric style drawing with e Dimensioned and labelled Spool e Material Take Off Table e Location Plan of the Spool in the Main e Keyplan of location to nearest Grid Line e Revision table e Total Weight and Centre of Gravity Drawing output is in PDF format with Material Take off to MS Excel In addition there is a dedicated Toolbar Edit tools and a Print Tool for Multiple drawings Please note that this new release will not work with earlier versions of Hull amp Outfitting and that many areas are significantly diffe
366. py will be stored but instead of the parametric definition it will be defined by using sheer and camber cures In this new representation the stools and corrugation are individual entities These new entities will be possible to edit in the same way a knuckled bulkhead is today The above allows for creation of corrugated bulkheads with stools in Surface amp Compartment releasing them to design further editing with Structural Design tools and updating Surface amp Compartment with the changes via the Use Design function Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Geometry Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 81 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 15 Compartment Export Import in XML Format Description A new open XML based format is introduced to support import export of compartments The format covers compartment definition and content data as well as category information The export and import functionality is accessed through added functionality in the File Export and File Import functions Benefits Open format for describing compartments Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the XML Menu Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Geometry Copyright 1
367. pyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 38 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Naming Rules Data Input Key Pipe names Scan Level Rule Name All pipe Element Rules Description Format rue badref fluref unset namn of fluref amp amp iftrue badref pspec unset namn of pspz Indices Data Display Key Key Pipe names TE EEES Description ole Manager Associations All pipe Hole Management SubFixing Name PIPE Hole Management Fixing Names Equipment Zones Name HVAC Zones Name iftrue badreffuref unset namn of HVAC Spool Name ices oo Pipe names Piping Zones Name Test unset 43B unset 1 C Use Rule The FLUREF and ISPE have not been set but the PSPE is set to A3B so the resultant name is unset A3B unset 1 6 8 Additional Debug Information about PML Applications 6 8 1 Help About A new button has been added to the Help About gt Additional Information dialog with a new option to scan all Application Appware files to check if they have been changed Additional Information Module File Version Libraries Dabacon DAB2_19_Ox_ntoptUNI GML 7 7 0 1 GTX GW5A10 SP SP3bintel_nt FLAYER FL5A5 SPLASH 7E3 FLEXLM Client Win32 5 2 0 FLEXNet PML library 308 Nodib rodib 1b Forms library 12 1 0 0001 Interaction manager 12 1 0 0001 DRUID WinFormsDruid 1 0 SGL 12 1 1 0 Attribute Data File Mon 20 Dec 2010 E 6 8 2 PML Alert C
368. r Dimensions which has been extensively revised 20 9 Enhanced P line Picking There is now an option for P lines to behave ina similar fashion to P points when creating annotation lf enabled on a View P lines appear as the mouse passes over them so that they can be picked They can of course also be made part of the SCTN s permanently visible representation when required on the drawing The number of P lines drawn thus can be limited by use of their PVIF attribute as for P points Performance for Update Designwhen drawing sections with a large number of P lines will therefore be improved by making suitable adjustments to the catalogue Pseudo attributes PLVIFlag and PLVISibility equivalent to the PPVIF and PPVIS attributes are also available The behaviour for picking is as previous versions when the new option is OFF For full details please refer to the DRAFT User Guide 20 10 Improved Performance of Extrusions These enhancements are focused on speeding up Extrusions and Panels by improving the handling of their vertices Vertex VERT amp Panel Vertex PAVE elements have 10 p points mostly for dimensioning purposes Each p point number has a particular functional position PO Origin of Vertex P1 Bottom panel face in line with panel vertex P2 Midway through panel in line with panel vertex P3 Top panel face in line with panel vertex P4 P6 Bottom face tangent points for filleted radius at vertex P5 P7 Top face tang
369. r accepting differences The following methods can be used to create an acceptance GPWL in a named database or in the first writable database create an acceptance GPSET and select an acceptance GPSET to be active Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 373 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin lintegrator RING OwnerDB is STRING egrator T t is STRING t T egrator E RING OwnerGPWLD is STRING integrator E createAcceptanceGPWLD GPWLDName is STRING Description CreateAcceptanceGPWLD GPWLDName is STRING Description CreateAcceptanceGPSET GPSETName is STRING Description SelectAcceptanceGPSET GPSETName is STRING The following methods can be used to accept differences on an element or accept a missing element The methods without the flag are equivalent to the corresponding methods with the flag set true Setting the flag false has the effect of reversing any acceptance integrator integrator integrator integrator integrator AcceptDifferences Name is STRING AcceptDifferences Name is STRING Flag is BOOLEAN AcceptMissingElement Name is STRING AcceptMissingElement Name is STRING Flag is BOOLEAN AcceptMissingElement Name is STRING Flag is BOOLEAN TncludeConnectedBranch is BOOLEAN The following methods can be used to disable or enable matchi
370. r clipping can be switched off Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 478 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Clipping Clip Box 900 00 eee SEM e38n24d Parallel Model Rotate When checking for clashes the default obstruction is All this mean that the element is checked for clashes against everything in the MDB In practice it is perhaps more realistic to check for clashes against specific obstructions This is specified in the Obstruction Exclusions panel Clashes 22 Obstructions Exclusions Limits Options Report Obstructions number name 1 STEEL 2 fHEATING VENTS 3 ICIVIL Current Element Exclusions number name 1 IHANGERS SUPPORTS Current Element There are several options to help the user add to these lists Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 479 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin e Current Element e Pick Element e Current Selection e Current List e All Remove removes any selected elements and Clear clears the entire list The application allows a limits volume to be set so that only clashes within these limits are reported If all values are zero then there are in effect no limits to the clash check This can be reset using the Clear button The volume box can displayed using the Display option Clashes Check IPIPES Clipping Check CE Clip Box Clashes 22
371. r ste The units settings can be reset using this form and need to be activated using the Set Unit button Clicking OK on the options form will save the current units setting into the current options file Once an options file has its own units settings these will be loaded before generating isos or modifying the file Notes e Until an options file has been modified the units displayed in the Current Session Units form will be the current Design session units as on entry to Isodraft When an options file has been loaded the units defined in the options file become current Existing Options files will have no unit definitions until they have been edited and saved Isodraft does not currently perform any units conversion for UDAs Isodraft will output them in database units Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 487 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 12 Future Considerations 26 12 1 Access platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL The new application for Access platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL released in 12 0 is being improved to provide an excellent tool for stairs single flight in the first release ladders and handrailing The functionality to create platforms with the application is being removed and platforms will be created using standard Beams amp Columns and Panels amp Plates functionality possibly in conjunction with the Standard Model Library utility The new application will therefor
372. raints None For More Information Only documented here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 296 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 34 Z021 12 1 SP2 Description The batch program SZ021 used to import a DXF file to a drawing is no longer supported and will be removed in next release The recommended way to import DXF files in batch is to write a C or PML program using the Marine NET API We are in the process of creating a small example to be made available on our support site Benefits Z021 only imports DXF files Using the Marine NET API it will be possible to import and export all supported formats Compatibility Constraints Not applicable For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs sz021 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 297 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 35 The Restrict Function 12 1 SP2 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP2 it is possible to capture also invisible geometry in the Restrict function Edit Delete By Area Note that with invisible we here mean both geometry that are marked as invisible and geometries that are not shown because its layer is hidden via View Layer A new Drafting Default keyword ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVISIBLE_GEOM has been introduced for this purpose Keyword ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVISIBLE_GEOM System default value No Explanatio
373. ramework upgrades in other words non framework upgrades can be applied in any order However it will not be possible to backtrack to pre upgrade sessions 2 7 Database Upgrade Optional Upgrade 12 1 SP3 Description The database upgrade framework is extended with a concept of optional upgrades The software requires a database to be upgraded to a certain level to be granted write access to the database But beyond that mandatory upgrade level itis now possible to apply further optional upgrade levels to acquire new enhanced features The upgrade level denoted 12010301 is an optional upgrade provided by release of 12 1 SP3 and contain following upgrade items which are further documented in separate release notes 2893 Storing of a space arrangement definition See release note 13 2 Space Definition Data and Re Create of Space Arrangements 2931 Storing of coordinate system entities under a GENPRI element See release note 25 7 1 Import of Coordinate System Entities from STEP Files 38541 Introduce marine drawing type as table attribute Applicable for PADD databases See release note 19 9 List Drawings Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15251 Marine Drawing Object applied with new Layers and IDs for outfitting models Applicable for PADD databases See release note 19 8 Layers for Outfitting Models 45823 New Marine Drawing Types Applicable for PADD databases See rele
374. rawing and Save Drawing As Save Drawing As has been much more flexible since it allows long drawing names and free use of lowercase and uppercase characters New Drawing now has the same flexibility as Save Drawing As You can use up to 115 characters in a drawing name In case you would like to limit the number of characters that can be used for a drawing there is a new drafting default keyword DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN This can be set to a value between 10 and 115 115 is the default value Benefits New Drawing is now equally flexible as Save Drawing As when it comes to maximum number of character and lower case vs uppercase Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 278 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 18 PML Triggers 12 1 SP4 Description A new PML based trigger mechanism is introduced meant to replace the Marine legacy Vitesse trigger functionality The PML triggers operates on the same events as the Vitesse triggers and are named with similar names as the Vitesse triggers see User Guide The presence of a PML trigger overrules the corresponding Vitesse trigger which becomes obsolete and not considered for execution A Vitesse trigger is considered for execution only if corresponding PML trigger not is found Benefits Customizations made b
375. re any other information Note that the order in which the fill styled contours themselves are drawn is still out of user control i e fill styled contours will obscure each other A new Drafting Default keyword FILL_STYLE_SEND_TO_BACK has been introduced for this purpose System default Explanation Legal values value FILL_STYLE_SEND_TO_BACK Controls if contours No The rendering with fill style should order is determined be drawn first by the system depends primarily on colour and secondarily on traversal order Yes Contours with fillstyle will be drawn first thus making sure nothing else is obscured by the fillstyle evaluation Note 1 using this feature might slow down performance slightly about 15 during repaint operations Note 2 solid filled contours in system components e g leader line terminator arrows in label components will not be drawn first Benefits Possibility to avoid contours with fillstyle to obscure other entites Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 269 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 270 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 12 Blanking behind Labels and Dimensionings 12 1 SP4 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 the blanking functionality
376. reate all kinds of hull views Old still available marked asobsolete New Aveva Marine Design Aveva Marine Drafting MarChm ViewBodyPlanNew MarDrafting ViewBody Plan New MarChm ViewCurvedPanelNew MarDrafting ViewCurvedP anelNew MarChm ViewDevPlaNew MarDrafting ViewDevPlaNew MarChm ViewShellXNew MarDrafting ViewShell XNew MarChm ViewShProfNew MarDrafting ViewShProfNew MarChm ViewModify MarDrafting ViewCurvedModify MarChm ViewRecreate MarDrafting ViewRecreate MarHullPan ViewDetailNew MarDrafting ViewDetail New MarHullPan ViewSymbolicModify MarDrafting ViewSectionModify MarHullPan ViewSymbolicRecreate MarDrafting ViewRecreate MarHullPan MAR_BRACKET MarDrafting MAR_BRACKET MarHullPan MAR_BRACKET_PML MarHullPan MAR_FLANGE_PML MarHullPan MAR_SEAM MarHullPan MAR_SEAM_PML Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 343 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin MarHullPan MAR_STIF FENER MarDrafting MAR_STIFFENER MarHullPan MAR_STIF FENE R_PML MarDrafting MAR_STIF FENE R_PML The following APIs have been renamed to reflect changes in menus Old still available marked asobsolete New Aveva Marine Drafting Aveva Marine Drafting MarDrafting ElementlsSymbolicView MarDrafting ElementlsSection View MarDrafting ViewSymbolicNew MarDrafting ViewSectionNew MarDrafting ViewSymbolicModelTra MarDrafting ViewSectionModelTra It is strongly recommended that you change your customisation files C PM
377. rect specification whereas a full check may be needed as the data matures End users can no longer define Comparison Categories or set Comparison Options These have been moved out of the main menu and now form part of the administrator s scope Instead end users select from a list of Configurations defined by an administrator Configurations are shared across the project but each user s selection is preserved across sessions Schematic 3D Integrator Window Help Hide Display gt a View Diagram Close All Diagrams Main Object Type gt Compare Compare Diagram Open Comparison Report Configurations gt Full check Reset Diagram Colours Basic check Reset All Diagrams Colours Presentation check Build Link Unlink View gt Main Table gt Subtype Table gt Diagram Viewer Settings gt For more information refer to section 4 8 of the Integrator User Guide Administrative Flexibility with Configurations Integrator now allows an administrator to setup multiple Configurations for use on the project For Integrator an administrator is either a free user or a member of team CUADMIN this team is also used by Compare Update End users can no longer view the Configuration Explorer Within the Configuration Explorer you can now define multiple sets of Compare Colours Comparison Categories and Rule Sets and combine selections of these into Configurations It is the Configuration
378. rent including the following e HVAC Catalogue upgrades e Draft Library elements for True Type Fonts The appropriate changes have been made to the sample data supplied with Hull amp Outfitting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 357 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Edit Isometrics Search Edit Tools Loop Se Keyan A HF onset 47S D Re status Unchecked v All Drwgs Layer Y Drawings Dimn Overall Snap Off HTESTHVAC Drawing POWER_CWAYOO2 Drawing CWAY Gaps Drawing POWER_CWAYO01 Drawing My_CWAYO01 Drawing xo Sheet 3 of 7 Sheet 4 of 7 Sheet 5 of 7 Sheet 6 of 7 Sheet 7 of 7 rail A amp a 2 9 O a aS ee a For full details please refer to the updated sometric ADP user documentation e Installation Guide e User Guide e Administration Guide Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 358 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 21 AVEVA Marine Migration 21 1 Preparing Databanks for Import into Hull and Outfitting 12 1 The ability to read native Tribon indexed databanks has been removed from AVEVA Marine Before using the migration program to migrate a Tribon project to AVEVA Marine the Tribon databanks need to be upgraded to a neutral format Tribon Model Index There is a Tribon M3 program ca
379. revious version of a project or continuing work on a project that uses a copy of a previous version s MDS APPDEFAULTS database The Check MDS Application Defaults tool is a new feature in the Utilities menu of the Paragon module and is available to administrators who belong to team CATADMIN For details please see the Multi Discipline Supports Administrator Guide Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 483 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 11 Outfitting Piping Isometrics There are several developments in Hull amp Outfitting Isodraft version 12 1 For details please refer to the updated User and Reference Manuals 26 11 1 New Output File Formats Including PDF Isometrics may now be produced in PDF Image or EMF Enhanced Windows Metafile format This is achieved through an extension of the FILE command for example FILE PDF filename These formats may also be selected from the Options form Administrative Options Comments Basic Metric Isodraft options file Plots Directory Local Filename S PDMSUSERS plot C Use Drawing name Plots Single plotffle vl Paper length mm PDMS DXF C Output C Output PDF 7 Output Colour Mode Bw v Mview C One File per Sheet Minimum Line Width mm E Compress PRINT Output Colour Mode COLOURPLUS w Fit Drawing to Paper No Fit v Minimum Line Width mm Printer Settings Aways
380. revious versions of Hull amp Outfitting all dimensioned quantities other than distances or bores were output in units stored in the database irrespective of the current units For example all masses were assumed to be Kg There is a new set of commands to complement and extend the existing units functions These commands control the units of supported dimensions and their dependent quantities e g density and pressure For masses the command UNITS may be followed by KG MASS GRAM MASS POUND MASS TONNE MASS or TON SHORT LONG MASS New DISTANCE options are also provided FOOT DIST and METRE DIST to output and return values in these common units The command which sets the distance units is MM INCH FINCH DISTANCE The new commands use the keyword UNITS to define the units to use for the various dimension types For example UNITS MM DISTANCE UNITS POUND MASS The leading UNITS keyword is optional for MM INCH and FINCH DISTANCE but is required for all new options in the commands listed below The command and functionality of BORE units remains unchanged Some units are case sensitive to adhere more closely to SI conventions strict adherence is not always possible due to syntax conflicts This allow a distinction to be made between units such as s econds and S iemens hours and Henrys tonnes and Teslas This does not apply to Imperial units IN or in FT or ft are all valid or to some metric units such as M
381. riction file suppresses automatic dimensioning when set to YES Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Profile Manufacturing Production Output Profiles Automatic Generation of Profile Sketches Creating Profile Sketches Restriction File Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Profile Sketch and List and Profile Cutting Interface Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 195 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 36 New GSD Corner Distance Keywords 12 1 SP3 Description GSD s are used to correctly align parts to each other in the assembly process One type of GSD marking is markings put at a distance from the corner of a part This distance is defined by GSD keyword CORNER_DIST Support is now added for putting corner GSD s at different distances on different type of parts To enhance flexibility the following GSD keywords have been introduced BRA_CORNER_DIST Distance from corner of bracket to GSD FLA_CORNER_DIST Distance from corner of flange to GSD STI_CORNER_DIST Distance from corner of stiffener to GSD BUILT_STILCORNER_DIST Distance from corner of built profile flange to GSD The default value for all these new keywords is the value of the old keyword CORNER_DIST The keywords are all defined in the GSD default file Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User
382. rine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin A warning is also given when using the Generate Script dialog if the password for logging in to the project is not correct An incorrect password could cause an invalid password error when the script is later executed Warning Password is not valid for user USERA Please enter and confirm correct Password In addition to the ConfirmID method on the SESSION object an analogous method has been added to the USER object This method also takes a string as argument the suggested password text with leading character It returns a boolean value that determines whether the password is correct for the specified user Example u object USER MYUSER if u ConfirmID SESAME then 4 5 Status Control A number of small improvements which affect all constructor modules have been made to Status Control New pseudo attributes STVMOD and STVUSE have been added to return the status last modification date and user PML2 qualified attribute queries are now available for status data for example statusDefinitions 1 DesignStatus statusValues ce attribute STVVAL statusDefinitions A new command STM COMMENT has been added to set the status comment without modifying the status value The Status Change Event Methods now take an array of objects as their first argument where previously this was a single element reference ina strin
383. rine Hydrostatics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 68 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 5 Lines New Grid in PACE Description To improve the usability of the grid used in PACE the way the grid is displayed has changed from a graph paper like grid to a less intrusive intersection point based grid The rulers have been made more distinct and locked to the sides of the viewport The coordinate axis are also displayed Orthogonal View Stern Benefits A less intrusive grid and more distinct rulers make it easier to work when geometry and grid coincide Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 69 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin 70 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 6 Lines Individual Tuft Size in Views in PACE Description It is now possible to have different size of tufts in individual views in PACE Benefits This makes fairing easier when the scale difference is large between individual views Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide nitial Design Lines Screen Based Reference Guide Patch and Curve Editor Graphics View Control Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Lines Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 71 AVEVA Marine 12 1 S
384. rmat This can handle all seven character sets supported in previous versions and potentially many more 4 2 1 Restrictions Hull amp Outfitting MS has been tested using the same range of languages as previous releases No font files are available for any other language this means that TrueType fonts must be used on drawings and that therefore itis not possible to produce plotfile output With that restriction it is anticipated that many other languages will work though there are aspects of the Unicode standard that are not yet implemented Hull amp Outfitting currently handles the following correctly e Left to Right languages and therefore not for example Arabic and Hebrew e Pre composed characters for example the single character a but not the combiners a gt a e Upper and lower casing of characters where both cases have the same number of bytes 4 2 2 Textual File Handling By default all sequential text files read by Hull amp Outfitting will be expected to be in UTF 8 format with a Byte Order Mark BOM present to identify them Similarly by default all sequential text files written by Hull amp Outfitting will be in Unicode UTF 8 format with a BOM present A simple command line transcoder is also supplied this may be used in some applications to convert files to a different encoding 4 2 3 Filenames and PML The Hull amp Outfitting command processor supports Unicode characters All PML string vari
385. rmation Refer to User Guide Hull in Dabacon Hull Manufacturing Data Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design application Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 176 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 18 Default Bracket Profile Position Number 12 1 SP4 Description Default position numbers are calculated when Plane Panel Parts Generation is performed on brackets with profiles where position number is not explicitly defined An unset position number is then set to the running number of the profile If the profile is a stiffener the number of flanges on the bracket is added to the position number There has been felt a need to alternatively set the bracket profile part position number to the position number of the bracket To give the user the opportunity to choose how to calculate unset bracket profile position numbers the logical name SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POSNO has been invented It can take on one of the two values USE_BRACKET_POSNO and RUNNING_NO SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POSNO set to RUNNING_NO means that unset position numbers are calculated as running numbers This setting is default SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POSNO set to USE_BRACKET_POSNO means that unset profile position numbers are replaced by the bracket position number The setting of SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POSNO has also impact when part names are determined before panel parts have been generated Benefits Flexibility Compatibility Constraints None For More I
386. rols in use In summary e All AVEVA Plant products have full read write access tothe administrative and catalogue data in the DICTIONARY CATALOGUE NSEQUENCE and PROPERTIES databases e Hull amp Outfitting users can read amp write 3D databases those who need to access Schematic or Engineering data also need a Schematic 3D Integrator license The decision to work in Integrated mode is taken when a user enters Hull amp Outfitting and applies to the whole session e Diagrams users can read amp write SCHEMATICS databases they can read but not write 3D databases Diagrams users can also read but not write the new ENGINEERING database see below e Engineering users can read amp write both Schematic and Engineering data they can also read but not write 3D data Existing users of Diagrams Schematic Model Manager and Schematic 3D Integrator will require an updated license file 5 6 Increase in Number of Databases A larger number of databases can now be used in a project the new limit is 250 000 New database numbers from 250 001 to 255 000 are reserved for AVEVA use as well as those from 7 001 to 8 000 It is now easier to avoid database number conflicts when databases are shared between projects These conflicts may be avoided by creating DBRange elements to define the range of database numbers available for use in each of the projects The database numbers may be between 10 000 and 250 000 these numbers may also be
387. rom the drop down list all RSOs belonging to this envelope are presented in the list When a target envelope is selected one or many RSOs can be selected and added to the target envelope The added RSOs are recreated in the new envelope by selecting Apply or OK Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Functions in the Project Menu Envelope and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Functions in the Project Menu Envelope Affected Programs Structural Design Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 140 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 9RSO Recreate Description A new function RSO Recreate has been added which recreates the geometry of the RSO based on the current definition of limiting objects and the envelope The function is activated from the RSO menu when right clicking a RSO or as a right click menu option in the function RSO Property When the function is activated from the RSO menu the user is asked to pick an RSO in the drawing By using the Option button the user can select all RSOs within a view on the drawing When the function is activated within the function RSO Property the user can select to recreate the indicated RSO or all RSOs When the function is activated by right clicking the geometry of
388. rosses a marking line the possibility to reduce other type of marking lines have been implemented Three new default parameters have been entered into the ppanparts function The names of the parameters are REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_STI_AT_HOLES REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PLANE_AT_HOLES REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PANEL_AT_HOLES By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_STI_AT_HOLES marking lines of the mould lines of stiffeners default parameter STI must be given will be checked for and reduced if the conditions mentioned above is fulfilled By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PLANE_AT_HOLES marking lines of the reference planes default parameter REFPLANE must be given defined in Hull Modelling will be checked for and reduced if the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PANEL_AT_HOLES marking lines of abutting plane panels default parameter PAN must be given will be checked for and reduced if the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled Benefits Enables the user to control the extension of marking lines around holes Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts Plane Panel Part Set up of Program Set up of the IP File Affected Programs Sf416d exe Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 215 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 53 GSD Marking of Built Profiles Description When assembli
389. rotection 4 5 Status Control 4 6 Report Generation 4 6 1 New Reporting Add in 4 6 2 Classic Reporting 4 7 GML Performance Database changes 5 1 Project Breakdown Structure P BS 12 1 SP4 5 1 1 Overview 5 1 2 Setting up the PBS definition in Lexicon 5 2 Use the BACKREf Attribute 12 1 SP3 5 3 Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command 12 1 SP3 5 4 New Database types 5 4 1 Engineering Database 5 4 2 Design Reference Database 5 5 Access to Databases 5 6 Increase in Number of Databases 5 6 1 Admin GUI 5 7 Duplicate Names 5 8 Flexibility of Data Organisation 5 8 1 Database Views 5 8 2 Distributed Attributes 5 8 3 Handling of Duplicated Names of UDAs and UDETs 5 8 4 Top Level Element Creation in Specific Database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 28 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 32 32 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 9 Dynamic Groups 5 10 Database Performance 5 10 1 Specifying the Buffer Size 5 10 2 Dabacon Index Tables 5 11 Units of Measure 5 12 Unicode Storage of Name and Text Attributes 5 13 DRAFT Line style World Hierarchy 5 14 Extract Control Include Flush Capability User Interface 6 1 Entry to System 6 2 Save and Restore Views 6 3 Grid Control 6 4 Toolbar Popup Menu 6 5 PML Collections 6 6 Attribute Display Editing and Validation 6 7 Auto naming Utility Enhancement 6 8 Add
390. roup is used may now be used to define a selection for a GPSET The SCOSEL attribute is used to store this selection for example SCOSEL ALL EQUI FROM CLAIMLIST More complex dynamic selections are possible for example ALL PIPE WHERE BORE GT 80 ALL BRAN MEMBERS WHERE SPREF EQ MYSPEC for SITE SITEI There is a performance overhead in evaluating more complex selection expressions Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 32 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 5 10 Database Performance A number of enhancements have been made to the performance of the Dabacon database Those noted here are the most visible to users Dabacon Buffer The Dabacon buffer is used for temporary storage of data in local memory and can therefore have a significant effect on performance Increasing its size is likely to reduce the amount of network I O so in generally a larger buffer will improve performance However if itis larger than the available memory paging will increase thus offsetting some of the advantages Previous versions of Hull amp Outfitting 12 have limited the buffer to between 32 000 and 51 200 000 integers with a default of in general only 12 800 000 This corresponds to a default of 50 and a maximum of 200 Mbytes with modern PCs most customers found it best to use the maximum value set by use of the BUFFER
391. roved Extract Data Control dialog to highlight extract changes e Model Changes Add in to explore and highlight general changes to the model There is a separate Comparison add in see section 24 9 3 available from the Schematic Explorer context menu This can show changes related to diagram elements between two database sessions or stamps and can use the SVG Viewer to highlight the changes in colour 25 3 1 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions Forms that display details of a database session now also include the reason for that the session For example the database session form accessed from Utilities gt DB Listing shows it thus DB Differences Destination File O Screen New Fie Ooverwite Append Filename PDMSUSER DBOutput tet Differences since OSavework O TimeDate Session O Extract Stamp Date HH MM DD Mon Year Session Number Session User gordon smith Database Name CTBXTEST DESI Snee Extract Session No 2 Database Name CTBXTEST DESI Since Stamp Session No 2 Comment Display i Default session comment J Hightght Differences Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 444 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Users can explore sessions containing an added element by selecting DB Changes or DB Differences from the Control menu and selecting Session in the Changes Since radio button set 25 3 2 Revert Elements Command A new command can revert an element
392. rts that use Data Extraction to reports using the reporting tool To simplify such a process new attributes have been added to cover more of what can be extracted by Data Extraction A translation table has been added to the user documentation mapping Data Extraction keywords to elements and attributes A number of reports come with the MAR project that is included in the installation Some of these reports can be used as direct replacements for a number of built in listing or reporting functions such as parts lists and WCOG lists The reports can also be used as examples and act as a starting point for further development of customised reports Benefits Using a common tool for reporting all over the system is a benefit in itself This tool also provides extensive possibilities for customisation of contents as well as layout of reports The reports produced by the reporting tool can replace many built in listing and reporting functions e g PPI functions such as parts lists and WCOG lists Customised reporting solutions using legacy products such as Vitesse and Data Extraction may be upgraded to use the common reporting tool Many different users and roles can benefit from the reporting tool e g in early or detailed design as well as in the production area Compatibility Constraints None For More Information The reporting tool in general is described in User Guide Design Reporting Mapping of Data Extraction keywords to eleme
393. s None For More Information Please see the documentation Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Annotate Label Draft Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Modify Label and Draft Marine Drafting Operators Instructions Modify Label Placement Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 275 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 15 Distribute Drawings Across Several DEPTs 12 1 SP4 Description There is a new attribute on department DEPT elements that can be used to distribute drawings of the same type across different DEPTs The attribute is called PADDXP RESSION and is a compiled PML expression to be evaluated when creating a new drawing in order to find an appropriate DEPT element as the owner of the new drawing The expression is evaluated against the drawing type of the new drawing and a typical example on how the PADDYP attribute can be defined to keep a single database type within a DEPT gt set PADDXP marpty eq 1 Two different drawing types can be put in below the same DEPT like this gt set PADDXP marpty eq 1 or marpty eq 4 There is a fallback implementation used when no appropriate DEPT can be found using the PADDXP attribute or if the PADDXP attribute has not been set on any DEPT elements This fallback implementation picks up DEPT name from the project definition file i e the d065 file and it is th
394. s to Datasheets after copying this section name Reports type NoncaD cts osha ag lalate lt SchemaFi les ClassSchemaFi ePath PDMSEXE AvevaNetConf ig Schemas ClassMapping xsd ObjectSchemaFi ePath PDMSEXE AvevaNetconfig Schemas PatternMapping xsd gt Deliverable gt lt DelTiverables gt lt Module gt This would ensure that any changes made previously to the project configuration file are retained Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 435 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 7 Design Reuse for AVEVA Engineering 12 1 SP4 Description Design reuse is now available for AVEVA Engineering AVEVA Marine only Ala amp Rve ls E Schematic WORL Eh SCGROU UDA tests Pipelines E SCPLIN A1A 01 10mmA AVEVA Diagrams Project mar Pipe e Home Tools Manage Insert View Admin ip R7 5 YA AVEVANET S A A nE B m sis E Line List Command Batch Drawing Database Units _ Systems Rules Window Job art Naming Upgrade Configuration Definition a so Epot import Settings Name Type Status Message Diagram test_01 SCDIAG SCBRAN A1A 01 101 So g amp SCBRAN A1A 01 101 EE are i SCSEG 1 f Equipments Name Type Comn P SCEQUI Equip 01 Z Sample_Equipment_1_Symbols SCSTENCIL Diagrams Z Sample_Pipeline_Symbols SCSTENCIL iz SCDIAG Diagram_test_01 Z Sample_Valve_Symbols
395. s 4 SCGROU HVAC Diagrams E SCGROU Marine Equipment O 8G SCGROU Marine Piping H SCGROU 11 In Line Pump E SCGROU Electrical Diagrams E E SCGROU SCHEMATICS PIPI g EE SCGROU Project_Templates E E SCGROU Project_Stencils Centrifugal E9 SCGROU Project_Stencils_D Pump X i 4 gt i Page 1 22 ll m gt Ejector Save Work completed Current Line Unset J Session defaults Benefits More modern look and feel Consistent with AVEVA Engineering Compatibility Constraints None Note that any customisations made in UIC files need to be recreated using the Ribbon bar instead This can be done For More Information Refer to updates in the Diagrams User Guide Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 379 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 2 View Datasheets in Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Description Datasheets that are defined in AVEVA Engineering are viewable in AVEVA Diagrams if the engineering item is linked with the schematic item They are only available as read only E aveva dagrore Propet Sate pe AL 51 208 A Be Gee Gow promt figrmat Jocis BAD Qhect Oats Pape indos tte 02 408 9 448 9 ebL A um Ae DOs TVs Od me ee 2 LL TENN ENR 1 2 z 44 im sheers sheet heirs womans Camat ops ste anoe Select ret Gmelin sah mgran G Cone Une OBIE SD Senmon ora Benefi
396. s E SCGROU HVAC Diagrams SCGROU Marine Equipment H E SCGROU Marine Piping E SCGROU 11 H E SCGROU Electrical Diagrams w amp J lo carca SCGROU SCHEMATICS PIPING H E SCGROU Project_Templates H E SCGROU Project_Stencils H E SCGROU Project_Stenciis_DIN 6 x t Epor lt m DGN Export Settings loaded from path E AVEVA Marine Projects 12 1 SP3 Marimardf Current Line SP DRO7C 03 100mmA Session defaults Benefits e Allows Engineering items to be copied between projects including Datasheets and all attributes e Allows one or many complete diagrams to be copied together with all related schematics data Individual Schematic items can be copied but the shape references need to be ona whole diagram e Saved transfer sets the data can be saved moved between machines emailed and copied between different locations e Works between different projects e Automatically resolves dependencies and referred items Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Diagrams Utilities Design Reuse Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams AVEVA Engineering Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 381 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 4 Secondary Shapes for Pipe and Instrument Lines 12 1 SP4 Description Secondary shapes for Pipe and Instrument lines can now be created using Copy Paste
397. s a Cancel button it is also less responsive to Window operations such as move or resize while export or import operations are in progress e The Export and Import logging dialog OK button has been renamed Dismiss For details please refer to the Admin User Guide For full details of the various different types of view please refer to the Lexicon User Guide 7 2 Lexicon 7 2 1 New Lexicon Graphical View A new user interface can show a graphic representation of the relationships between Lexicon data entities using nodes and links in the style of UML and entity relationship diagrams There is a series of graphical views which are shown on separate tabbed panes in the Lexicon User Interface There are 4 types of view showing UDAs UDETs status definitions and distributed attributes Each view tab is opened by selecting the Graphical View menu option during a right click on an element of a supported type in the Lexicon explorer The picture below shows a screenshot of Lexicon with the new Graphical View on the right side by side with the Dictionary Explorer and Current Element Editor Indivdual views are associated with a single database element To open a view select the element of interest in the explorer and click the context menu Each view opens in a separate tab whose title reflects the name of the element for which it was opened Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 41 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 U
398. s been added The user must edit a local copy of the Criteria file and specify the bollard pull heeling moment arm for the particular vessel according to the rules using the Edit Criteria menu option in the program Benefits Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs maridcalc Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 93 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 AVEVA Hull General Functionality 11 1 New Representation of Shell Plates 12 1 SP4 Description Shell plates can now be represented using a Generic Primitive created from the referenced surface and the involved seams in that surface The new representation gives a more exact representation when presenting graphically or when exporting to 3 party systems The new representation is enabled by setting the variable SBH_ENABLE_SOLID_PLATES to YES With this new representation enabled the performance when creating shell plates is degraded however using the plates are on the same performance level as before Benefits The representation of shell plates is now much more accurate with holes included if existing The new representation will give higher and more robust quality in various operations e g Shell Plate Compensation Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept Run Mode Control Contro
399. s that are then available to end users End users always access the default configuration file ProjectConfiguration xml in the appropriate project folder so you need to save to this file to make any changes available to the project Administrators can work with any filename since any project configuration file opened in the Configuration Explorer becomes their current file Thus you can test using a different file and save to the default filename when ready to deploy the changes Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 363 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Note The administrator s current file is remembered across sessions The Project Defaults section has additional fields for the default Configuration Colours Category and Rule Set these will be used if an appropriate selection cannot be identified Integrator Project Configuration Explorer C Mac projects 121 bas basdfits ModelManagement boba E Project Defaults Project Defaults H Q Dictionaries gt 0 000001 E Spec Queries 0 01 2 Configurations mm S Compare Colours mm H Categories Can Create Site true a Rule Sets Can Create Zone true Sample Schematic Design RuleS false G SCEQUI Scequipment Rules false P SCSUBE Scsubequipment R false H SCNOZZ Scnozzle Rules Full check Default SCELCO Scelconn Rules L SCOINS Scoinstrument Rule Default Category Default f Default Rule Set Sample Schematic Design RuleSet S amp SCPLIN Scpline Rules
400. s to Outfitting Design 04 10 2011 Added section 1 3 1 Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces Added section 29 1 3 New Reporting Add in 05 10 2011 Added section 29 1 3 AVEVA Global ha been updated with a last bullet point Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd XV AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd User Bulletin xvi AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 1 Introduction This bulletin describes the new and enhanced functionality available in AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 as compared to AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 0 It gives an overview of the major changes which are described in full in new and revised User Documentation Some known issues are also described in this bulletin 1 1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 is a major update from AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 0 many of the associated products have also been enhanced 1 1 1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 SP4 AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 SP4 is a full release that supersedes AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12 1 SP3 and any subsequent partial fix releases It comprises a significant number of fault corrections including those previously released in the fix releases of service pack 12 1 SP3 and ongoing fix releases of Hull and Outfitting 12 0 together with enhancements It addresses a number of issues found by early adopters of the 12 1 SP3 release together with th
401. se plate thickness options should be setup in inithull before further modelling work is done Shell profiles must be regenerated before plate thickness is considered Planar panels must be regenerated if thickness settings for surfaces differ compared to before i e thickness should be considered for some surfaces but not for others For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept Run Mode Control Control on Application Level Compensation for Thickness of Shell Plates Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Detail Design AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 208 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 47 Top View of Stiffener Improved Description There is as an option in detail view stiffener which makes it possible to define the view looking from the top if the stiffener has a flange The function has now been adjusted to always look at the chosen profile from above the flange Benefits The function always displays the stiffener the same way Compatibility Constraints None For more information Only noted here Affected Programs Planar Hull Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 209 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 48 Weld Built Profiles before Bending Description When built profiles parts are manufactured the lengths of the web and flange parts are by default calculated to satisfy a manufacturing process where
402. se y New gt Delete feg Save User Views x Views Database Types Filter a z Views View Sets Name Description Element Types Access to the full Editor is gained by selecting Element Views from the dropdown listin the View Definition Set area For details please refer to the Tags User Guide Database Views are created automatically to represent element type structures so that users don t have to define them to make element information accessible to the generic reporting tool This means there is already a Database View for equipment elements with their attributes defined in columns 7 2 4 General The User Interface has been changed to help with maintenance and improve consistency In particular the following have changed e New menu on the menu bar e Explorer right click menu now consistent with other modules e Edit Members on the Explorer menu e New element types which have changed the contents of the Explorer Current Element editor and ElementType editor Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 43 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 7 3 Admin GUI Changes for Global 7 3 1 Global Support for Linked Documents Global has been extended to include support for linked documents by propagating any document marked as propagating between two locations By default the propagation of Linked documents is disabled To enable the propagation of Linked Documents switch on the Propagate Link Documents se
403. senting Welds in Model and Symbolic Views 12 1 SP4 Excess Line Type and Colour 12 1 SP4 Improved Functionality for Editing Evaluation of Dimension Text 12 1 SP4 263 Controlling the Prefix for Longitudinal Annotations 12 1 SP4 Deleting Labels Generated via Autotagging 12 1 SP4 Dynamic Highlighting when Inserting Parallel Curve 12 1 SP4 New Style Dialogs 12 1 SP4 Render Fill styled Items First 12 1 SP4 Blanking behind Labels and Dimensionings 12 1 SP4 Default Initial Point Mode 12 1 SP4 Labels 12 1 SP4 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 231 232 233 234 235 236 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 242 243 244 246 247 248 249 250 251 253 254 255 256 256 258 259 260 261 265 266 267 268 269 271 273 275 viii AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 15 19 16 19 17 19 18 19 19 19 20 19 21 19 22 19 23 19 24 19 25 19 26 19 27 19 28 19 29 19 30 19 31 19 32 19 33 19 34 19 35 19 36 19 37 19 38 19 39 19 40 19 41 19 42 19 43 19 44 19 45 19 46 19 47 19 48 19 49 19 50 19 51 19 52 19 53 19 54 Distribute Drawings Across Several DEPTs 12 1 SP4 276 Open Drawing in Read Only Mode 12 1 SP4 277 Long Drawing Names 12 1 SP4 278 PML Triggers 12 1 SP4 279 New Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing Production ADP 12 1 SP3 280 Draw Pipe Spools 12 1 SP3 282 Automatic Drawing Production ADP 12 1 SP3 283 Sample C Project 12 1 SP3 284 Ha
404. ser Bulletin Lexicon AVEVA PDMS i Lexicon Display Edit New Help Schematic Model Manager i Local Settings oy RKi a Dictionary Explorer x Current Element Edtor Fiter x VALVCHAR MATERIAL VALVTAG VALVTAG EquipmentDesignStatus Dictionary WORL a Sa Ba STAWLD StatusWorid E General eS S fa UWRL VALVTAGUDAS fy UGRO VALVCHAR_UDA Name EquipmentDesignStatus fa UDAACTUATOR Description Equipment Design Status fra UDAFUNC E Status details f UDAMATERIAL Initial status WorkPending fra UVALID 1 E Valid values a UVALID2 Controllable element t EQUIPMENT a UVALIDS E Other fya UDADN Large icon fy UDAACTTYPE Small icon fy UGRO VALVTAG_UDA Fp UGRO VALVSAFE_UDA amp fsa UGRO VALVCOND_UDA Bg UDAENVIRCOND Ba UDAFUNCTIME Ba UDAPMAX fy UDATMAX fg UDASELTYPE Ea DSXWLD 1 Fg UDETWL TagUdets S fp UDETGR SATEMS fa UDET VALVTAG Bp UDETGR ValveTagXatts Ba UDET VALVCHAR Bm UDET VALVSAFE fg UDET VALVCOND fg UWRL TEST_UDAS Ba UWRL ATWRL Fa UWRL CADC KVNIDICT fa UWRL CADC KVNIDESCAT a UWRL CADC HVAC UWRL E fa UWRL PMGSchematicUdas fa STAWLD Statuses Sia Esa STAVAL WorkPending fsa STAVAL WorkSuspended a STAVAL WorkStarted Pra STAVAL Rework fa STAVAL WorkCompleted fa STAVAL Preliminary a STAVAL Approved fa STAVAL Released 7 2 2 UDA Lists of Values User Defined Attributes UDAs and User System Defined
405. show Dialog 7 lt IMAGE Output Colour Mode COLOURPLUS v Format PNG v Minimum Line Width mm Reduction Factor EMF Output Colour Mode COLOURPLUS wv Minimum Line Width mm B True Type Fonts FI use True Type Fonts rot A 26 11 2 TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts as defined in Admin may now be used on isometrics The user can select the font type for all the text on the isometric including material description by font number e g TTFONT 5 Examples TTFONT OFF TrueType fonts are not used TTFONT ON Selected TrueType font is used TTFONT 5 Times New Roman font as defined in Admin TTFONT 6 Arial font as defined in Admin TTFONT NONE TrueType fonts are not defined TrueType fonts may also be selected from the Options form see above Note True type fonts may only be used when isometric output files are to be produced in DXF PDF Image or EMF Enhanced Windows Metafile format 26 11 3 Large Coordinates Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 484 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin ISODRAFT can now handle coordinates larger than other limits in Hull amp Outfitting and show them on the isometrics Its limit is now 2 147 483 647 000 mm approximately 2 million km It can also display large coordinates such as those encountered when using coordinates related to a GPS datum on the iso 26 11 4 Additional Coordinate Formats New commands and options on the Annotation Options GUI allo
406. stency Check PF_PROD_TEST Valid with warning Not passed Total Items 1 Spool No Spool Type PF_PROD_TESTIPS Valid for fabrication SHOP PF_PROD_TESTIPS Valid with warning SHOP PF_PROD_TEST PS Valid for fabrication SHOP Total tems 3 Piece No Valid with warning Total tems 1 Check Results Description End excess for bending 160 80mm min 500 00mm tube length 339 20mm Machine Feed excess 50 00mm min 220 00mm tube length 170 00mm j Flange manually welded Bending machine does not support prewelded flar j Flange manually welded Bending machine does not support prewelded flar Where necessary the system will suggest design changes in order to make fabrication possible for example a bend radius may need to be increased Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 460 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Some idea of the scope of the checking may be judged from the configuration options Pipe Fabrication Schematic 3D Integrator Window Help Modelling b Spooling amp Checks b Drawings gt Export Fabrication Data gt Fabrication Machine Manager Optimization Criteria for Bending amp Welding Galvanization Tank Volume Weld Gap Modelling Consistency Check Threaded Ends Defaults For details please see the Pipework Design User Guide 26 3 3 New Options in Spooler Create Menu 12 1 SP3 Create
407. struments or Actuators to any valid process item The connection point will be created automatically on the shape if connection is possible so the user will not have to create any additional ones beforehand However connection points on in line items that were designed for in line flow connections cannot be used for instrumentation connections Offline instrument A Offline instrument B Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 396 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 17 Automatic Upgrade of Options Settings Files The Diagrams Options files DiagramsDefaultSettings xml and DiagramsAttributePresentation xml are now automatically upgraded from previous versions so that existing project settings can be preserved inthe upgrade process while also gaining access to new settings and options introduced in the latest version The process of upgrade relies on a proper placement of the file containing the options values from an older version of diagrams The proper place for the file is described in detail in the Diagrams User Guide in the Diagrams gt Getting Started gt Application Settings gt Diagrams Options section The upgrade is fully automatic and executes upon application start A report of the upgrade process containing descriptions and locations of the participant files and any problems that might have occurred is available in the Diagrams Message Log Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 397 AVEVA Mari
408. sually checked by simply dragging the parts from the MANU tree browser into the 2D canvas Benefits The new functionality is simplifying the production design work Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling User Guide Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions Right Click Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 169 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 11 Frame Selection in Bending Template 12 1 SP4 Description In bending template application and generation of frame templates the template are created in all frame positions that intersect the shell plate New options are available in the bending template dialog Select frame positions if this options is marked in the dialog the user will be able to choose which frame positions to use for creating frame template on a shell plate or on shell plates in a curved panel Benefits More flexible way to control their frame templates are created Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Aveva Marine Hull Design application Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 170 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 12 Cross bending Template Additions 12 1 SP4 Description New options have been added in the dialog for th
409. subfeatures require 1469MB on your hard drive s iil C AVEVA Marine OH12 1 1 gt Location Using separate installers means that a selection of products can easily be installed together This includes the AVEVA Global client option which enables the use of Hull and Outfitting or other Marine products with Global However there is a separate installer for Global server which is usually installed on a separate machine such as a server which does not necessarily have Hull and Outfitting installed There are options to install batch files and shortcuts on the desktop and or in the start menu for direct entry to popular modules In addition the pml index can be automatically configured Please note that there is no thin client installation options as this is no longer supported Existing installations should be changed repaired or removed using Add or Remove Programs from the Control Panel This process will prompt for the original DVD if required This ensures that a consistent product set as tested by AVEVA will be deployed Fix releases patches will use a standard updating process which also checks and if necessary heals the existing installation There is therefore no prompt for location as the system already has this information Fix releases may also be removed using Add or Remove Programs Fix releases are applied to all products installed together not to the individual products The
410. sulting values for each attribute are concatenated to form a sketch name The rules are of mainly three types 5 Names Current object name part names block name and computer name 6 Numbers Next global sequence number for the application job numbers and counters local for the application 7 Other Free text page number Benefits Naming of production sketches may be customised in a uniform way Compatibility Constraints Old techniques for generating automatic sequence numbers for the Parts List and WCOG applications are not valid any more The keyword NAME_METHOD in the profile restriction file may not be used anymore and should be removed For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Production Program Interface Automatic Naming of Production Sketches Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 227 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 61 Find Documents Related to Production Parts Description A large number of different reports and sketches are created by production programs To be able to easily vew documents valid for a specific production part production programs will now create links from parts to relevant reports and sketches The user will be able to view related documents in the Linked Documents dialog in Hull Design This is done by the following steps 1 Bring up the Linked Documents dialog and mark
411. t at certain formats A 509 page report exports as PDF CSV and TEXT but fails for all other formats If you run the Excel XLS export it warns you and says use XLSX but fails on doing so It can export to the CSV version that can then be loaded into Excel Even if you select single page versions of the image export it fails Reporting output differs for different Excel formats Exporting the output from Reporting the data exported differs between XLS and XLSX The XLSX format creates VALUE errors in the cells that are PDMS REFs in the DBViews whereas the XLS format creates the data correctly This issue arises because export to XLSX format considers the data in Value object mode by default The workaround is to use the Text export mode please see below XLSX Export Options Export mode Single file Page range Sheet name Sheet Text export mode value Show grid lines Value Text Export hyperlinks Cancel 29 2 Corrections and Minor Enhancements 12 1 SP2 Corrections have been made for a number of defects as reported by customers in support incidents Particular attention has been paid to some of the newer areas of the system such as Schematics and Cable Design The most significant improvements are listed under their respective areas in this document Late changes and those made after the initial release will be listed on the appropriate release letters 12 1 SP2 also includes the corrections made in 12
412. t has hole size properties Note The clearance can be controlled by the component that passes through the panel if the penetrating component has a Property AHDI for circular or AHX AHY for noncircular in which case these property values will control the clearance For more information refer to Configuration Hole Management Data Click Auto penetrate CE to automatically create holes in panels in a selected structure The clash analysis can take a few minutes a progress message and bar will be displayed Once the analysis has taken place the Hole Association Manager window is displayed with the details of the newly created virtual holes Note The Hole Association Manager window is not displayed if no virtual holes are created If more than 30 virtual holes have been created there will be a confirmation message to display the Hole Association Manager window To create holes individually click Create Hole The user will be prompted to pick a panel pipe or HVAC branch that penetrates the selected panel The creation of the hole is identical to the automatic hole creation 26 5 3 Merge Holes Merged holes are individual holes merged together into a single hole To merge holes click Pick holes the user is prompted to pick a Managed Hole fitting to be combined into a single merged hole Note A minimum of two holes must be picked Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 467 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin
413. td 262 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 6 Improved Functionality for Editing Evaluation of Dimension Text 12 1 SP4 Description When editing a text in a persisted dimensioning the change will be persisted when using the persisting functions Modify Dimension Text Value or the Edit Text or Right Mouse Button Edit when the Drafting default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_ PERSISTED _GEOM setto Yes The problem here is that the intelligent text will initially be presented in the Edit Text dialog there is no way for the user to say that he wants to edit the evaluation of the text instead To get the evaluation of the text initially presented in the dialog the non persisting function Edit Text or Right Mouse Button Edit can be used together with the Drafting default keyword DENY UPDATE_OF_ NON PERSISTED _GEOM setto No However since the modified text is not persisted a subsequent evaluation of the dimensioning will overwrite the modification something that might irritate the user Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 the functionality has been improved in two ways Using the persisting functions to edit the dimensioning text When editing a dimension text it is possible to flip between the intelligent original text and the evaluated text as predefined value in the Edit Text dialog by pressing the Options button Note that Options button will be enabled only if a the modification is done on part leve
414. ted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 348 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 77 Persisting of part level modifications in Linear Dimensions Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 itis now possible for the user to get certain part level modifications in linear dimension persisted in Dabacon Modification on part level means e g changing the size position value colour etc on individual measure texts in a linear dimension The Modify Dimension sub functionality has changed slightly Modify Dimension Move Dimension Line No change of functionality Modification is persisted as before To be more specific the caption text has been changed slightly Slant Witness Line No change of functionality Modification is persisted as before Presentation No change of functionality Modification is persisted as before Text Properties Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 349 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Functionality has been improved Here the user can toggle between updating on component level whole dimensioning and part level individual texts in it To toggle just press the Option button when the system asks the user to indicate the dimensioning text to modify Modifications both on component and part level will be persisted The following properties can be modified Font Size Aspect Slant Colour
415. tem is DBREF is STRING New style define function assyPtype assyPart is ASSYPART asitem is DBREF is STRING get the DBREF from ASSYPART elemRefe assyPart partRef For More Information User Guide Assembly Planning Assembly Drawing and Reports Drawing Template Task Element where you find more about e g following e How to alter individual accumulation mode e What is that makes a design part considered for accumulation attributes used to determine identical items Affected Programs Assembly Auto Drawing Production functionality Assembly ADP located in PMLLIB assembly hosted by the Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 245 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 4 Assembly Reports 12 1 SP2 Description The Assembly Reports submenu is moved from the Utilities menu of Outfitting into the context menu of Assembly Planning Through this the functions are available from the modules hosting the Assembly Planning addin and not only from Outfitting The functions are adjusted to act on selections made in the Assembly Planning GUI instead of CE Benefits A more proper an intuitive placement of assembly planning related functions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information User Guide Assembly Planning Reporting Affected Programs H
416. template ENABLESIGHTLINEMARK Marking of sightline plane on developed plate MARKCURVEONTEMPL Additional curve marking on template New statement in input file MARK_CURVE Additional curve marking on trace curve drawing If IP MARKCURVEONTEMPL is set marking of additional curves will be done on templates also Benefits More possibilities to control the marking on bending templates Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design Manufacturing Curved Plates Bending Templates for Shell Plates Running Environment Control Information Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Bending Templates Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 172 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 14 Enhanced Part Table in Nesting Sketch 12 1 SP4 Description In the Part Table in the Nesting Sketch it is now possible to add information from User Defined Attributes UDA This is controlled with the new Nesting value 3131 The new value must be defined in the Nesting form using the following syntax 3131 lt User Defined Attribute Name gt as shown in the example below 5998 SUDA Part UDA 3131 SUDA 3062 3131 IUDA Benefits The contents of the Part Table are more customisable Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Manufacturing Nesting Hull Plate Nesting
417. tered data which can be reused for components of the same type Make sure the layout for similar components follow the same rules Support the designer in common operations such as selecting a new component to modify by selecting in a drawing Compatibility Constraints None Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 100 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 8 Attribute MODREF 12 1 SP2 Description The MODREF attribute will now return an array of model references and the syntax has been extended from MODREF to MODREF S Benefits An element with this attribute can now return multiple references An example of such an element is the notch of a planar panel stiffener which can refer many seams Compatibility Constraints None Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 101 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 9 Reuse of Seam and Profile Numbers Description When using the option of free naming for seams and shell profiles the same number will be given to objects with the same name within one session l e creating seam seam_at_fr32 results in the seam getting the number 123 If the seam is deleted and then a new seam is created with the same name in the same session the new seam will get number 123 If the seam seam_at_fr32 is deleted and then the application is restarted and a new seam with the same name
418. the atribte sanocsated wth the contro l ai Benefits Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 432 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Provides the user with the ability to create revise view export and compare datasheets for tagged items Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Tags Datasheets and Administration Lexicon User Guide Datasheets Affected Programs AVEVA Engineering AVEVA Diagrams Lexicon Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 433 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 24 6 Datasheets Option in Publish to AVEVA Net 12 1 SP4 This document describes the steps to make the new 12 1 SP4 Datasheets option available in the Publish to AVEVA Net configuration form for a project currently running 12 1 SP2 or SP3 Please note this procedure is not required for a project that is created initially at 12 1 SP4 For an SP2 or SP3 project to enable the datasheet option in Publish to AVEVA Net either carry out these 3 steps or see the alternative approach that follows 1 Rename the old configuration file present in the project folder E g for the SAMPLE project rename the file AvevaNetExportConfigAddin xml_ in the folder SAMDFLTS PublishToAvevaNet The AVEVA Net Gateway Setup checks for the configuration file in the project folder and if it is not found there will copy the default file from PDMSEXE 2 Log
419. the dimension text to its system default value e g DIM for linear dimensioning When positioning the result of a linear dimensioning 2D 3D or Axis parallel the complete graphics except witness lines will be highlighted instead of just the dimension lines When positioning the result of a linear dimensioning 2D 3D or Axis parallel it is now possible to change the dimensioning parameters text height etc without having to re define all measure points Instead of pressing Cancel and enter the Advanced function in the dimension dialog just click Options and do the parameter changes without losing the given measure points Benefits This will improve productivity in dimensioning functions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 322 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 56 Improved Dragging Technique Description During dragging the highlight colour will be the same independently of the background colour like steady highlighting TrueType texts will now be dragged with full display Benefits This will improve graphic feedback Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 323 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19
420. the initial mode setting This mode can be changed using the Control menu on the DB Listing dialog as shown below Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 451 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin DB Listing Clear Output v DB Listing DB Changes DB Differences Overwrite Append DMSUSER DBOutput bt Output 25 4 Enhanced attribute export to Review The Export Attribute form accessed from the Utilities menu now allows the user various options to specify the element s to be exported and to pick the export file name from standard file browser Export Attribute File Export Elements ce EQUIP O Database Dils elements Elements DrawList C Export unset attributes 25 5 Weight and Centre of Gravity CofG form The Within Area option has been removed from this form Utilities gt Mass Properties gt Weight and Centre of Gravity as it depends on the INSIDE OUTSIDE qualifier which is not supported for these mass properties 25 6 DRAFT Explorer The DRAFT Explorer may now be made accessible in Design this is only useful if the Draft databases are also made accessible in Admin Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 452 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 25 7 AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface It is now possible to export to a single STEP file by specifying a file name instead of a directory name e g export file c project a345 pipel stp Naming of ex
421. the options file Each time an Iso is created the options file is run as a macro so appending the correct units settings to this will ensure that Isodraft enter the detailing process with the correct units settings loaded The process of modifying the option file will automatically append the current units so each option file can potentially redefine the current units The standard option setting process is to select Options gt Modify from the main lsodraft menu bar to show the Modify Options form After selecting an options file to modify pick Dimensioning Options A new button Other Unit Settings on this form shows the Current Session Units form as in Design Dimensioning Options Units Inoutunts Bore rcres Output units Imperial lengths inch lt 2ft diameters v Tolerances _ Offset 0 00 1 32in Inch Other Unit Settings p gt A Dimensions Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 486 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Current Session Units Dimension Unit Bore in Mass cut Pressure PSI Temperature degF Force lbf Energy BTU Power kW Angle degree Time second Current ampere Voltage volt Impedance ohm Save Restore Project Defaults Distance Units Inch gt Feet amp Inches lt Feet USER Feet amp Inches Fractions eg 0 0 0 0 USER Feet amp Inches Fraction eg OOft 00 00 00in Example 4 2 11 16 T e Set Distance Unit C use
422. thin the Compare Update tab or toolbar to switch modes press By Destination A H amp 2 9 Tags AVEVA Engin Actions Home Manage View Admin Schematic Database E T Refresh Update Database C Accept All 5 Options Schematic Pipelines Source Selection Source Destination Configuration Attributes A list of available configurations will be displayed Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 361 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Matched 4 Matched Against 2 Number of Dfferencr FLUIDCODE p DESPRESS1 LINETAGPROCATT 1 p DESTEMP1 LINETAGPROCATT 1 OGGGBeiGigigigig Schematic Pipelines 17 items 12 changed Attribute Details For more details refer to the Compare Update User Guide View Datasheet in Compare Update The Compare Update Elements grid has a new right click View Datasheet option when the source is Engineering Database and the selected source item has an associated datasheet nket mi View Datasheet Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 362 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 2 Simplified Selection of Configurations 12 1 SP4 A simplified selection is now provided for end users to select an appropriate Configuration For example a basic check may be used early in a project when you just need to check for the existence of matching items and whether they are in the cor
423. tin Extract Data Control Get All Changes From parent extract only O From all extract ancestors Update CE Extract Claimists User Claimists Elements WORL SITE SYMBOLOGY SITE TPWL Default_TPWL SITE HS ADMIN SITE HTEST SITE HM_Virtual_Holes GPWL Project_GPWL TPWL Penetration_Template_World TPWL Concrete_Template_World v Change Highlighting Outstanding in Extract M introduced by Get All Changes Extract DB Operations Scope Element Hierarchy O Single Element Flush and Issue will not include Get All Changes action Flush Issue Drop will act on all changes made by all users in extract databases in this MDB 25 3 4 Change Highlighting via Model Changes Add in A new Add in has been introduced to provide a general mechanism for exploring change and highlighting changed elements in the 3D graphical view The Model Changes Add in is activated and de activated via menu option Query gt DB Changes This replaces the previous DB Changes option though this function is still available via Utilities gt DB Listing see below The Add in is shown in its default layout below Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 447 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Fitter Hangers amp Supports w B Design woRL SITE ATEST H Q ZONE ZONE1 CIVILS 8 ZONE ZONE1 STEELW H Q ZONE ZONE1 EQUIP ZONE ZONE1 PIPES 8G DRAW SYSTEM ISO LA DATU DATUM GRID S PIPE PIPE1 T Tex11 oA
424. ting Profile Sketches Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Production Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 211 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 50 Generic File Viewer Description The generic files of type 2AXIS and 3AXIS generated in Plate Nesting and Plate Interface can now be viewed graphically using the new function GenFile Viewer in the function Hull Tools gt Part Checking Benefits The viewer is an easy and fast function for visually controlling the data in the generic files All geometric data and production information texts can be displayed with different colours and line types for different kinds of geometry burning with bevel burning without bevel marking etc The colours and line types are user controlled and defined in the Nesting default file UP ER2 23 2 10P 44P PS 1412 00 A N DL SP 34 SP 33 SP 31 Compatibility Constraints None Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 212 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions Hull Tools Part Checking Affected Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 213 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 51 Looking Field Changed for Hull Mark Projection Description When a hull text is to be projected on a planar panel or
425. tinue storing and using attribute values as now and especially when the values stored are assumed by their system to be in units that are DIFFERENT to those now being assumed by Hull amp Outfitting The system also supports UNITS NUMERIC DISTANCE for completeness When a fundamental dimension s unit is NUMERIC all derived dimensions that use this fundamental dimension will also be treated as NUMERIC For example setting NUMERIC MASS will force densities and pressures to be numeric irrespective of the currently set distance units Derived units can have their units set to NUMERIC even if their fundamental dimensions have units set Weights and Masses In the past Hull amp Outfitting has not distinguished between weight and mass this has now changed Densities mass volume are in Kg per cu metre and the weight of objects derived from this is in Kgf Pressures Pressures are in Force per unit area Pressure units are supported but whether the pressure is absolute or relative to atmospheric pressure Gauge Pressure is a matter for the user to determine when he sets values No conversion is performed 4 3 3 Upgrading to use new Units To take advantage of the new functions attributes need to be set to the correct dimension This has been done for the standard attributes Customers will need it to do it for their UDAs and catalogue and design parameters and properties Any data imported to a Schematic database using
426. tion See User Guide Marine Drafting Appendices Outfitting Layers and User Guide Marine Drafting Model Viewing and General Drafting Import Export using 2D DXF Layer Control in DXF Export Release note about Optional Upgrade in 12 1 SP3 Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 289 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 28 List Drawings 12 1 SP3 Description There is a significant performance improvement when you list drawing in the Open Drawing dialogue You will notice this when you list all drawings search string is or use a search string starting with a wild card XXX In order to see the improvement you must upgrade your PADD database s with the optional upgrade 12010301 Benefits Faster listing of drawings when search string is or XXX Compatibility Constraints The improvement requires the optional upgrade 12010301 For More Information See separate release note for optional upgrade in 12 1 SP3 Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 290 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 29 Set Drawing Type during DXF DWG Import 12 1 SP3 Description When a DXF DWG file is imported it is now possible to set the drawing type directly in the Import dialog DXF Import Input file Path Load File not loaded Properties Layers Line
427. tion Assembly ADP has been given a possibility to expand a collected part to include its subordinate parts in parts list files and in parts lists of drawings Benefits Possible to extend the parts lists to show information from parts subordinate to parts actually collected to an assembly l e an assembled Hull Bracket can be extended to show also Bracket Stiffeners and Bracket Flanges in parts lists Compatibility Constraints A new PML functions assyexpandsubparts pmlfnc is provided and stored in PMLLIB assembly userfunctions This function controls the mechanism of expanding parts and is by default expanding Hull Brackets For More Information User Guide Affected Programs Assembly Auto Drawing Production functionality Assembly ADP located in PMLLIB assembly hosted by the Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 242 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 2 Material side 12 1 SP3 Description Through the assembly properties dialog when the predefined orientation is set to Specific Panel or Automatic the selected panel defined the orientation of the assembly by calculating the side of panel with most material stiffeners brackets etc Added to this mechanism is now the possibility to decide if the material side should be oriented up or if it should be down The attribute holding this information is named ASBUSY This has an immediate affect to
428. tion 458 26 2 2 Create Equipment Form 458 26 3 Piping 458 26 3 1 Non standard Pipe Connections 12 1 SP4 458 26 3 2 New Pipe Fabrication Capabilities 12 1 SP4 459 26 3 3 New Options in Spooler Create Menu 12 1 SP3 461 26 3 4 New Dependent Spool Drawings Frame 12 1 SP3 462 26 3 5 Sloping piping 462 26 3 6 Direct setting of Insulation Thickness amp Material 463 26 3 7 Bending Machine NC Output 463 26 3 8 Improved production checks 465 26 3 9 Material search for Pipe Bending Machine setup 465 26 4 Structures 465 26 4 1 New Bent Panel 12 1 SP4 465 26 4 2 Steelwork Connectivity Upgrade 466 26 5 Hole Management Enhancements 466 26 5 1 Hole Management Enhancements 12 1 SP4 467 26 5 2 Create Holes 467 26 5 3 Merge Holes 467 26 5 4 Modify and Delete Holes 468 26 5 5 Utilities 468 26 5 6 Configuration of Hole Management Data 470 26 5 7 Hole Association Manager 470 26 6 Penetration with Piping Component 472 26 6 1 Creation of Penetration 473 26 7 Standard Model Library 474 26 8 Clash Utility enhancements 475 26 8 1 Reports 480 26 9 Cable Design 481 26 9 1 Copy Cable 12 1 SP2 481 Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd xiii AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 9 2 Cable Tray Volume Converter 12 1 SP2 26 10 Multi Discipline Supports 26 10 1 Cable Tray Supports 26 10 2 Automatic generation of pads 26 10 3 Updating client project defaults 26 11 Outfitting Piping lsometrics 26 11 14 New Output File Formats Inclu
429. tional properties Furthermore the same formatted file can be used to create new RSOs with the restriction that definition is made in principle planes with one face only The boundary definition data is now specified in an unambiguous way on the second row of each RSO Definition data consists of an envelope name and bounding information given in a defined order For a RSO in a X plane the order is SB PS TOP BOT For a RSO in a Y plane the order is TOP BOT AFT FOR For a RSO in a Z plane the order is AFT FOR SB PS The previously existing limit data is not used when defining a new RSO anymore this information is only used when adding functional properties on limits Benefits Definition data is now unambiguous Compatibility Constraints Old CSV files needs to be updated if the intention is to create new RSOs For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Batch Utilities Extracting RSO Information and Hull Structural Design Batch Utilities Updating RSO Information Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structure Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 136 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 5 Spaces in Structural Design Export 12 1 SP3 Description Spaces from Space Management are now exported in the same way as compartments from Initial Design Benefits More complete data Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Desi
430. tions is enabled when Office is installed This will install the Microsoft Microsoft Office Interop Excel dll If this assembly is not enabled invoking the Excel import facility will not work Screen Font for GUI The Hull amp Outfitting user interface version 11 6 onwards requires the use of the Arial Unicode MS font which is supplied with Microsoft Office version 2000 onwards and is usually installed automatically when using Windows XP or later For further information please refer to hitp office microsoft com enus help HP052558401033 aspx If this font is not installed some of the text in the user interface may become illegible The layout of some GUI forms may also be adversely affected if the screen font size is not set to the smallest size which is usually default This setting is accessed from the Control Panel and is referred to as Normal in Windows XP or Smaller 100 in Windows 7 3 4 Graphics Cards Due to the rapidly changing availability of hardware accelerated OpenGL graphics cards an up to date list of supported cards is not included in the documentation released with Hull amp Outfitting The AVEVA Product Support website accessible from http Awww aveva com IT Configuration section contains a list of tested and supported graphics cards 3 5 Environment Variables Hull amp Outfitting and some of the other products rely on the use of environment variables for various aspects of confi
431. tive Jig Pillar Enhancements 12 1 SP3 Hull Mark Update 12 1 SP3 Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design 12 1 SP3 Minimal Bending Templates 12 1 SP3 Cutouts in Cross Bending Templates 12 1 SP3 Bent Platesin PPM 12 1 SP3 Labelled Texts and Symbols 12 1 SP3 Enhanced Dimensioning in Profile Sketches 12 1 SP3 New GSD Corner Distance Keywords 12 1 SP3 Enhanced Control of Profile Sketches 12 1 SP3 Deprecated Environment Variable 12 1 SP2 Holes in Brackets 12 1 SP2 Labelled Texts 12 1 SP2 Parts Menu Display 12 1 SP2 Bevel Chamfer Option Bevel for Shell Stiffener Ends Position of Upper and Lower Cutting Curve Position Control of Shell Profile and Plane Panel Stiffener Compensation for Shell Plate Thickness Top View of Stiffener Improved Weld Built Profiles before Bending Weight Unit in Profile Sketches Generic File Viewer Looking Field Changed for Hull Mark Projection Control of Marking Gap at Holes GSD Marking of Built Profiles Mark Reference Plane on Both Sides of Profiles Nest Profiles without Re st New Nesting Default Parameters Nesting Plug In Interface Storing Changes after Running Production Programs New MANU Data Model Automatic Naming of Production Sketches Find Documents Related to Production Parts Naming of Curved Plates and Stiffeners Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 181 182 183 184 185 187 188 189 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201
432. tly toa file of SDB format and can also be retrieved directly from such a file The function Tools Subpicture Save to SDB will let you define a subpicture and store in in an SDB file in the file system The function Insert Subpicture from SDB will let you retrieve a subpicture directly from an SDB file and place it in the drawing Benefits Storing the subpictures as SDB files makes itis easier to share them between projects Compatibility Constraints These two new functions have the same limitations as when you export import the whole drawing via the SDB format You will see the same geometry in the target drawing but the underlying PADD structure may not look exactly as it did in the source drawing The PADD structure is recreated in the target drawing based on the Marine Drawing object stored in the SDB file For example you will lose the associativity for labels and dimensions i e if the label dimension refers to a p point in the source drawing this will be a geometric point in the target drawing Thus the label dimension will not adjust to model changes when you do update annotation in the target drawing For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Drafting Operator s Instructions Tools Subpicture Save to SBD and Marine Drafting Drafting Operator s Instructions Insert Subpicture from SDB Affected Programs Marine Drafting Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 285 AVEVA
433. tribute Operator PROCESSAREA Equals Utilities 3 W Add filter gt 4 Delete filter Expression Filter Expression Wf STVNUM TagStatus ge 75 WV Add filter X Delete filter Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 367 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Filters Elements Mechanical Tags Attribute Filter Combine With AND OR Attribute Operator Value PROCESSAREA Equals 52 Expression Filter Expression F l STVNUM TagStatus gt 10 For More Information See user Guide Compare Update Compare and Update Data and Options and Mapping Options Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 368 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 4 Show in Diagram Option in Compare Update 12 1 SP3 Compare Update has a new Show in Diagram context menu The diagram view can be displayed when the source is Schematics Database the selected source item appears on a diagram and the SVG file is available for that diagram F TESTEQUI21 01 Yes EQUIPMENT 0 Vv Thee an aS EQUIPMENT 0 Show in Diagram TETEA C 0 For More Information See User Guide Schematics Compare Update Options and Mapping Grid Options Grid Context menu Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 369 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 22 5 Integrator Capability to Accept Differences 12 1 SP3 Integrator allows a designer to accept differences from the co
434. ts Better visibility of Engineering data in Diagrams Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Schematics Diagrams Working wth Diagrams Viewing Datasheets in Diagrams Affected Programs AVEVA Diagrams Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 380 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 23 3 Design Reuse for AVEVA Diagrams 12 1 SP4 Description Design Reuse is now available for AVEVA Diagrams and AVEVA Engineering AVEVA Marine only Ala amp avels AVEVA Diagrams Project mar Pipe 5 5 x Home Manage Insert View Admin a com fry H 7 ay fal emmy A AVEVA NET afa Command Batch dit Drawing Database Units Hneta Systems Rules Window Job ace Naming Upgrade Configuration Definition Epot import Settings Name Type Status Message Diagram test_01 SCDIAG 5 Schematic WORL Eh SCGROU UDA tests Pipelines S 6 SCPLIN A1A 01 10mmA SCBRAN A1A 01 10 g amp SCBRAN A1A 01 101 EE hE i SCSEG 1 3 Equipments Name Type Comn FP SCEQUI Equip 01 7 Sample_Equipment_1_Symbols SCSTENCIL Diagrams 7 Sample_Pipeline_Symbols SCSTENCIL iz SCDIAG Diagram_test_01 7 Sample_Valve_Symbols SCSTENCIL H E SCGROU TestDR F Equip 01 SCEQUIPMENT H E SCGROU TEST2 J SCSEGMENT 1 of SCBRANCH A1A 01 10mmA B 2 SCSEGMENT mE SCGROU TEST H E SCGROU Project_Templates g im SCGROU Project_Stencils H E SCGROU Piping Diagram
435. ts Ea MPKGFL ER1BendingTemplates S fs MPKGFL ER1DevelopedPlates J MPLATE ER1 CP1 1S J MPLATE ER1 CP1 1P Bo MPKGFL ER1PlanarPlates Em MPKGFL ER10ther Ba MANPKG ER2 a a Benefits e Easier to use e Easier to find information e Easier to distribute Compatibility Constraints Old projects must be upgraded to 12 1 using the Upgrade tool in the new ManuConfig addin For More Information Further details of the upgrading of old projects are given in the 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 226 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 60 Automatic Naming of Production Sketches Description Hull production programs running in batch can create receipt sketches which are given automatically generated names With this release a new set up tool is introduced for a uniform customisable naming of production sketches Users may now define how the sketch names should be put together by a set of rules The naming rules are stored in a file referenced by the logical variable SBH_DWGNAME_RULES Naming rules are defined individually for a number of applications Each rule consists of a keyword identifying the application followed by a number of attributes defining how the name is built up The naming rule attributes are applied in the order they are given Only rule attributes valid for the application may be given First rule attributes are interpreted and the re
436. tting under the Project menu in Admin Admin AVEVA PDMS Admin elements i A Admin Display Query Settings Utilities Project Data Remote Window Help Access Control Assistant T CE ADMIN Information Font Families System Explorer TrueType fonts Filar c E Fiter T Module Definitions E System WORL f Blen its Replicate H Expunge NT Authentication 3 V Propagate Link Documents 5 gt Data Access Control pr gt Initialise Location gt Locking amp Isolation d gt RTP OAS FAARIRO T Note Link Documents are only available in DESI databases Link Document Propagation can be enabled on the command line by setting the GLINKP attribute on the GLOCWL GL element The default is false indicating that Link propagation is disabled for the project To determine which documents require propagation the update process must scan applicable databases As this has a performance impact on the overall time for updates the administrator can select which databases to scan By default all DESI databases will be scanned for Link documents It is possible to disable Link Documents propagation for a single database via the CREATE MODIFY Database form by deselecting the Link Documents tick box Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 44 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin lt ThAM gt TEAMA Crvis Team lt TEAM gt TEAMB Equpm
437. ttings is selected then Visio decides which setting will be used Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation a Sy Element options gt Pipeline options Valve options Inline instrument options Fitting options Pipe destination options Offline instrument options Instrumentation line options Actuator options Equipment options Sub equipment Nozzle options Electrical connection options Cable options Multi cable options Ij Instrument relationship shape opl F E Annotation styles group 01 E Default options Colour Released to 3D Colour Linked to 3D Colour Pipeline Properties Dialog Custom Pipeline Properties Dialog Description Flow direction symbol s stencil Flow direction symbol GEG E Shape text options F Use shape settings Reroute HB Blue GB BlueViolet EA Violet True True Never reroute Select connector reroute style for newly created lines Diagrams Options Defaults Attribute Presentation Annotation settings Pipe Dimensioning Instrumentation Dimensioning HVAC Dimensioning Dialogues Catalogue search settings Auto formatting rules options S Element options Pipeline options Valve options Inline instrument options Fitting options Pipe destination options Offline instrument options gt Instrumentation line options Actuator options v j gt E Annotation styles group 01 E Default options Colour Released to 3D Colour Linked to 3D Col
438. ttributes other than distances and bores have the UNIT field set for the first time in previous versions of Hull amp Outfitting they were until now stored as values with no specified unit other than by use and convention they could change from application to application and project to project This approach is not compatible with automated conversion so the storage units must be defined For compatibility it is possible to set the units to NUMERIC which will disable Units conversion for that physical dimension Disabling a specific dimension in this way means that no advantage will be gained from the introduction of that dimension Previous versions of Schematic Model Manager had special units support for Angle Area Pressure Temperature Volume and Weight values that could be included in the IS015926 format import file Units UDAs were provided as mandatory UDAs and were attributes on each Diagram element SCDIAG The chosen units for these dimensioned quantities could be set in the Project Options form in Schematic Model Manager In 12 1 the new units capabilities mean that the special units support in Schematic Model Manager is no longer required Data imported in 12 1 will be stored in the appropriate units consistent with the data read from the ISO15926 import file The upgrade process for projects moving to 12 1 includes a part upgrade for Schematic Model Manager dimensioned data Please note that the CATA database elements MSET MTYP AT
439. types Fonts Spline settings Input layer Drafting layer File name Tribon name Import As Drawing type General drawing v Import Cancel Benefits An imported DXF DWG file can be given a drawing type Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operator s Instructions Drafting FILE IMPORT DXF and Operators Instructions Drafting FILE IMPORT DWG Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 291 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 292 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 30 Draw Outfitting Models 12 1 SP3 Description There are some performance improvements when drawing outfitting models The improvement can be noticed when adding new outfitting models to en existing view The performance will be significantly better when adding only a few outfitting models to a very large existing view Update design of a complete view is not affected You will benefit from the improvement in the Insert Model function when doing drag amp drop from the design explorer to an existing view or when inserting models via the Search Utility Another improvement is that you can now the update single outfitting models in a view via the Tools Model Exchange function There is one limitation though This incremental way of
440. ual sketch l eE T S ADP drawing f If you want to handle the new drawing type in your project you need to assign two new logical names in your marine project setup file D065 lt proj gt sdb n SB _ASSADP_ PDB B_ASSADP_PDB Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 251 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin SB_ASSADP_PDB_ PADD lt name_of dept gt lt name_of regi gt This is for the system to recognize the type This defines the name of the DEPT and then REGI where you want Marine Drafting to find your Assembly ADP drawings Benefits To make a distinction between general assembly drawings and drawings generated by Assembly ADP Compatibility Constraints Assembly Drawings created in earlier versions will still have the old drawing type Assembly Drawing and will thus not be listed as an Assembly ADP Drawing but as an Assembly Drawing For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 252 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 10 Multiple Select Description A very useful method for user to populate the assembly structure by design parts is provided by the drag amp drop facilities However collection elements from Design Explorer only allow single element selection With the EditElements addin now available in the Hull and Outfitting Design modules multiple element selection is enabled e g for collecting ele
441. ull the variable will not be used any longer in that project For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 107 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 15 Hole Annotation Enhancement Description The possibility to annotate holes in symbolic vews has been extended with more customisation possibilities The following 3 default values have been added to the Hull Modelling default file HOLE_ANNOTATE_SIGN The sign in the dimension string between the dimensions e g the X in HO200X500 Default value is x HOLE_ANNOTATE_USE_TYPE If set the text in the hole type will be omitted e g HO200X500 will be 200X500 The value is unset by default HOLE_AN_MIN_TEXT_HEIGHT The minimum text height for the hole annotation Default value is 2 0 Benefits Enables the user to control the annotate hole note better Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling Default File of Planar Modelling Picture Derivation Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 108 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 16 Hull Qualities in CATA Description The definition of the Hull qualities has been moved from the file assigned to the environment variable
442. ull Design Outfitting Assembly Planning Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 246 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 5 Assembly Selection 12 1 SP2 Description A new AssemblySelection PMLNET object is introduced to enable PML developed functionality to act on selections made in the Assembly Planning GUI Selections made in the assembly tree and list views are exposed to PML through this new object The object also provides an event mechanism to expose when a selection in Assembly Planning has changed Benefits Enables for PML developed functionality to operate on elements currently selected in Assembly Planning GUI Compatibility Constraints None For More Information User Guide Assembly Planning Graphical User Interface Context Sensitive Menu Functions Affected Programs Hull Design Outfitting Assembly Planning Aveva Marine AssemblyPlanning Utilities dll new Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 247 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 6 Assembly Planning Context Menu 12 1 SP2 Description The Assembly Planning addin has now got its own dedicated UIC file The purpose is in first hand to enable for users to append customised functions to the Assembly Planning context menu Benefits Assembly Planning earlier shared UIC information with its hosting module which not was possible when hosted by Outfitting module with new UIC file Compatibility Constraints
443. up Customisation and Standards Profiles in AVEVA Marine Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine Customer Set up of Endcut Standard User Defined Endcut Setting up User Defined Endcuts Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 103 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 11 Split of Hull Notes and Posno Description The identification of a Hull Note and Position number has been split in the way that a Hull Note is recognized as a note and not as a position number Benefits Possibility to handle all the Hull Notes without disturbing the position numbers in e g delete notes all Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Detail Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 104 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 11 12 Enhanced Selection Filtering Description The OR syntax can now be used when defining filters in the Selection Tool In the general Selection Tool different kind of filters are used to extract the model items both when defining the scope of plane panels and the groups within these panels The filters can be used both for selecting blocks or panels with wildcards and by using the scheme syntax to select panels or groups The wildcard characters and represents any single character and any number of characters
444. urrent drawing The drag amp drop is a new feature in this release please see a separate release note for more documentation Another improvement is that the assembly is always shown with the correct number of parts One effect of this improvement is that the appearance of hull models may be different from what it was in previous releases regarding line styles colours p lines etc The appearance of the hull models will now be controlled by the representation rule set defined for the view This is valid for all view types Wireline Wireline Hidden Line Modelled Wireline Local Hidden Line Global Hidden Line and Universal Hidden Line Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 333 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Benefits It is easy to add assemblies tothe drawing The assemblies are always drawn with correct number of parts Compatibility Constraints The appearance of hull models may be different from what it was in previous releases regarding line styles colours p lines etc For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 334 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 19 66 RSO Default Colours Description An RSO is given a default colour related to the type of RSO The following colours are used The colour settings are valid both when an RSO is drawn in drawings and when drawn in the 3D RSO Type Compartment
445. urrent drawing and the user can choose which texts to convert Benefits Make it possible to correct texts with the wrong codepage Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 332 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 65 Draw Assemblies Description There are new ways to insert an assembly into the drawing The first one is in the Insert model dialog which has been updated with a new line for assemblies Model Selection z View All i Projection w e Collected Models So far O Selection Criteria Type Block Zone Wid Env Asm J Plane Panel C Curved Panel C Shell Profile C Plate C Template C Outfitting C Hull Curve O rso C Surface C Hulimark C Block CI Space C Compartment Filter on C Compartment Contents ss C Use Box List Filter 1 Verify In the name field you can give the name of an assembly object optionally with wild cards In the Block Zone WId EnwAsm you can give a name of an assembly or assembly world element If given the search will be limited to assemblies below this element If this field is left empty the whole MDB is searched The second possibility to add an assembly to the drawing is to use drag amp drop from the design explorer you select an assembly in the design explorer drag it and drop it in a view in the c
446. utions Ltd v 449 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Explorer Annotations Key pane The Element History and Key panes are for information only the Model Timeline and Stamps panes allow selection of a session or stamp upon which to base the display of changes in the Explorer pane and optional highlighting of changes in the 3D view Once a session or stamp is selected changes can be highlighted by clicking the Refresh button at the bottom left of the Add in see above Two modes of change reporting are supported according tothe current selection in the drop down list in the bottom right of the Add in Only Changes At shows only the changes that were made when the highlighted session was created This may have been a Savework or as the result of an extract operation such as a flush or refresh as indicated by the Reason column in the Model Timeline table Note that highlighting in the Explorer pane and in the 3D view is always with reference to the current state of the model it is possible that no changes from a previous session will be visible for example if all changes were made to elements that have since been deleted All Changes Since shows all changes that have been made in all databases in the MDB between but not including the selected session or stamp and the current state of the model This does include any unsaved changes Note that for large models this change analysis can take some time When the Refresh
447. v Show User Defined Select Functional Description C Show System Defined Functional Descriptions 300 Interior_cutouts holes in TB 301 Carling Or Key in Functional Code 301 First select an interval from the drop down list This interval represents either a component on a planar or curved panel or a planar or curved panel When the selection is made the functional descriptions that are specifically defined for this interval will be presented and possible to select A Tick box is available to show all system defined functional descriptions in case these are the ones to be set on components or panels It s also possible to key in any integer value Once the selection is made the use of the OK button will hide the dialogue and the user is requested to pick components or panels depending on the interval that was selected Picked elements will be updated with the selected functional description Involved objects are made active before the update and it s necessary to apply the changes to get the update confirmed Benefits Easier update of functional descriptions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 112 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin See User Guide Hull Detailed Design Planar Modelling Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions Hull Tools Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions
448. vious Releases 2 1 Moving to 12 1SP4 from Previous Releases 12 1 SP4 2 2 Compatibility 12 1 SP3 2 2 1 Optional database upgrade 2 2 2 Sharing data between 12 1SP2 and 12 1SP3 2 3 Upgrade Overview 2 4 Upgrade Framework 2 5 Database Version Control 2 6 Part Upgrades Outside the Framework 2 7 Database Upgrade Optional Upgrade 12 1 SP3 2 8 Global and Extracts 2 9 The Upgrade Process 2 9 1 Locking the Project 2 10 Extract Hierarchies 2 10 1 Working Extracts 2 10 2 Offline Locations 2 11 International Characters Unicode 2 12 Units of Measure 2 12 1 Units in Outfitting 2 12 2 Units in Hull and Drafting 2 13 Schematics Functions 3 Configuration 3 1 Operating Environment 3 2 PC Hardware Configuration 3 3 Microsoft Windows 12 1 SP2 3 3 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 3 2 Microsoft Office amp Fonts Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd m A NA N N h oO O WAN nN NO GAGA aaa Qqg RA OO mla AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 3 4 Graphics Cards 3 5 Environment Variables General System Changes 4 1 Access Platforms Stairs and Ladders ASL 12 1 SP4 4 2 Unicode Character Handling 4 2 1 Restrictions 4 2 2 Textual File Handling 4 2 3 Filenames and PML 4 2 4 Using Forms and Menus 4 2 5 Using TTY Mode 4 2 6 Graphical Output 4 3 Units of Measure 4 3 1 Supported Dimensions and Units 4 3 2 Other UNITS Commands 4 3 3 Upgrading to use new Units 4 3 4 Units set up for Hull and Drafting 4 4 Enhanced Password P
449. w the user to specify format units and precision for coordinates on the iso COFORMAT Selects the format for the coordinates output on isometrics USER User Defined using Alternative Texts as before Format User ENU E N U format User XYZ X Y Z coordinates SHIP Ship Reference system NUMB FRS Purely numeric COUNITS Selects units for the coordinates Command Units Example MM millimetres 6263 48 CM centimetres 626 348c m METRE metres 6 26348 m FINCH feet and inches 20 6 19 32 US FINCH feet and inches US style 20 6 19 32 DECINCH decimal inches 246 59 INCH fractional inches 246 19 32 US INCH fractional inches US style 246 19 32 CODECP Selects the precision number of decimal places for DECINCH Imperial decimal coordinates m Imperial Precision No of decimal places inch h 0 precision to nearest inch 1 precision to nearest 1 10 inch COIMPP Selects the precision for Imperial fractional coordinates FINCH feet and inches Fractional Precision 1 16 USFINCH feet and inches US style INCH fractional inches USINCH fractional inches US style 26 11 5 Drawing Pipe Spool This enables isometrics to be drawn of the PSPOOL elements stored in PIPEs under a PSLIST This is an alternative used by pipe fabrication checking to the SPOOL elements in the SPOOLER database Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 26 11
450. within each space Space Management requires a specific license Benefits Key features are e A new tool for simulations estimations and decisions de risking design of more complex ships e Better productivity for GA activities and drawings e Better cost follow up by getting early and precise estimates of e g insulation material or painting areas e Increased production efficiency by optimisation of block structure Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Space Management Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 125 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 13 1 Surface Analysis 12 1 SP3 Description Functions have been added to Space Management and to Surface Manager to analyse the hydrostatic parameters of a surface or to do tank capacity analysis on a compartment arrangement The added functions are not complete and not intended for productive use but are available for evaluation and to give comments for further development For this reason all documentation is currently only within this release note In final versions it will be part of all official documentation 13 1 1 Surface analysis Surface analysis can be used on surfaces that are closed or can be closed by a plane The analysis will calculate physical properties of closed volumes to use for the stability analysis There are two analyses available hydrostatic para
451. xecuted at regular intervals Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Design Reuse Affected Programs Hull Design Outfitting Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 240 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 17 1 PML Triggers 12 1 SP4 Description Design Reuse is enhanced to support Distributed Attributes attached to model data Model data handled as transfer item in Design Reuse will take information stored as Distributed Attributes into consideration in the transfer process User owns the possibility to switch on off the consideration of Distributed Attributes per transfer item type via the ltemSettings xml file Benefits Information attached to model data via the concept of Distributed Attributes is handled and copied as any ordinary attributes The definitions of Distributed Attributes stored in dictionary databases are not transferred by Design Reuse but have to be setup in target project in beforehand by the lexicon module Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Rfere to User Guide Design Reuse Transfer Item Details Affected Programs Design Reuse Addin Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 241 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 18 AVEVA Assembly Planning 18 1 Assembly Drawings amp Parts List 12 1 SP4 Description The assembly parts lists generation within the Assembly Auto Drawing Produc
452. y Line by Direction and Length It works in the same way as Line by two Points except that the length of the resulting line is given in the Combo Box in the Geometry toolbar Benefits This implements a convenient way of creating a line with a given direction and length Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Marine Drafting Operator s Instructions Format Geometry mode Polyline Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 319 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 53 Simple Arithmetic in 2D Offset Input Description When giving an offset during point definition it is now possible to key in simple arithmetic expressions in the 2D Offset input dialog For example the following input is valid 0 02 300 pi N Benefits Simple arithmetic accepted in the offset input dialog Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 320 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 54 Automatic Chaining of New Contours to Existing Ones Description When creating a new contour this will optionally be chained to existing contours in the drawing This options is controlled by a new Drafting default keyword AUTO_CHAIN with values Yes or No system default The system will com
453. y Vitesse triggers can be replaced by similar PML driven functions Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Legacy Applications Developers Toolkit Vitesse Triggers Affected Programs Marine Drafting and Hull Design Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 279 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 19 New Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing Production ADP 12 1 SP3 Description In 12 1 SP3 we have introduced some new marine drawing types that will be set for drawings generated with the ADP tools in Marine Drafting This will make it easier to access the drawings via the Open Drawing dialog in Marine Drafting In the PADD database the new types are visible as new values for the MARPTYPE attribute of the SHEET element There are also corresponding project envronment variables to set up where Marine Drafting should look for the drawing types in the Open Drawing dialog The basic variable like SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB is normally just set to itself SB HVAC SKETCH PDB is the marine project setup file while the _ PADD variable should define the DEPARTMENT and REGISTRY where the drawings of this type are stored Example of setup lt var name SEB HVAC SKETCH PDB gt lt value gt lt CDATA SB_ HVAC SKETCH PDB gt lt value gt lt var gt lt var name SB_ HVAC SET Ce PDB PADD gt lt value gt lt CDATA HVA Sketch HVACSk
454. y a new Upgrade Framework which converts a Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 project to 12 1 This is initiated from Admin using the following commands in the Command Pane or TTY mode lock dbupgrade project to latest unlock This procedure may also be used with Global projects if some additional precautions are taken A brief summary is given below further details are given in the 12 0 to 12 1 Upgrade manual Earlier projects should first be upgraded to Hull amp Outfitting 12 0 Schematic Model Manager has its own units handling at Hull and Outfitting 12 0 It also has its own upgrade mechanism which is separately documented the software will advise if it is necessary to run this Units Upgrade Required It is recomended that you run the Schematic Model Manager Units Upgrade Please see the documentation for more information C Dont show this again 2 4 Upgrade Framework The Upgrade tool is invoked from Admin it controls the upgrade process and runs each Part Upgrade in the appropriate order Upgrades relevant to Hull amp Outfitting that are covered by this process are e UKEYs now include database number to avoid duplicates e Performance of finding database elements index by type e Module Definitions new TAGS module and renamed Marine Drafting module e Character handling Unicode representation for names text etc e HULL FEM Data Model e Compressed HULL Objects e New Index on Hull Object Type e Start Va
455. year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 160 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 4 Show Scheme Update 12 1 SP4 Description The function Scheme Show now also shows the subpanel schemes for a knuckled panel as the Scheme Edit function The window now has a single Close button and also long schemes can be scrolled all the way Benefits Subpanel schemes also shown for a knuckled panel Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Only noted here Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design Planar Modelling Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 161 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 15 5 Mixed FRP and Steel Project 12 1 SP4 Description It is now possibility to mix both FRP and Steel models within one project This is done by setting the variable SBH_GRP to Mixed With this setting it is possible to define separate Steel and FRP blocks When a panel shell profile or plate is added to a FRP block the specific FRP values will be requested in the same way as when defining in a specific FRP project The definition of FRP object containing set up data is made using Inithull This is the same for both Mixed and specific FRP projects Benefits The system supports mixed project with both Steel and FRP parts Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design Setup Customisation and Standards Fibr
456. year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 272 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 13 Default Initial Point Mode 12 1 SP4 Description In Marine Drafting 12 1 SP4 it is possible to control the initial 2D point definition mode when invoking a geometry definition function A new Drafting Default keyword DEF_POINT_MODE has been introduced for this purpose Keyword DEF_POINT_MODE System default value 2 Cursor position Explanation Controls the initial 2D point mode when invoking geometry definition functions Legal values The wanted 2D point definition mode is given as an integer 1 Keyin 2 Cursor position 3 End or node point 4 Existing point 5 Symbol connection 6 Auto point 7 Point on arc at angle 8 Arccentre 9 Point at distance along 10 Mid point 13 Intersecting point 21 Closest segment point 22 Centre of gravity 23 Event point Benefits Possibility to control initial 2D point definition mode Compatibility Constraints None For More Information Refer to User Guide Draft Marine Drafting User Guide Appendices Drafting Default File Keywords Affected Programs Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 273 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 274 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 14 Labels 12 1 SP4 Description In 12 1 SP4 there are many improvements for creating and modifying l
457. ynamics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 91 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 25 Connected Compartments Description Compartments specified as connected to damaged compartments are now just added to the list of damaged compartments for the analysis and treated as being damaged to the outside waterline Previously such compartments were combined to form one multi compartment but this meant that only one damage permeability could be applied which was that of the first damaged compartment With this new method each connected compartment will have its own damage and probabilistic stability permeability The latter can vary with loading draft Also compartments are now connected in one direction only Flood water will flow from the first to second compartment but not the other way Note that this means that to specify flow in both directions two connected compartment records are now needed Benefits Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Initial Design Hydrostatics Screen Based Reference Guide Dialogs in Detail General Particulars Openings and Deck Edge Points and Other Data Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 92 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 10 26 ABS Towing Criteria Description The special ABS bollard pull criterion ha
458. ype fonts are more general and fit in better with the database and other parts of the system Compatibility Constraints Please note that in order to use the Marine System font in Marine Drafting or in Hull Design it first needs to be registered in the project using the Admin module just like any other TrueType font For More Information User Guide Marine Drafting Appendices System defined Text Fonts Affected Programs Hull Design Marine Drafting Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 304 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 19 40 Insert Text Shortcut Keys 12 1 SP2 Description New shortcut keys have been added tothe Insert Text form in Marine Drafting 12 1 SP2 for easier access to the previously entered texts When the text box has focus pressing ALT Up or ALT Down will move focus to the history combo box containing the previously entered texts and scroll the combo box list one step up or down Insert Text xj ALT Down Tr S Sa ey When the combo box has focus the drop down list could be displayed by pressing the ALT Down keys again To cycle through the history combo box items while keeping focus to the text box press CONTROL Up or Control Down As before following standard Windows behaviour focus can be moved with the TAB key SHIFT TAB to move focus backwards and the combo box can also get focus by using the mouse Benefits The new shortcuts make it possible
459. yright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 145 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 14 Right Click Menu on RSO Description A right click menu with RSO functions has been added when right clicking RSO geometry ina drawing The following menu is displayed and functions can be selected to operate on the indicated RSO RSO KeylIn RSO Edit RSO Copy RSO Move RSO Rename RSO Recreate RSO Property RSO Generate Panel Benefits Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way Compatibility Constraints None For More Information See User Guide Hull Structural Design Functions Overview Right Click Contexts Menus and AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview Right Click Contexts Menus Affected Programs AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management Copyright 1974 to current year AVEVA Solutions Ltd 146 AVEVA Marine 12 1 SP4 User Bulletin 14 15 Stable Multi Face RSO Reference Description When positioning a plane panel relative toa multi face RSO either the face number or an axis aligned ray point can be used If e g the statement wizard is used to build up the panel and an RSO face is picked via the graphical display the direct face number is added to the panel definition In the panel statement it shows as a clause of the form NO lt number gt However if the RSO is modified it may be that the faces are renumbered and all the panels located by the RSO may get the wrong

User Bulletin. - AVEVA Product Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents